Home

User's Guide - iinet.net.au

1. This Type N connection is used to output signals from the RF Generator and to input RF signals Overpower Damage Refer to the Test Set s front panel for maximum input power level Exceeding this level can cause permanent instrument damage If the RF power at the RF IN OUT port exceeds allowable limits a loud warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen If this occurs disconnect the RF power press MEAS RESET and allow the Test Set to cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on this port Operating Considerations This port must be used when measuring TX RF Power Signals lt 200 mWatts can be input to the ANT IN connector for all RF measurements except TX Power This port can be selected in the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST RF ANALYZER or SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens See Also Displaying Measurements on page 60 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys fb Main Menu SERIAL PORT NOTE NOTE Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions This 6 pin RJ 11 dual serial port is used to input and output serial data for entering programs printing tests results and screen images and sending test results to a connected controller disk drive or terminal Operating Considerations The serial communications settings are defined on the I O CONFIGURE screen Using Port B The second serial port B is only used
2. AF Cnt Gate 50 0 v CLK AF Freq Count Rear panel Mod In Q Ext Mod Frequency Display From MIC ACC Mic Mod Counter From AM FM FM Mod Modulators AM Mod From AUDIO In Hi Audio In De Emphasis De Emp Gain 750 us Of 0 dB Notei Gan posnet 600 To Hi AUDIO In Lo G Float AUDIO In Lo gt Gnd SINAD Gnd Distortion To Internal Voltmeter AC Level DC Current Zero Filters To Internal x Voltmeter Audio Monitor a Output Rear Panel at DC Measurement To Oscilloscope To Decoder To Internal Dh Voltmeter Speaker a ALC u t a peaker Vo Snore Pot Off Figure 15 AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram 104 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS afascrn fh The Settling Gain Cnt1 and Ext Load R fields are not shown Variable Frequency Notch if purchased Main Menu Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Field Descriptions AC Level AF Anl In This measurement displays either rms potential voltage or audio power Watts or dBm Operating Considerations When the unit of measure is changed to measure AF power the external load resistance must be specified Refer to Ext Load R on page 110 The input for the ac level measurement on this screen is always the AUDIO IN connectors See Also Entering and Changing Numbers on page 66 The audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer When selected this field displays a list of choices Signals
3. Figure 54 UniqChOrd Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel RANDU The 24 bit random number issued by the base station in the Unique Challenge Order Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 232 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC SSD1 Message Fields Figure 55 TIT2 RANDSSD_1 RSVD Parity Set Messase First SSD Update Order Word _RANDSSD_1 FVC SSD1 Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message The most significant 24 bits of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order Reserved for future use Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 233 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC SSD2 Message Fields Second SSD Update Order Word RANDSSD_2 Figure 56 FVC SSD2 Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message RANDSSD_2 The subsequent 24 bits follow
4. SIGNALING DECODER Frea On off Status Sym Frea Error Tine Tine Idle Hz E 2 RE Ee Node Tone Sea EiStcor Meas Standard Gate Tine AF Anl In Input Level To Screen Tris Level alla 333 av enon RADIO INT tone dec wmf The Tone Sequence Decoder Screen Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in this screen Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal when Single is selected 341 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Tone Sequence Decoder Freq Freq Error Gate Time Input Level 342 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu This measurement column lists the tone frequency for each symbol received in the tone sequence This measurement column lists the frequency difference between the tone frequency specified for each symbol in the Tone Sequence Encoder screen and the frequency measured for each symbol in the Tone Sequence Decoder screen Operating Considerations The decoder and encoder Standard fields are interactive The standard you choose in either field is automatically selected for the other This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been triggered This
5. TX Freq Error FM Deviation J TX Frequency AM Depth C Level 2 Power t easuremen Reference MIS ACC EXT Key On Off Input Atten Auto Hold IF Filter 0 y 230 kHz 0 db RF RF X IF IF 20 db STAGES LN 1d STAGES 40 db A Tune Mode Tune Freq Auto Manual 150 000000 MHz RF Cnt Gate 50 0 ms To RF Freq Counter CLK AF Frequency Counter Signal Analyzer Squelch i gt Pot RF ANALYZER Functional Block diagram S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSTrfanscrn fh Main Menu Field Descriptions TR Freauency MHz 150 584820 al 00002 IF Filter kHz Tune Mode Input Port i AutoManualpegERF In Ant 1 Sauelch Pot Input Atten Hold Tune Frea MHz El Sensitivity Figure 120 The RF Analyzer Screen AC Level RF ANALYZER FM Deviation kHz RF Cnt Gate ms Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen 128 3 Ext TH Key ANL TA Pur Zero E zero AHL CODER DECODER TA al Meos ONESIES SiE rfascrn wmf Field Descriptions This is the default measurement for this field The type of measurement listed here is dependent on the AF Anl In settings See Also AC Level on page 506 AF Anl In on page 105 Displaying Measurements on page 60 483 Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions AM Depth Ext TX key Distn FM Deviation 484 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rfanscrn fh Main Menu
6. When used as an input the TX Power and the Spectrum Analyzer s marker level Lvl measurements are increased by that amount This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On See Also RF Level Offset on page 271 This field enables disables the RF level offsets entered in the RF In Out Duplex Out and Antenna In fields below it e When set to On the RF Generator s amplitude and RF Analyzer s power measurement are offset by the values entered in these fields e When set to Off the values in these fields are ignored See Also Antenna In on page 262 Duplex Out on page 265 RF Chan Std on page 269 271 an wenu Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions RF Offset This field is displayed when the RF Display field has Freq selected This field enables disables the RF Generator RF Analyzer frequency offset specified in the Gen Anl field below it Operating Considerations When an RF offset is used changing the RF Generator s frequency or RF Analyzer s tune frequency automatically alters the other setting On screens where both fields are not shown such as the RX TEST and TX TEST screens you will not see the corresponding field change See Also Setting an RF Generator Analyzer Offset on page 87 272 7 Tr Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions RX TX Cntl This function controls automatic screen changes between the RX TEST and TX
7. Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RVCOrdCon Message Fields Display Word RY YCOrdCon Order Confirmation Message Figure 29 RVCOrdCon Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile T This field displays the message type received from the mobile station e Set to 1 to identify the message as an origination or an order e Set to 0 to identify the message as an order response or page response Local This field displays the local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test Set 178 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions ORDQ This field displays the received order qualifier The field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action Order This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the Test Set RSVD Reserved for future use Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 179 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptio
8. Coupling AC DC DC FM Zero AF Gen 1 Freq AF Gen 1 To 1 0000 mT 3 00 gt AF Gen 2 Freq AF Gen 2To 1 0000 FM m kHz off Audio Out AC DC Y Audio Out Figure 121 RF GENERATOR Functional Block Diagram 494 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSTrfgsern fh Main Menu Field Descriptions Figure 122 AC Level TR Freauency MHz 150 084277 Th Power RF ae Frea AfGeni Frea MHz kHz Amplitude 2 AFGeni To Atten Hold n Utt FH Courlina Qutput Port MIRA EIER Out Cur loc FH Zero The RF Generator Screen m 0 00002 RF GENERATOR FM Deviation 127 0 RR Free 1 3421 AFGene Frea Mic Bde Enp kHz AFGenz To FA off Audio Out Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions kHz ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT rigscrn wmf This measurement displays either rms potential voltage or audio power Watts or dBm Operating Considerations When the unit of measure is changed to measure AF power the external load resistance must be specified Refer to Ext Load R on page 508 The input for the ac level measurement on this screen is always the AUDIO IN connectors See Also Entering and Changing Numbers on page 66 ain wenu 495 Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions AFGen1 Freq AFGen2 Freq AFGen 1 To 496 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSTrfgsern fh This
9. For detailed step by step instructions about using the TESTS screens see your Radio Test Software s documentation or the Test Set s Programmer s Guide Chapter 22 Tests Screen Description of the Tests Subsystem Tests Subsystem Screens When you press the TESTS key you access the main TESTS screen The other screens of the subsystem are accessed using the CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE or SET UP TEST SET lists at the bottom of this screen TESTS Subsystem Screens Main Menu is used to load a test procedure from a disk RAM ROM or memory card It is also used to access the other screens in the Tests Subsystem Channel Information is used to specify transmitter and receiver frequency infor mation for the radio being tested and to enter squelch and signaling information Test Parameters is used to tell the Test Set the requirements of the test system for testing your radio Order of Tests is used to define a test sequence from a list of possible tests Pass Fail Limits is used to specify the upper and lower limits for each test point Ifa limit is violated during a test an F appears next to the test value to indicate a failure Save Delete Procedure is used to save and delete test procedures Execution Conditions is used to control which test results are output and where the results are printed CRT printer This screen also controls whether tests run contin uously or singly and whether the test continues or stops afte
10. Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Function Generator Decoder Function Generator Decoder SIGNALING DECODER Status Idle Freauency Mode Func Gen BMGS Gate Time ne AF Anl In To Screen RF GEN Input Level Tria Level 383 nY func dec wmf Figure 77 The Function Generator Decoder Screen AF Anl In Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in this screen See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 307 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Function Generator Decoder Arm Meas Frequency Gate Time Input Level 308 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal when making single measurements This measurement displays the decoded signal s frequency This field specifies the minimum time the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been triggered This field specifies the signal level that you input after de emphasis if it is turned on The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false trig
11. SIGNALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 Sequence On Time Status Send Mode Idle Twist Off Time Bursts Mode HETE dB ns M nord AFGeng To To Screen F GEN RF ANL Audio Qut AF AHL AC YO SCOPE SPEC AHL ENCODER DECODER RADIO IHT More dtmf enc wmf The DTMF Sequence Encoder Mode Screen This audio frequency generator control contains two fields e The upper field determines whether the DTMF sequence modulates the RF Generator or is output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off The output level is the peak value for each tone pair regardless of the Twist and Pre Emp settings See Also Twist on page 388 385 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 DTMF Sequence Encoder Audio Out Bursts FM Coupling On Time Off Time 386 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the DTMF Sequence Generator to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out This field defines the number of sequences output each time Send is selected This function only works when the Send Mode field is set to Burst This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear p
12. This field changes the audio beeper volume by selecting the desired level from a list of choices The beeper always beeps when the instrument is turned on regardless of this setting Operating Considerations The beeper alerts you any time a message is displayed Since a message may be removed from the screen before you notice it it is better to leave the beeper on to alert you to errors during operation The beeper s volume setting is retained when the instrument is turned off This field specifies the RF channel spacing when the RF Display field is set to Chan and the RF Chan Std field is set to USER DEF For example entering 25 kHz causes a 25 kHz spacing between each channel If the receive frequency for channel 1 is 150 500 MHz channel 2 s receive frequency would be 150 525 MHz Operating Considerations The value of this field is only used if the RF Display field is set to Chan and the RF Chan Std field is set to USER DEF See Also Gen Anl on page 266 RF Chan Std on page 269 Base Freq User Defined on page 263 Date Duplex Out Firmware Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions This field specifies the current date for the internal clock The date can be read by a controller using GPIB and printed on test results The format is MMDDYY Month Day Year using two digits for each term When entering months January through September 01 09 the leading zero is not displayed w
13. This field displays the percent depth of modulation of the AM signal The field is only visible when the AF ANL In field on the AF ANL screen is set to AM MOD or AM DEMOD This field controls a switch at the MIC ACC connector Its intended use is to key an external transmitter See Also MIC ACC on page 578 This field displays the percent of distortion for a 1 kHz signal tone This measurement field displays the frequency deviation between the FM signal and the carrier The FM Deviation measurement field is only displayed when the AF Anl In field is set to FM Demod or FM Mod See Also AF Anl In on page 105 Displaying Measurements on page 60 IF Filter Input Atten NOTE Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions This field selects the desired IF Filter bandwidth for modulated signals being analyzed Input attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN OUT and ANT IN connectors This function controls two settings e The upper field determines if you want the instrument to set the attenuation automati cally Auto or if you want to set the value manually Hold e The lower field displays the present attenuation value and it is used to set the desired attenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold Oscilloscope and Decoder Interference After a signal is input the RF autoranging function Auto takes a small amount of time to determine the required input atten
14. All NMT test programs must contain an EXIT n EXITX n or GOTO statement immediately before the END statement 337 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests 338 GOTOI Unconditionally jump to the label reference 1 Valid entries for the parameter I are integers from 0 to 255 The label reference must exist within the program or an error will occur after the END statement is entered All NMT test programs must contain an EXIT n EXITX n or GOTO statement immediately before the END statement RCHAN c Set the RF Analyzer to the correct frequency for NMT channel c Valid entries for the parameter c are as follows CC TC1 TCM TC2 TCA and AC TC1 and TCM are synonyms as are TC2 and TCA The frequency setting is determined by the channel number in the appropriate encoder field the selected DUT and the selected standard The parameter CC refers to the calling channel TC1 and TCM refer to the main traffic channel TC2 and TCA refer to the alternate traffic channel AC refers to the access channel TCHAN c Set the RF Generator to the correct frequency for NMT channel c Valid entries for the parameter c are as follows CC TC1 TCM TC2 TCA and AC TC1 and TCM are synonyms as are TC2 and TCA The frequency setting is determined by the channel number in the appropriate encoder field the selected DUT and the selected standard The parameter CC refers to the calling channel TC1 and TCM r
15. CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 for a description of each of the available reverse channel words 192 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen Step 13 and step 14 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desired word can be selected first then the mobile station can be handed off If the handoff is successful the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The handoff does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA screen When the CALL DATA screen is viewed the contents of the display words will contain the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registration origination page release order 193 ar wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Mobile Station Release 1 2 9 10 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on t
16. Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions RF analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations If the Tune Mode field is set to Auto the frequency is set by the instrument If the Tune Mode is set to Manual the operator must enter the desired frequency See Also Tune Mode on page 357 This field selects automatic or manual tuning of the RF Analyzer Auto tuning causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude above 36 dBm and set the tune frequency for that signal Manual tuning requires the operator to set the tune frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations Changing the Tune Mode also changes the RF frequency display Automatic tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement Manual tuning enables the TX Freq Error measurement After autotuning to the desired signal select Manual tuning to prevent the Tune Freq from changing when the signal is no longer applied 357 Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions TX Freq Error TX Frequency TX Power CAUTION 358 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS dxtscrn This measurement displays transmitter frequency error or absolute Transmitter Frequency depending on the Tune Mode setting See Also Tune Mode on page 357 Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN OUT port Operating Considerations Maximum signal leve
17. If the audio output speaker connection of your mobile is connected to the AUDIO IN connectors of the Test Set you can then make receiver audio quality measurements such as distortion at 1 kHz and SINAD Testing the Mobile s Transmitter The EDACS Encoder s information is used to help the EDACS Decoder receive and decode transmitted data from the mobile After entering all of the information in the EDACS Encoder screen the EDACS Decoder screen is accessed to get the mobile transmitting and to decode the digital data With the transmitter keyed you can access the TX TEST or DUPLEX TEST screen to measure transmitter power and transmitter frequency or transmitter frequency error You can also decode and display the transmitted data using the EDACS Decoder Refer to EDACS Decoder on page 301 for more information on EDACS Transmitter Testing Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the EDACS Encoder Mobile Receiver Test Procedure NOTE The following procedure establishes a control channel connection between the Test Set and your mobile and then performs a handshake to pass the mobile to a working channel Receiver measurements can then be made Each EDACS radio is pre programmed to access a specific control channel and one or more working channels Other identification information is also pre programmed into the mobile such as the Logical ID and Group ID numbers You cannot test an EDACS mobile without enter
18. Register Bw State Active Annunciator amp Active gt Meas None SEND key pressed while Roaming Page or in Service mode State Page Annunciator Page Meas RECCW A Y ae z State Originate Annunciator None Meas RECCW A RECCW B State Access RECCW E Annunciator Access lt Phone Number ESN hexadecimal Meas None q SCM Called number State Connected Annunciator Connect Release Meas RVCOrdCon Order TX Freq Error TX Power a en event initiated from Test Set END key pressed RVBSChal Handoff event initiated from Mobile while on an active NRVC Ord Station voice channel Figure 16 Call Processing State Diagram 120 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem Accessing the Call Processing Subsystem s Screens The Call Processing Subsystem screens are accessed by selecting CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu on the Test Set s CRT you may have to choose the More choice to display the CALL CNTL choice Call Processing Subsystem s Screens The Call Processing Subsystem consists of six screens e The CALL CONTROL is the primary Call Processing Subsystem screen This screen contains the fields used to configure the Test Set s parameters such as SAT Tone fre quency control channel
19. TEST screens during radio testing It is divided into two fields The Auto Manual field enables disables automatic switching between the RX TEST and TX TEST screens under certain testing conditions e Auto allows automatic screen changes between the RX TEST and TX TEST screens while testing radios e Manual requires you to select the RX TEST or TX TEST screen when performing ra dio tests The Carrier PTT field specifies the condition that will cause automatic screen changes e Carrier causes the instrument to automatically switch from the RX TEST screen to the TX TEST screen when an RF carrier is detected The screen returns to RX TEST when the carrier is no longer detected e PTT Push To Talk causes the instrument to automatically switch from the TX TEST screen to the RX TEST screen when a microphone connected to the MIC ACC connec tor is keyed The screen changes back to TX TEST when the microphone is no longer keyed Operating Considerations CAUTION The Test Set can be damaged by connecting a reverse power signal to the DUPLEX OUT port of gt 200 mW If Auto and Carrier are used together the screen may continuously change between RX TEST and TX TEST This only occurs if the RF IN OUT port is used with the RF Generator Amplitude set 235 dBm a much higher level than is typically used for receiver tests To prevent this problem set the Amplitude lt 35 dBm or Off or use the DUPLEX OUT port for the RF Generator s output 2
20. history for all of the instrument s measure ment algorithms such as the averaging function to restart all measurements that are in progress PRESET restores most instrument settings to their factory default states although most CONFIGURE screen changes are not affected Instrument self diagnostics are not run at this time ADRS SHIFT LOCAL displays the GPIB address of the Test Set SAVE SHIFT RECALL stores instrument setups See Also Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups on page 79 SCREEN CONTROL Keys RX TX DUPLEX TESTS MSSG HELP and CONFIG access several instru ment control and information screens PREV accesses the previous screen HOLD SHIFT PREV stops all measurements Selecting HOLD again resumes measurements PRINT SHIFT TESTS prints the entire contents of the displayed screen the time and date and any Print Title defined in the PRINT CONFIGURE screen See Also Printing A Screen on page 69 592 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys fb Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Key Descriptions Miscellaneous Keys and Buttons USER Keys SHIFT is used to select the blue labeled functions listed above some keys such as PRINT CONFIG RELEASE EEX and so forth CANCEL is used to cancel an entry in progress or to stop a running IBASIC program For example if you press RECALL to recall an i
21. 278 Arm Meas 278 Channel 278 Gate Time 279 Input Level 279 Measure 280 Num of Bits 280 Polarity 280 RECC Data 280 Single Cont 281 Stop Meas 281 Trig Level 281 Trigger Pattern bin 281 view of 277 NAMPS NTACS encoder mode AFGen2 To 363 366 372 Audio Out 363 B I Delay 364 Bursts 364 Busy Idle 364 Channel 364 Data Level 364 Data Rate 365 DSAT 365 FM Coupling 367 Message 368 370 Message DST 371 Polarity 371 Send 372 Send DSAT 372 Send Mode 373 Standard 373 Stop 373 Stop DSAT 373 Stop Filler 373 view of 361 narrowband decoder signaling standard 303 encoder signaling standard 393 for 900 MHz system 391 narrow band advanced mobile phone ser vice decoder 277 narrowband advanced mobile phone ser vice encoder 361 narrow band total access communication system decoder 277 narrowband total access communication system encoder 361 NATEL radio standard 440 NAWC 186 negative edge triggering 459 newlink ampolarity 371 NMT radio standard 326 436 NMT decoder mode AF Anl In 323 basic operation 328 D direction 324 Exit Status 323 First Frame 322 Frame Digits 324 Input Level 325 Load Test 325 Num 324 Run Test 326 Single Cont 326 Standard 326 Stop Test 326 Time 324 Trig Level 326 Type 324 view of 322 NMT ENCODER Calling Channel Power 432 NMT encoder mode Access Channel Number 428 Access Channel Power 428 A
22. 281 289 294 299 303 309 343 transmitter frequency 61 transmitter frequency error 61 transmitter power 61 101 116 358 490 501 569 voltage 105 495 506 memory cards 88 considerations 82 total RAM 274 Memory Cards battery see Battery 77 initializing 78 inserting 74 part numbers 74 removing 74 using 74 write protect switch 76 memory overflow error 82 Message Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 368 369 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 368 370 message abbreviated address word 216 access 208 access type parameters global action 208 beeper alert 264 C FILMESS 214 changing contents 251 control filler 214 detection 320 digital paging 382 error 611 error buffer overflow 293 extended address word order 217 extended address word voice channel assignment 219 FCC mobile station control word 1 216 FCC mobile station control word 2 or der 217 FCC mobile station control word 2 voice channel assignment 219 FOCC AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 FVC mobile station control order 220 FVC mobile station control voice channel assignment 222 224 226 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 240 242 244 246 FVC O Mes 220 FVC V Mes 222 224 226 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 240 242 244 246 FVC AMPS TACS 361 FVC NAMPS NTACS 361 IBASIC error 447 MS IntVCh 219 MS WORDI 216 MSMessOrd 217 opera
23. 313 test software 601 Radio Frequency Analyzer screen AC Level 484 RADIO INTERFACE connector description 583 Radio Interface screen VO Config 472 Input Data 470 Interrupt 1 471 Output Data 472 Parallel Data In 472 Send data 472 Strobe Pol 472 view of 470 Radio Repeater Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 303 radio standard AMPS 277 361 AMPS TACS 373 Bell 387 CCIR1 440 CCIR2 440 CCITT 440 CDCSS 378 DTMF 387 EDACS 4800 303 393 EDACS 9600 303 393 EEA 440 EIA 440 European 440 GSC 384 JTACS 277 361 373 LTR 406 NAMPS 277 361 NAMPS NTACS 373 NATEL 440 NMT 326 436 NMT STD450 329 436 NMT STD900 329 436 NTACS 277 361 POCSAG 384 TACS 277 361 tone sequence 440 ZVEIL 440 ZVEI2 440 Radio Unit Under Test Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 425 RAM for NMT decoder tests 333 procedure location 534 543 544 total available 274 RAM Initialize Service screen 512 RAM_MNG 557 ramp wave function generator 402 Range Hold Configure screen 268 Rev Pace T O Configure screen 448 recall example 80 instrument setups 79 saved register with hardware change 82 settings 79 RECALL key 592 using 79 RECC AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 282 measurements AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 284 RECC Data Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 280 RECCW A CALLP 167 messages 171 RECCW B CALLP 167 messages 173 RECCW C CALLP 167 messages 175 RECCW D CALLP
24. AC Level is also measured in the RX TEST screen but always uses the AUDIO IN connector as the input Refer to item 5 in Figure 8 on page 60 62 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Displaying Measurements SINAD Distortion SNR AF Frequency DC Level DC Current Selecting the currently displayed measurement causes the To Screen menu to be replaced by a list of measurement choices Select the new choice to replace the old measurement These measurements are available in the RX TEST TX TEST DUPLEX TEST RF GENERATOR RF ANALYZER and AF ANALYZER screens Refer to item 4 in Figure 8 on page 60 The Distortion measurement is only for a 1 kHz tone The SINAD measurement is normally shown using an analog type meter and small digits but can be changed to display in large digits only See To Use the Analog METER Format on page 65 DC Current can only be measured using the rear panel DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT connections Selecting SNR Signal Noise Ratio turns off the other audio measurement For more information on making this measurement see RF Gen Freq on page 509 AF Power AF Power is measured in the RX TEST screen by specifying the external load resistance Ext Load R and changing the unit of measure for the AC Level measurement to W Watts mW or dBm The milliwatt mW unit is selected by pressing SHIFT ENTER Refer to item 5 Figur
25. Access the CONFIGURE screen 2 Position the cursor in front of the RFGen Volts field 3 Press the Cursor Control knob or press ENTER to select 50 ohm or emf Voltage settings can control either e the voltage across a 50 ohm load or e the open circuit voltage emf This setting affects the RF Generator s and the Tracking Generator s amplitudes To Set the Date and Time 1 Access the CONFIGURE screen 2 Select the Date field and use the DATA keys to enter the date in the format shown be low the field 3 Select the Time field and use the DATA keys to enter the time in the format shown below the field The Test Set has a built in clock that keeps track of the date and time It is powered by an internal battery to keep it operating when the instrument is off 52 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS configts Chapter 2 Configuring Your Test Set General Operating Information To Change the Beeper Volume 1 Access the CONFIGURE screen 2 Select the Beeper field to display the volume choices 3 Select the desired choice The beeper alerts you to important operating and measurement conditions It beeps any time a message is displayed at the top of the screen These messages warn you of conditions such as exceeding the RF input level or trying to set a field to an unacceptable value Therefore it is recommended that you do not disable the beeper To Verify or Change the Low Battery Setting 1 Access the CON
26. After establishing a trunked transmit channel keep the transmitter keyed and perform the following steps A vk Y Mn Access the DECODER screen and select LTR for the Mode Set the LTR display field to Radio Set the Single Cont field to Single Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod Set the Input Level to 1 kHz Select Arm Meas to prepare the decoder for triggering The transmitted data should be displayed after being computed AnEnd of Data reached during decode message may be displayed at the top of the screen during decoding Four conditions usually cause this message to be displayed The Gate Time is too short to decode all the data Increase this setting The Input Level is set too low or too high Change the level The trunking data is inverted Select Invert in the Polarity field The LTR radio is not transmitting Re establish a transmit channel 315 ain wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the LTR Decoder Decoding Repeater Signaling Data Press the PRESET key e ee E So E 10 11 Access the DUPLEX TEST screen Set the Tune Mode to Manual Enter your repeater s transmit frequency in the Tune Freq field Select the Input Port RF IN OUT for direct transmitter to Test Set connections Ant ANT IN for off the air measurements Attach an antenna to the Test Set if you are making off the air measurements Access the DECODER and select the LTR mode Set the LTR display field to Repe
27. Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Ensure that the Test Set has Initialized Call Processing with Authentication See Initialize Call Processing with Authentication on page 155 for information on how to register the mobile station and activate Authentication Select AUTHEN on the To Screen menu The AUTENTICATION will be displayed Select RAND_U field Enter a new valid RAND_U value 6 digit hexadecimal Select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select Uniq Chal from the CC Order field The Access annunciator light will light while the Unique Challenge order is in progress If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel Unique Challenge Successful will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen If the order failed then Unique Challenge Failed will appear on the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen 161 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Performing a Unique Challenge on the Voice Channel 1 2 p pi 10 11 162 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fh Ensur
28. Description This field displays a description of the file chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field Exec Execution Cond Selecting this field displays the TESTS Execution Conditions screen 532 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestsern fh Main Menu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Main Menu Freq Channel Information Selecting this field displays the TESTS Channel Information screen IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl Selecting this field displays the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen Library This field displays the library information of the file chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field Parm Test Parameters Selecting this field displays the TESTS Test Parameters screen Print Printer Setup Selecting this field displays the TESTS Printer Setup screen Proc Save Delete Procedure Selecting this field displays the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen Program This field displays program information for the file chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field Run Test Selecting this field loads and runs the test chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field Select Procedure Filename This field is used to select the file you want to load from the location chosen in the Select Procedure Location field 533 an wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Main Menu Select Procedure Location This field is used the select the location of the procedure to load Procedures can
29. Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set NOTE Do not connect the antenna of the mobile station to the ANT IN port on the front panel of the Test Set this will cause the overpower protection circuitry to trip when the mobile station is transmitting Refer to ANT IN on page 572 for further information 123 iain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem Mobile Station Audio Out Impedance 124 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb in Menu If the mobile station s speaker is disconnected when using the manufacturer s special fixture the user must ensure that the proper load impedance is applied to the audio output of the mobile station The special fixtures supplied by the manufacturer of the mobile station may or may not terminate the audio output in its proper load impedance Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for information on the termination supplied by the special fixture If a load impedance must be supplied then it can be placed across the AUDIO IN connector Refer to AUDIO IN on page 573 and Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen for further information 600 Ohm Impedance Some industry standards require the audio out of the mobile station to be terminated in 600 ohms for testing purposes The AUDIO IN connector of the Test Set can be terminated in 600 ohms internally Refer to AUDIO IN on page 573 and Chapter 5 AF An
30. Measure Channel DSAT DSAT DST hex DSAT Displays 6 digit DSAT or DST data a RVC Data hex Data 000000000B8 ATH Decodes the full RVC data stream Message Parity or 86 bits 12 bits _ Lo Tone Hi Tone f DTMF Freq Freq On Time Off Time Displays DTMF Sym Hz Hz Dual Tone Multi 1 697 0 1209 0 50 0 50 0 FERR nmps de2 wmf tone information Figure 72 Decoding NAMPS NTACS Reverse Voice Channel RVC Data 283 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder Interpreting Decoded Data The following information refers to all Reverse Control Channel RECC measurements and the AMPS TACS Reverse Voice Channel RVC measurements See the next section for information about NAMPS NTACS RVC measurements After being armed the measurement begins when the last bit of Word Sync has been received AllRECC measurements and the AMPS TACS RVC measurement last for the period specified inthe Gate Time field The received bits are displayed as hexadecimal hex characters If the last bits received do not complete the last hex character the received bits are used as the most significant bits in the character and the remaining bit positions are filled with zeros For example if the last bits received are O1 two zeros are added to the right to produce the binary number 0100 The hexadecimal equivalent 4 is displayed The first two hex characters of the RECC data displayed contain t
31. Program Command Syntax The following list describes the NMT command syntax and parameters Commands can be entered directly into the decoder s NMT Test Entry field or used in test programs saved on mass storage All commands can be preceded by an integer as a label for branching purposes These labels can range from 0 to 255 BEGIN Begin description of NMT test This must always be the first command entered to describe a new NMT test program It will initialize all internal memory associated with the NMT test and prepare the Test Set to accept the rest of the test program It has no parameters END End of the NMT test This must always be the last command entered to describe an NMT test It causes the program to be checked for valid label references and terminates the test entry process EXIT n Stop the test and report exit status n Valid entries for the parameter n are integers from 0 to 10 and the following words these may be in upper or lower case PASSED FAILED ACCEPTED REJECTED INCOMPLETE All NMT test programs must contain an EXIT n EXITX n or GOTO statement immediately before the END statement EXITX n Stop the test and report exit status n Exchange the settings in the main and alternate traffic channel number fields and the power field Valid entries for the parameter n are integers from 0 to 10 and the following words these may be in upper or lower case PASSED FAILED ACCEPTED REJECTED INCOMPLETE
32. RANOSSOS Figure 52 RAND SSD3 Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel RSVD1 Reserved for future use RANDSSD3 The least significant 8 bits of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order RSVD2 Reserved for future use Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 230 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions BSChalCon Message Fields Set Messase BSChalCon Base Station Challenge Order Confirmation Word Figure 53 BSChalCon Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel RSVD1 Reserved for future use AUTHBS Output response of the authentication algorithm initiated by the Base Station Challenge order RSVD2 Reserved for future use Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 231 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions UnigChOrd Message Fields Set Messase UniaChOrd Uniaue Challense Order Word 010100110111010111011111
33. Signaling Decoder Screen Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder Lo Tone Off Time On Time Single Cont 298 This measurement field lists the frequency or frequency error for the low frequency tone in each tone pair The measurement type is selected by selecting the Freq field to display a list of measurement choices Operating Considerations Frequency error is calculated by comparing the DTMF Encoder s frequency settings for each tone pair with the decoded frequencies See Also Using the DTMF Decoder on page 300 This measurement column lists the length of time each tone pair was off prior to the next tone being received This measurement column lists the length of time each tone pair was on This field specifies how you want the analyzer to be armed e Single is used to analyze and display the decoded information once each time Arm Meas is selected e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder Stop Meas Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements Sym The symbol column corresponds to the DTMF Encoder s symbols assigned for each tone pair As each tone pair is analyzed the corresponding symbol is listed in this column Operati
34. Symbol Frequencies Hz 387 Twist 388 view of 385 dual tone frequency pair 285 296 298 dual tone multi frequency decoder 295 encoder 385 dual tone multi frequency tone pair 285 dump graphics 69 592 DUPLEX key 592 Duplex Out Configure screen 265 DUPLEX OUT connector avoiding damage 356 499 509 520 description 577 gain at 265 loss at 265 Duplex Test screen AC Level 347 AF Anl In 348 AF Freq 349 AFGen1 Freq 350 AFGen1 To 350 Amplitude 351 Atten Hold 351 Audio Out 352 Current 349 DC Level 349 De emphasis 352 Detector 353 Distn 349 Ext TX key 354 FM Coupling 354 FM Deviation 354 ain wenu 635 functional block diagram 347 IF Filter 355 Input Port 355 Output Port 356 RF Gen Freq 356 SINAD 349 SNR 349 Tune Freq 357 Tune Mode 357 TX Freq Error 358 TX Frequency 358 TX Power 358 view of 347 DUT connecting 40 definition for NMT 322 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 433 636 E EDACS decoder mode AF Anl In 301 Arm Meas 302 Data 302 Input Level 302 Polarity 302 Radio Repeater 303 RX Test 303 Single Cont 303 Standard 303 Stop Meas 303 view of 301 EDACS encoder mode AFGen2 To 390 Audio Out 390 Control Channel Number 390 Control Channel RX Frequency 390 Control Channel TX frequency 390 Data Rate 391 FM Coupling 391 Group ID 391 Handshake 391 Logical ID 392 Polarity 392 RX Test 392 Signaling D
35. This field is labeled RECC Data hex for the NAMPS NTACS mode but performs the identical function This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been triggered The longer the gate time the greater the number of bits analyzed Operating Considerations If the gate time is too long the decoder s data buffer becomes full A message is displayed instructing you to decrease the gate time This function is not used with the NAMPS NTACS RVC decoder See Also Arm Meas on page 278 Num of Bits on page 280 This field specifies the expected data signal level after de emphasis if used The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for valid signals This you to set the input level well below the expected level Also when using de emphasis the Input Level setting may need to be reduced significantly to properly decode the incoming signal De Emphasis is enabled disabled using the De Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen See Also Trig Level on page 281 279 ain Mon Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder Measure NAMPS NTACS RVC Num of Bits Polarity This field selects the type of decoded data to
36. and signal loss gain compensation 261 ain wenu Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions CONFIGURE RAT Crit Intensity RF Display RF Level Firmware Au ual Frea Chan Offset B 06 00 Carri 0n f Beeper RF Chan Std Total RAH RF Offset MS AMPS RF Ine dut 928 kB On O Gen IAnli Low Bottery User Def dB Serial Ho Base Frea Duplex Qut US38384464 MHz OO 000000 Date MHz dB Chan Space Antenna In RFGen Wolts a0 oha ent MMDDYY kHz dB Range Hold Time TH RK Offset Auto All 15 40 Hold All HH HH Stote Mixed Hotch Courl LAST CALIB DIE 0000000000 cnfg new wmf Figure 67 The Configure Screen Antenna In 262 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS confscr This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the ANT IN port and the device under test Enter a positive value to indicate a gain such as an amplifier The Spectrum Analyzer s marker level Lv1 measurement is automatically reduced by that amount The Spectrum Analyzer s Ref Level is automatically decreased by the same amount so the trace position does not appear to change Enter a negative value to indicate a loss such as cable loss The Spectrum Analyzer Marker s Level Lv1 measurement is automatically increased by that amount The Spectrum Analyzer s Ref Level is automatically increased by the same amount so the trace position does not appear
37. cessing functions can be tested with or without authentication active NOTE Call Processing functions with Authentication are only supported for AMPS system types IS 54 121 iain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem In order to use the Call Processing Subsystem a mobile station must be powered on and connected to the Test Set Connecting A Mobile Station Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 shows a typical example of how to connect a mobile station to the Test Set You may need a special fixture to access the mobile station s antenna audio in and audio out signals These fixtures are available from the mobile station s manufacturer If any audio testing is to be done on the mobile station the audio input microphone input to the mobile station and the audio output speaker output from the mobile station must be connected to the Test Set If no audio testing is to be done only the antenna needs to be connected to the Test Set 122 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS caliscrn fi Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem RF IN OUT ANT IN AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN HI um LO Speaker Out Mi hi I icrophone In Mobile Station Manufacturer s Special Fixture Antenna
38. default settings base 82 changing 81 82 power on 81 delay busy idle 364 first bit 364 word sync 364 Delet Ins Tests External Devices screen 549 Delet Stp Tests Order of Tests screen 539 delete global user key assignment 86 local user key assignment 85 RAM contents 557 register contents 80 557 Delete Ch Tests Channel Information screen 536 depth AM 62 Description Tests Main Menu screen 532 DET OUT connector description 576 Detector AF Analyzer screen 109 Analog Meas screen 255 Call Configuration screen 260 Duplex Test screen 353 TX Test screen 565 detector peak 109 112 353 565 rms 109 353 565 selecting 109 353 565 deviation FM 62 110 354 484 566 device under test connecting 40 for NMT encoder 433 diagram AF Analyzer functional block 105 Duplex Test functional block 347 RF Analyzer functional block 483 RF Generator functional block 495 RX Test functional block 505 TX Test functional block 561 Digital Paging decoder mode AF Anl In 291 Arm Meas 291 Data Display 292 Data Rate 292 Display Page 292 Gate Time 293 Input Level 293 Number of Pages 293 Polarity 294 Single Cont 294 Stop Meas 294 Trig Level 294 view of 291 Digital Paging encoder mode AFGen2 To 381 Audio Out 381 Bursts 381 Data Rate 381 Error Bit 381 FM Coupling 382 Function 382 Mssg Length 382 Pager Alpha Numeric Message 383 Pager Code 383 Pager Numeric Message 383 Page
39. frequency is 250 MHz and you want to change it to 225 MHz you would enter this sequence 2 2 5 ENTER When the unit is specified the units change to whatever you specify For example if the present RF Gen Freq setting is 250 MHz and you want to change it to 455 kHz you would enter this sequence 4 5 5 kHz Changing the Unit of Measure for Settings To change the present unit of measure position the cursor in front of the field and press the key labeled with the desired unit For example position the cursor in front of the RF Gen Freq field and push GHz or kHz to display the setting in either of these units 67 ain Men Chapter 3 Operating Overview Entering and Changing Numbers To Change the Increment or Decrement Setting Using the Pre Defined Increment Decrement Keys The INCR x10 and INCR 10 keys change the increment decrement value by a factor of 10 For example if the Tune Freq presently changes by 10 MHz for every click of the knob or push of the down arrow or up arrow keys pushing INCR x10 once changes the increment value to 100 MHz Specifying An Increment Value The INCR SET key is used to assign a specific increment value The increment value may use different units than the field you are incrementing decrementing For instance if the RF Generator Amplitude setting is displayed in dBuV you could increment in units of dB or mV To change the increment value 1 Move the cursor to the numeric entry
40. indicate no catrier is present to measure A numeric value would only be displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state The FM Deviation field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Meas NOTE Handoff Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed the Test Set s instrumentation is configured for optimal performance of the signaling decoder It is recommended that FM deviation measurements be made using either the ANALOG MEAS screen Using the CALL CONTROL screen to make FM deviation measurements may result in slightly degraded results This field is used to initiate a handoff from the current voice channel assignments to a new set of voice channel assignments The voice channel number to hand the mobile station off to the channel location NAMPS system type only the initial power level to use on the new voice channel the DSAT sequence NAMPS system type only to transpond on the mobile station and the SAT tone frequency to transpond on the new voice channel are specified using the Chan Ch Loc Pwr Lvl DSAT and SAT fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen 135 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen MS Id NOTE 136 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh This field is used to enter the identification number of the mobile s
41. or negative going Neg See Cont Single on page 459 459 iain Mo Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions Trig Delay The trigger delay is used to specify the time relationship between the trigger and displayed signal e Positive values delay the measurement trigger by a specific period The delayed trigger point is the left edge of the screen e Negative values perform a pre trigger function displaying a section of the waveform before the trigger point The trigger point is indicated by small pointers that appear at the top and bottom of the screen Operating Considerations Negative Values The maximum negative delay cannot exceed ten divisions of the current Time Div setting For example if the Time Div field is set to 1 ms the maximum allowed negative delay is 10 ms Larger negative numbers cause an Excessive negative Trig Delay will be truncated message Positive Values For Time Div settings of 50 ms Div and smaller the maximum delay is 400 ms For Time Div settings of 100 ms Div and larger the maximum delay is 3200 ms Resolution For delays of 400 ms and less the resolution is 6 4 ms For delays greater than 400 ms the resolution is 51 2 ms All entries are rounded to the nearest multiple of 6 4 ms or 51 2 ms depending on the delay value 460 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS oscscern fh Main Menu Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Using the Oscilloscope Using th
42. s speaker output must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO IN connector and the mobile station s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO OUT connector in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen Refer to Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 for connection information If the mobile station does not have audio connections the ANALOG MEAS screen cannot be used There are a wide variety of audio measurements which can be made from the ANALOG MEAS screen The following examples illustrate how to make a typical mobile station receiver measurement RF Sensitivity and a typical mobile station transmitter measurement FM Hum and Noise Refer to the Agilent 8920A RF Communications Test Set Applications Handbook section Testing FM Radios for further information on using the Test Set s Audio Analyzer to make audio measurements Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen To Make an RF Sensitivity Measurement 1 2 3 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 NOTE The mobile station s speaker output must be connec
43. tone sequence 341 343 display 459 encoder oscilloscope 458 external oscilloscope 458 gate time 279 293 296 308 312 342 input level 279 288 293 297 302 308 312 325 342 internal 459 internal oscilloscope 458 level 281 289 294 309 314 326 343 458 negative edge 459 NMT alarm 430 positive edge 459 radio interface 470 signal 458 source oscilloscope 458 time 457 troubleshooting 512 trunked receiver channel home channel 408 trunked transmit channel home channel 409 trunking data 403 trunking message 403 Tune Freq Adjacent Channel Power screen 100 Duplex Test screen 357 RF Analyzer screen 489 TX Test screen 568 Tune Mode Adjacent Channel Power screen 100 Duplex Test screen 357 RF Analyzer screen 489 TX Test screen 568 tuning Index automatic 100 357 489 568 channel automatic 270 manual 100 357 489 568 turn off code CDCSS encoder 379 frequency 376 output time 378 turning off squelch 487 Twist Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 388 twist recommended settings 388 twist and pre emphasis interactions 388 TX Freq Error Adjacent Channel Power screen 101 AF Analyzer screen 115 Analog Meas screen 255 Call Control screen 140 Duplex Test screen 358 RF Analyzer screen 489 RF Generator screen 501 TX Test screen 569 TX Frequency Adjacent Channel Power screen 101 AF Analyzer screen 115 Duplex Test screen 358 RF Analyzer screen 489 RF Generat
44. 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the message type received from the mobile station e Set to 1 to identify the message as an origination or an order e Set to 0 to identify the message as an order response or page response This field displays the local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test Set 183 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions ORDQ This field displays the received order qualifier The field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action Order This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the Test Set RSVD Reserved for future use Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 184 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RVCBSChal Message Fields Figure 34 F NAWC RANDBS Parity Display Word RYCBSChal Base Station Challenge Order Word RANDBS 00000111110100001111001001001111 RVCBSChal Message Fields This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indic
45. 103 Traffic Channel Message Generation Control and Traffic Channel Message Structures This control is only available using IBASIC commands it is not displayed on the MPT 1327 Encoder screen In both control and traffic mode the signaling transmissions commence with the standard link establishment time LET preamble and SYNC or SYNT pattern and the transmissions are terminated with a hang over bit as shown in Figure 104 and Figure 105 on page 422 421 ain Mon Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder PREAMBLE 6 16 16 TIMESLOT 128 BITS 1200bps 106 8ms I 16 64 64 C4D7 s ergs GA AAAA tg CAD Figure 104 Forward Control Channel Message Structure LET PREAMBLE gt 6 16 AAAA 46 TIMESLOT 128 BITS 1200bps 106 8ms fa N w aO e S e 16 64 X v OPTIOAL DATA CODEWORDS Figure 105 Traffic Channel Message Structure 422 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder Table 12 describes the signaling encoder as it is changed between the various test modes Particular reference is made to how the control and traffic channel message structures are started and stopped Table 12 Signaling Mode Transitions Table To From Off Control Traffic 1200Hz 1800Hz Dotting Off A B C D E Control F H then B F then C
46. 145 for information on how to register the mobile station Select the Page field The Page annunciator will light while the Test Set pages the mobile on the forward control channel If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set sends the mobile station an alert order on the assigned voice channel The mobile station should ring Press the SEND key on the mobile station The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set when the SEND key is pressed The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel Select the Display Word field A list of reverse channel words appears in a Choices menu Select the desired word from the list of choices The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display 189 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen NOTE If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel s message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 for a description of each of the available reverse channel words Step 8 and Step 10 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desir
47. 167 messages 176 RECCW E CALLP 167 messages 177 receive pace 448 Ref indicator 73 Ref Level Spectrum Analyzer screen 517 REF SET 73 REF SET key 591 reference carrier ACP 96 external input 589 external output 589 frequency ACP measurement 96 level spectrum analyzer 517 setting 73 457 transmitter power zero 102 491 570 Register Call Control screen 138 Call Data screen 170 202 Register annunciator Call Control screen 138 Call Data screen 170 202 registers clearing 80 naming 81 registration of mobile station 145 registration identification message 212 registration increment global action mes sage 210 RELEASE 85 86 Release Call Control screen 138 Call Data screen 170 203 release global user key assignment 86 local user key assignment 85 mobile station 148 remote control 88 remote operation 88 mode 448 squelch effects 487 remove register contents 80 remove high low limits 71 remove pass fail limits 71 repeater decoding LTR data 316 LTR system 313 simulating EDACS 389 Index Res BW Adjacent Channel Power screen 100 resolution bandwidth ACP measurement 100 bandwidth spectrum analyzer 528 oscilloscope 113 response timing MPT 1327 decoder 321 reverse control channel 374 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 282 data 131 decoding AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 278 measurements AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 284 message viewing 168 reverse RF power 356 499 509 520 r
48. 311 Data 311 Data Rate 312 Gate Time 312 Input Level 312 Polarity 313 Single Cont 314 Stop Meas 314 Trig Level 314 Signaling Decoder screen MPT 1327 mode Data Rate 320 Timing 320 Signaling Decoder NTAC mode Polarity 280 Signaling Decoder screen NTACS mode AF Anl In 278 Arm Meas 278 screen NAMP NAMPS Channel 278 Input Level 279 Measure 280 Num of Bits 280 RECC Data 280 Single Cont 281 Stop Meas 281 Trig Level 281 Trigger Pattern bin 281 Signaling Decoder screen NTACS Seq mode Gate Time 279 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode AF Anl In 323 D direction 324 Exit Status 323 First Frame 322 Frame Digits 324 Input Level 325 Load Test 325 Num 324 Run Test 326 Single Cont 326 Standard 326 Stop Test 326 Time 324 Trig Level 326 Type 324 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode AF Anl In 341 Arm Meas 341 Freq 342 Freq Error 342 Gate Time 342 Input Level 342 Off Time 343 On Time 343 Single Cont 343 Stop Meas 343 Sym 343 Trig Level 343 Signaling Dev Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 393 signaling encoder selecting 360 Signaling Encoder screen NAMPS Index Mode AMPS TACS 361 Mode CDCSS 375 Mode Digi Page 380 Mode DTMF 385 Mode EDACS 389 Mode Func Gen 400 Mode LTR 403 Mode MPT 1327 411 Mode NAMPS NTACS 361 Mode NMT 427 Mode Tone Seq 439 Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode AFGen2 To 363 366 Audio Out 36
49. 373 387 406 440 stopping 373 378 384 387 406 440 symbol frequency 342 symbol frequency error 342 using frequencies 441 using hexadecimal numbers 441 using relative amplitude 441 Tone Sequence decoder mode AF Anl In 341 Arm Meas 341 Freq 342 Freq Error 342 Gate Time 342 Input Level 342 Off Time 343 On Time 343 Single Cont 343 Stop Meas 343 Sym 343 Trig Level 343 view of 341 Tone Sequence encoder mode AFGen2 To 439 Audio Out 439 Bursts 440 FM Coupling 440 Pre Emp 440 Send 440 Send Mode 440 Standard 440 Stop 440 ain wenu Index Symbol Definition 441 Symbol Sequence 441 view of 439 tone only operation digital paging 382 total access communication system for Japan decoder 277 encoder 361 total access communications systems decoder 277 encoder 361 Total RAM Configure screen 274 trace comparison spectrum analyzer 526 spectrum analyzer 526 tracking generator amplitude 521 frequency 517 frequency offset 522 offset 521 output 522 output port 522 sweep 522 use with spectrum analyzer 521 Traffic Area Alt Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 436 Traffic Area Main Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 437 Traffic Channel Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 414 traffic channel channel number NMT 432 Traffic Channel Alt Number Signaling Encoder screen NMTmode 437 Traffic Channel Alt Power Signaling Encoder screen NMTmode 437 Traffic Chan
50. 386 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 390 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode 401 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 363 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 431 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 439 AUDIO OUT connector coupling 352 363 376 381 386 390 401 404 431 439 498 description 574 audio power measurement 105 495 506 audio source 278 286 291 295 301 307 311 323 341 Authent AUTHENTICATION screen 164 AUTHENTICATION screen Authent 164 Authentication screen view of 163 AuthWORD CALLP 167 Auto All Range Hold 268 Auto Norm Oscilloscope screen 458 automatic level control 115 autoranging AF RF measurements 268 gain setting 111 input attenuator 111 485 Autostart Test Procedure on Power Up Tests ExecutionConditions screen 546 auto tuning AF RF measurements 268 Index RF 100 357 489 568 averaging example 72 measurement results 72 restart averaging 72 AVG 72 591 Avg 1 100 Spectrum Analyzer screen 527 ain wenu 629 B B I Delay FOCC Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 364 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 364 backspace key 593 bandwidth adjacent channel power 96 IF filter 355 485 566 resolution ACP measurement 100 Base Freq Configure screen 263 base settings changing 82 default 82 base station receiver simulating AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 277 basic o
51. 527 sensitivity adverse effects on measurements 487 527 ANT IN 487 527 modulation input 499 RF measuring 257 Seq Num tone sequence 441 Seqn Order Of Tests Tests Main Menu screen 534 sequence CDCSS 375 DTMF 385 tone 439 Serial Baud T O Configure screen 449 serial data word bits 447 Serial In T O Configure screen 450 Serial No Configure screen 274 serial number electronic decimal 134 electronic hexadecimal 134 serial number word 175 serial port configuring 89 SERIAL PORT connector description 587 Service screen Counter Connection 512 Frequency 512 Gate Time 512 Latch 512 RAM Initialize 512 Value 512 view of 512 Voltage 513 Voltmeter Connection 513 Set Message 654 Call Bit screen 203 settings base 82 beeper volume 53 changing field 43 date 52 default 81 82 meter 65 power on 81 recalling 79 RF voltage 52 saving 79 time 52 Settling AF Analyzer screen 113 settling time AF measurements 113 setups recalling 79 saving 79 SHIFT key 593 shock hazard avoiding 575 SID Call Control screen 139 signal level data 364 signal strength Phi signal 434 signal strength meter 556 signal type pager 292 signal noise ratio measurement 63 operation 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 signaling decoder selecting 276 Signaling Decoder screen Mode AMPS TACS 277 Mode CDCSS 286 Mode Digi Page 291 Mode DTMF 295 Mode EDACS 301 Mode Func Gen 307 Mo
52. 539 an wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Pass Fail Limits TESTS Pass Fail Limits TESTS Poss Foil Limits Spec Description Lower Limit Upper Limit Units Check eFrint All Moin Menu To Screen RF GEN SPEC ANL ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT tstpassf wmf Figure 136 The TESTS Pass Fail Limits Screen Pass Fail limits are the radio manufacturer s upper and lower limits used by the Tests Subsystem For a radio to pass a test the measured value must fall within the test s limits Tests results can be compared to only the lower limit only the upper limit both the upper and lower limits or no limits None Pass Fail limits are sometimes referred to as specifications NOTE The tests you select determine the specifications that are required The Agilent 11807 documentation provides details if you are using Agilent 11807 software 540 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS testsern fh Main Menu Check Lower Limit Main Menu Print All Spec Units Upper Limit Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Pass Fail Limits This field is used to select whether the test will verify only upper only lower both or none of the specified limits Operating Considerations Selecting both upper and lower limits increases test time but may be required for some tests This field is used to set the lower limit to be compared with the measured results If the measured result is be
53. AMPS mode 288 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 293 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 297 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 302 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 308 Signaling Decoder screen LTR Seq mode 312 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 279 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 323 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 342 Input Port Adjacent Channel Power screen 99 Duplex Test screen 355 RF Analyzer screen 486 TX Test screen 567 Insert Ch Tests Channel Information screen 536 Insrt Stp Tests External Devices screen 549 Tests Order of Tests screen 539 Inst Echo VO Configure screen 447 Inst Tests External Devices screen 550 INSTRUMENT STATE Keys 592 Intensity Configure screen 52 266 intensity setting 52 Index interactions between fields 56 between screens 56 encoder decoder AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 282 374 endcoder and decoder radio standards 342 high power low power measurements 102 570 Range Hold and other fields 268 RF generator analyzer RF offset 272 RX TX screen automatic changes 273 spectrum analyzer with RF generator 519 spectrum analyzer with tracking gener ator 521 twist and pre emphasis 388 interference co channel 430 Internal Oscilloscope screen 458 internal clock date 265 Interrupt 1 Radio Interface screen 471 inverted data 280 288 294 313 371 377 383 392 405 IQ RF IN connector descri
54. Abort Print field on the PRINT CONFIGURE screen 69 iain Mo Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Measurement Limit Indicators Using Measurement Limit Indicators The LO LIMIT and HI LIMIT functions are used to define a measurement window to alert you to measurements that are outside these limits When limits are assigned Lo and or Hi appear by the measurement A measurement that goes above or below the defined limits causes three things to happen 1 A message appears at the top of the screen indicating a limit was exceeded 2 The Lo or Hi indicator by the measurement flashes 3 The Beeper beeps if it is has been enabled in the CONFIGURE screen Limits are helpful when you can t watch the Test Set s display while you are making an adjustment on the equipment you are testing or repairing They are also a convenient way of alerting you to long term measurement drift without having to observe the screen To Set A HI and or LO LIMIT 1 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the measurement that you are set ting limits for 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the down arrow key to access the LO LIMIT function and enter the measurement s low limit value and its unit of measure 3 Press and release the SHIFT key then the up arrow key to access the HI LIMIT func tion and enter the measurement s high limit value and its unit of measure 1 The fundamental unit for the LIMITs does
55. All NMT program commands must be entered into the decoder s RAM before they can be executed This can be done directly by entering commands one at a time into the NMT Test Entry field or by loading a test program that has been created and saved on mass storage NMT Format When storing NMT tests you have created you must save them as ASCH files using the BASIC command SAVE and use the GET command to retrieve them Non ASCII files cannot be retrieved using the NMT Decoder screen s Load Test field and therefore cannot be run S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests Creating NMT Tests Tests can be created and saved using any of these methods e Writing programs on a connected external controller downloading them into the Test Set s IBASIC RAM and then storing them on mass storage e Using the TESTS screen s IBASIC Controller and the cursor control knob to enter pro grams line by line into IBASIC RAM and then saving them on mass storage e Using the TESTS screen s IBASIC Controller and a connected terminal to enter pro grams line by line into RAM and then saving them on mass storage e Using an IBASIC program that creates a file to output program commands Entering Tests Into The Decoder s RAM NMT commands are entered into the decoder s RAM using any of these methods e Using the Load Test field to load an existing test from ma
56. Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Configure the Test Set 1 Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed 2 Verify that the Test Set configuration information is appropriate for the mobile station to be tested Check the following fields a System Type Select the type of cellular system to be simulated AMPS NAMPS TACS JTACS DAMPS DCCH NOTE If the System Type field was modified in step2 b the control channel will become active since modifying this field automatically activates the control channel Refer to System Type on page 140 b Cntl Channel Set the control channel number to be used by the Test Set NOTE Ifthe Cnt1 Channel field was modified in step 2 b the control channel will become active since modifying this field automatically activates the control channel Refer to Cntl Channel on page 130 c d e Amplitude Set the output power of the Test Set s transmitter that is the output power of the Test Set s RF Generator SID Enter the system identification number of the Test Set as a decimal number Chan right hand field Enter the voice channel number which will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial voice channel assignment or as a handoff voice channel assignment Ch Loc right hand field NAMPS system type only Select the narrow ana
57. Encoder Digital Paging Encoder The Digital Paging Encoder outputs signals to test pagers using a variety of digital access formats and frequencies The signal can be used to modulate the RF Generator or it can be output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector FM is typically selected by using the RX TEST screen to set up the RF Generator to generate the encoded carrier SIGNALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 Dota Rate Status Ao 200 0 Send Mode Idle bps Function Bursts Mode EQDiai Pose Faser Tyre m onard E Tone Only Faser Code AFGend To 100000 FH Audio Out AC OC FM Coupling Error Bit Polarity Hors Invert digi en1 wmf Figure 93 The Digital Paging Encoder Mode Screen 380 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscre_fh Main Menu AFGen2 To Audio Out Bursts Data Rate Error Bit Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Digital Paging Encoder This field audio frequency generator 2 to contains two fields e The upper field determines whether the Digital Paging Encoder s signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out Operating Considerations This field should be set to Dc for best results when using
58. GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 616 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmmsg fm ain wenu Chapter Text Only Error Messages Text only error messages are generally associated with manual operation of the Test Set This manual contains information on text only error messages Text only error messages can also be displayed while running the Test Set s built in diag nostic or calibration utility programs Refer to the Assembly Level Repair manual for information on text only error messages displayed while running the Test Set s built in diagnostic or calibration utility programs Text only error messages take the form This is an error message For example e Input value out of range 617 ar wenu Chapter NOTE 618 The Message Display During instrument operation various messages may appear on the Test Set s display Prompt type messages generally appear on the first line of the Test Set s display General operating and error messages usually appear on the second line of the display Some mes sages are persistent they remain displayed until the error condition no longer exists or until another persistent message with greater priority occurs Other messages are only dis played when the error first occurs they are removed when a key is pressed or the knob is turned or when an GP
59. Gain Cntl AF Analyzer screen 111 Gate Time Service screen 512 Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS mode 279 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 293 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 296 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 308 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 312 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 279 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 342 gate time 106 decoder 279 293 296 308 312 342 RF counter 486 Gaussian noise function generator 402 generator CDCSS 375 DTMF 385 tone sequence 439 generator AF amplitude 96 350 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 496 497 507 frequency 96 350 401 496 506 564 level 564 generator RF amplitude 351 508 Index frequency 356 509 output port 356 509 520 522 reference frequency 263 generator tracking amplitude 521 frequency 517 frequency offset 522 output port 522 RF offset 521 sweep 522 sweep frequency range 518 use with spectrum analyzer 521 Golay sequential code 384 Goto 1 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 Goto 2 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 grounded input at AUDIO IN LO 107 grounding 575 group call 301 Group ID Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 391 GSC data rates 381 radio standard 384 ain wenu 639 H squelch effects 487 Handoff hum and noise Call Control screen 135 169 201 measuring 258 handoff mobile station to new voice channel 148 Handsh
60. Get Started Instrument Functional Diagram AUDIO MONITOR OUT x Filters 1 amp 2 i DC CURRENT MEASURMENT RF OUT AM p FM Synthesized lt IQ RF IN CW RF g a oute S Mg eee a RF Tracking Generator F intr bd2 wmf Rear Panel Connection No Simultaneous AM amp FM Cc gt Measurements Only on HP 8920A s with Option 050 Figure 5 Instrument Functional Diagram 2 of 2 49 Main Menu Chapter 1 Get Started Instrument Functional Diagram 50 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIgetstart fb Main Menu Configuring Your Test Set The CONFIGURE and I O CONFIGURE screens contain a number of settings used to alter instrument operation and hardware communication settings The GPIB address screen intensity serial communication parameters and several other settings are changed in these screens Most CONFIGURE and I O CONFIGURE screen entries are saved when the instrument is turned off 51 ain wenu Chapter 2 Configuring Your Test Set General Operating Information General Operating Information The following configuration information discusses general operating information for some of the fields in these screens To Set Screen Intensity 1 Access the CONFIGURE screen 2 Selectthe Intensity field 3 Rotate the knob to change the setting 1 dim 8 bright To Set RF Voltage Interpretation 50 0 emf 1
61. I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly 46 Instrument Functional Diagram 48 ain wenu 13 Contents 2 Configuring Your Test Set General Operating Information 52 14 iain wenu Contents 3 Operating Overview Interaction Between Screens 56 Displaying Measurements 60 Entering and Changing Numbers 66 Printing A Screen 69 Using Measurement Limit Indicators 70 Averaging Measurements 72 Setting A Measurement Reference 73 Using Memory Cards 74 Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups 79 Using USER Keys 83 Setting an RF Generator Analyzer Offset 87 Using Remote Control 88 15 iain wenu Contents 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power ACP 94 Field Descriptions 95 16 iain wenu Contents 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram 104 ain wenu 17 Contents 18 6 Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem 118 Using the Call Processing Subsystem 122 The CALL CONTROL Screen 126 Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions 142 Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication 152 AUTHENTICATION Screen 163 CALL DATA Screen 166 CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions 171 Using the CALL DATA Screen 188 CALLBIT Screen 197 CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions 204 Using the CALL BIT Screen 248 ANALOG MEAS Screen 253 Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen 256
62. Input Level to about kHz Select the Arm Meas field to prepare the decoder The Status field should indicate Armed Select the Send field under RX Test This outputs the control channel information specified in the EDACS Encoder The mobile should indicate that it is receiving the control channel data 305 ain wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the EDACS Decoder Make Basic Transmitter Measurements 1 Key the mobile s transmitter and verify that its transmit indicator is on The call type Group ID and Logical ID information transmitted by your mobile is displayed under the Data field With the transmitter still keyed press the DUPLEX key to access the DUPLEX TEST screen TX Frequency and TX Power are displayed Making Other Transmitter Measurements By connecting Audio Frequency Generator 1 AFGen 1 to your transmitter s microphone input you can make calibrated modulation measurements such as microphone sensitivity modulation limiting and transmitter frequency response 1 306 Connect the AUDIO OUT port of the Test Set to your mobile s microphone input 2 Access the DUPLEX TEST screen 3 4 Set the upper part of the AFGen1 To field to Audio Out Use the lower part of the AFGen1 To field to adjust the output level into the micro phone line Use the AFGen1 Freq field to adjust the audio generator s frequency S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th
63. Mode field is used to select how the encoder is used for tests Selection off Control Traffic 1200Hz 1800Hz Dotting Description In this mode the signaling hardware is disabled and does not transmit data In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and is retransmitting a basic control channel structure as defined by the content of the filler buffer Refer to Forward Control Channel Message and Filler Buffers on page 415 for an explanation of the filler buffer One or more timeslots in the filler pattern can be overlaid by messages from the control message buffer under control of the Send field In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled The filler pattern is not transmitted Single or multi timeslot messages can be transmitted from the traffic message buffer under the control of the Send field In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and transmits a contin uous 1200 Hz tone equivalent to an FFSK transmission of continu ous ones In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and transmits a contin uous 1800 Hz tone equivalent to an FFSK transmission of continu ous zeros In this mode the signaling hardware is enabled and transmits alternat ing 1200 Hz and 1800 Hz tones equivalent to an FFSK transmission of alternating ones and zeros 413 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder Traffic Channel The Traffic Channel field allows you to ente
64. Power is only measured and displayed here when the Input Port is set to RF In Refer to item 2 in Figure 8 on page 60 If Ant antenna is selected the measurement is replaced by four dashes You can measure low power levels on the ANT IN port using the Spectrum Analyzer Refer to TX Power on page 569 and TX Pwr Zero on page 570 for more information on measuring transmitter power Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN antenna port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered remove the signal from the ANT IN port and turn the Test Set off and on to reset it 1 Optional on some Test Set models 61 ain Mon Chapter 3 Operating Overview Displaying Measurements Displaying AF Measurements FM Deviation AM Depth AC Level The AF Anl In setting determines the AF Analyzer s input and the measurement displayed in the top right corner of the measurement area see Table 5 These measurements are available in the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST RF GENERATOR RF ANALYZER and AF ANALYZER screens Refer to item 3 in Figure 8 on page 60 Table 5 AF Measurements Selected by AF Analyzer Input Setting Measurement AF Anl In Setting FM Deviation FM Demod FM Mod AM Depth AM Demod AM Mod AM Depth SSB Demod Audioln Radio Int Ext Mod Mic Mod Audio Out a
65. Presets to Audio Freq changeable Using your Test Set duplicate the steps in Figure 7 to demonstrate how the Priority fields operate ain wenu 57 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Interaction Between Screens 1 Access the RX TEST screen and set the Amplitude to 50 dBm 2 Access the RFGENERATOR screen and change the Amplitude to 75 dBm 3 Return to the RX TEST screen Notice that the Amplitude changes back to 50 dBm 4 Return to the RFGENERATOR screen The Amplitude is no longer where you set it in step 2 75 dBm Since the RX TEST screen has priority control over this field the RFGENERATOR screen s Amplitude setting changed when RX TEST was accessed fig2 2 wmf Figure 7 Example of How Priority Fields Work 58 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Amplitude 50 Amplitude Amplitude 50 75 Amplitude 50 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Interaction Between Screens Priority CALL CONFIGURE Field The Input Att field located on the CALL CONFIGURE screen is another priority field Similar fields labeled Input Atten are located on the ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER screen RFANALYZER screen and the SPECTRUM ANALYZER screen Setting the Input Att field from the CALL CONFIGURE screen updates all Input Atten fields found
66. Processing Subsystem Using the CALL BIT Screen System Operation When Data Spec Field Set to Bits NOTE 250 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f When the Data Spec field is set to Bits the Test Set builds the signaling messages using only the bit patterns set on the CALL BIT screen whenever a call processing function is executed which uses any of the available messages The Test Set calculates the contents of the Parity field using the coding algorithms specified in the industry standard for the selected system that is the system specified in the System Type field on the CALL CONTROL screen By definition the Test Set must meet the timing requirements of the industry standard for the selected system Therefore depending upon the state of the Call Processing Subsystem i e Active Register Page Access or Connect and the frequency with which a particular call processing protocol uses a particular message it may not be possible to modify the contents of more than one field in a message before it is sent to the mobile station For example in the AMPS system the system parameter overhead message must be sent every 0 8 0 3 seconds on the forward control channel Given this timing requirement it is highly unlikely that while in the active state a user could modify more than one field before the message was sent to the mobile station There is no functionality in the Test Set to allow an entire message to
67. Qualifier Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 411 adjacent channel power measurement 95 Adjacent Channel Power screen ACP Meas 95 AFGen1 Freq 96 AFGen1 To 96 Carrier Ref 96 Ch Offset 98 Channel BW 96 Ext TX Key 98 Input Atten 98 Input Port 99 Res BW 100 Tune Freq 100 Tune Mode 100 TX Freq Error 101 TX Frequency 101 TX Power 101 TX Pwr Meas Agilent 8920B 101 TX Pwr Zero 102 ain Mon Index view of 95 ADRS key 592 advanced mobile phone service decoder 277 encoder 361 AF analyzer CDCSS decoder settings 290 input 105 278 286 291 295 301 307 311 323 341 348 562 level 279 288 293 297 302 308 312 325 342 signal types analyzed 105 348 562 AF Analyzer screen AC Level 105 AF Anl In 105 AF Cnt Gate 106 AF Freq 114 Audio In Lo 107 Current 107 114 DC current 107 DC Level 108 114 De Emp Gain 108 De emphasis 108 Detector 109 Distn 114 Ext Load R 110 Filter 1 and Filter 2 110 FM Deviation 110 functional block diagram 105 Gain Cntl 111 Input Gain 111 Notch Freq 112 Notch Gain 112 Pk Det To 112 Scope To 113 Settling 113 SINAD 114 SNR 114 Speaker ALC 115 Speaker Vol 115 TX Freq Error 115 TX Frequency 115 TX Power 116 view of 105 AF Anl In AF Analyzer screen 105 Analog Meas screen 254 Duplex Test screen 348 Signaling Decoder AMPS TACS mode 278 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS screen mode 286 Signaling Decoder s
68. RF ANALYZER or SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens CAUTION Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press MEAS RESET or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it Operating Considerations Input impedance 50Q TX Power cannot be measured using this port use the RF IN OUT port However low power levels can be measured using this port with the Spectrum Analyzer Additional sensitivity for this port is available using the Sensitivity field in the RF ANALYZER and SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens 572 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIconnkeys fh in Menu AUDIO IN CAUTION Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions Two connectors are used to input audio signals to the AF Analyzer e Hlisthe main audio signal input connection e LOis used for the audio signal reference Three choices are available using the AF AN ALYZER screen s Audio In Lo field e Gnd connects the center pin through approximately 100Q to chassis ground e Float is a floating input e 600 To Hi provides a 600Q internal load to match an audio source with an output impedance of 6002 The measured level is the potential between the HI and LO
69. STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU ASSISTANCE Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Manufacturer s Address 24001 E Mission Avenue Liberty Lake Washington 99019 9599 USA declares that the product Product Name RF Communications Test Set Cell Site Test Set Model Number AgilentTechnologies8920A 8920B and8921A Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product conforms to the following Product specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 A2 EN 61010 1 1993 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A EN50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 3V m IEC 801 4 1988 0 5 kV Sig Lines 1 kV Power Lines Supplementary Information This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carries the CD marking ac
70. Screen SIGNALING DECODER Status bits Idle Node To Screen FM Demod Input Level 14 kHz Tria Level 2 84 kHz 317 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen MPT 1327 Decoder Manually Decoding MPT 1327 Signals Decoder Triggering 318 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu To manually test MPT 1327 radios using this decoder you must first set up the MPT 1327 Encoder to provide the necessary protocol to get the radio up on the correct channel This requires a thorough knowledge of the MPT 1327 Encoder operation including using the undisplayed controls accessed using IBASIC commands For these reasons the following information generally assumes you are operating the decoder under IBASIC control For MPT 1327 signaling detection the decoder should be configured for repetitive retriggering using the GPIB command TRIGger MODE RETRigger REPetitive When the decoder is armed it is triggered whenever it receives the synchronization sequence appropriate to the test mode selected on the MPT 1327 Encoder screen Refer to Table 8 on page 8 319 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen MPT 1327 Decoder Table 8 Triggering the MPT 1327 Decoder Test Mode Decoder Synchronization Sequence Off Control SYNC Traffic SYNT 1200Hz 1111 1800Hz 0000 Dotting 1010 The SYNC and SYNT patterns are those defined for the MPT 1327 Encoder The defaul
71. Screen Message Field Descriptions LOCAL This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted ORDQ The order qualifier field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action ORDER This field identifies the order type Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 218 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MS IntVCh Message Fields Set Message MS Int Ch FCC Mobile Station Control Message Extended Address Word Figure 45 MS IntVCh Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code field MIN2 Second part of the mobile identification number field VMAC This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station s power level associated with the designated voice channel CHAN Channel number field Indicates the designated voice channel Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 219 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC O Mes Message Fields Figure 46 T1T2 SCC PSCC RSVD LOCAL 220
72. Set Initializing Call Processing with Authentication without registration with the Test Set Initialize Call Processing through Registration 1 2 p a 10 Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the Register field The Register annunciator will light while the registration is in process If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner ofthe CALL CONTROL screen and then the mobile station s phone number ESN and decoded SCM will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen The information in the MS Id field will be updated The Active annunciator will light when the registration has successfully completed Select AUTHEN on the To Screen field The AUTHENTICATION screen will be displayed Select the A_KEY field and enter a valid A_KEY in decimal format Position the cursor on the O f f On field and select On Select CALL CNTL fro
73. Specification tstextdv wmf Figure 139 The TESTS External Devices Screen The Tests Subsystem can only access external devices if they have been configured Most external devices use the GPIB port for control A serial printer can be connected to the serial port for printing test results NOTE GPIB Mode The Mode field on the I O CONFIGURE screen must be set to Control to access connected GPIB instruments 548 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS testscrn fh Main Menu Addr Calling Name Delet Ins Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS External Devices This field is used to enter the instrument s remote address For GPIB instruments enter the full 3 digit address such as 704 The Calling Name field is used to enter the instrument s function in upper case letters For example PRINTER POWER SUPPLY DATA COLLECTION disk drive and so forth This field allows you to delete an instrument from the list at the bottom of the screen Use the knob up arrow or down arrow key to select the step where you want to delete an instrument External Disk Specification Insrt Ins This field is used when storing and loading procedures on an external disk Operating Considerations The GPIB path entered in the External Disk Specification field is used by the Select Procedure Location field on the TESTS Main Menu screen when Disk is selected This field allows you to enter an instrument in the list a
74. TX Pwr Zero field before measuring power 1 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rfanscrn fh Main Menu TX Pwr Zero Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions The transmitter power zero function establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring RF power at the RF IN OUT port RF power must not be applied while zeroing Set the RF GENERATOR screen Ampli tude field to off to prevent internal cross coupling into the power detector while zeroing Operating Considerations When power is applied to the RF IN OUT connector the temperature of the internal circuitry increases This can cause changes in the TX Power measurement when low power levels are measured immediately following high power measurements When alternately making high and low power measurements always zero the power meter immediately before making the low power measurements to provide the best measurement accuracy 491 iain Mo Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions 492 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rfanscrn fh Main Menu 18 RF Generator Screen ain wenu 493 Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Block Diagram Block Diagram i Amplitud ae Scan Auto Hold On Off MHz dem MIC ACC Duplex Out Output Port Atten Hold RF Out Dupl Modulation wind Input Rear Panel Mod In To FM Vpk Off Y
75. Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the Call Processing Subsystem Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for information on manually zeroing the RF Power meter The field descriptions for each of the messages are given in the CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 204 Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Contents that can be Modified Using the CALL BIT screen The contents of twenty nine different messages can be modified from this screen The message to be modified is selected using the Set Message field The eleven messages whose contents can be modified are Forward Control Channel Messages for Paging Origination Order Confirmation and Orders SPC WORD1 System Parameter Overhead Message Word 1 SPC WORD2 System Parameter Overhead Message Word 2 ACCESS Access Type Parameters Global Action Message REG INC Registration Increment Global Action Message REG ID Registration ID Message C FILMESS Control Filler Message MS WORD1 FCC mobile station control message Word 1 Abbreviated Address Word MS IntVCh FCC mobile station control message Word 2 Extended Address Word Voice Channel Assignment MSMessOrd FCC mobile station control message Word 2 Extended Address Word Order FVC V Mes FVC Mobile Station Control Voice Channel
76. Test and Measurement Call Center P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 tel 1 800 452 4844 Regional Sales and Service Offices Canada Agilent Technologies Canada Inc 5150 Spectrum Way Mississauga Ontario LAW 5G1 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 3120 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Measurement Assistance Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 456 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin America Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 US A tel 805 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 tel 1 800 629 485 Australia fax 61 3 9272 0749 tel 0 800 738 378 New Zealand fax 64 4 802 6881 Asia Pacific Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 111 Kings Road Taikoo Shing Hong Kong tel 852 3197 7777 fax 852 2506 9233 610 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm ain Me Error Messages S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm iain wenu 611 Chapter General Information About Error Messages Information concerning error messages displayed by the Test Set
77. This area performs three display operations e Save B saves the currently displayed trace for the A B operation e A only provides a continuously updated display the normal mode of operation e A B displays the difference between the trace saved using Save B and the currently displayed trace The comparison can yield either losses or gains in amplitude Operating Considerations The A B function works correctly only if the center frequency and span settings are the same for both signals The reference level Ref Level can be changed to move the trace below the top line of the display ifthe A B function results in a gain The the HOLD key can be used to freeze the display at any time This allows you to view a trace before performing the Save B or A B functions 526 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS specscr No Pk Avg Sensitivity Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions This field performs two functions Pk Hold peak hold prevents the Spectrum Analyzer from erasing the previous trace each time it sweeps This causes the traces to build up on the screen until Off No Pk Avg or the MEAS RESET key is selected This allows the capture of transient signals that are not displayed long enough to view during normal operation Avg 1 through video averaging enables the Spectrum Analyzer to display a trace representing the average of several measurements The number of samples used for meas
78. This manual as sumes you understand the frame structure for the signals you need to create or analyze any frame information provided is for reference purposes MS Mobile Station The equipment used by a mobile subscriber BS Base Station The unit that provides the radio interface between one or more Mo bile Stations and the Mobile Telephone Exchange MTX Mobile Telephone Exchange The unit that provides the interface between one or more Base Stations and the telephone network Standard The set of frequency and data format standards used by different countries The NMT Decoder screen is used to load and run NMT test programs you create The programs are used to transmit NMT encoded signals to a device and to evaluate received NMT signals S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn fh Main Menu Figure 80 AF Anl In Exit Status SIGNALING DECODER MMT Test Entry Load Test ne ir Exit Status 1 z First Frame Num Frames 1 3 Hum Time OO Type Frome Digits The NMT Decoder Screen i Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Run Test Sinsle lont Stop Test AF Anl In Input Level 1 0 Tria Level 383 mW Til Status Idle Mode Standard SToao To Screen 5 ANL ENCODER nmt de1 wmf NMT Decoder Audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer When selected this field displays a list of choi
79. When using both ports at the same time you need to locate or fabricate an adapter to provide the necessary connections Test Set RJ 11 Terminal PC Terminal PC Serial Port 25 Pin RS 232 9 Pin RS 232 Pin 2 RX to pin2 TX or pin3 TX Pin 5 TX to pin3 RX or pin 2 RX Pin 4 GND to pin 7 GND or pin 5 GND Serial Port Connections TRANSMIT ADDRESS 10 Port B TRANSMIT ADDRESS 9 Port A GROUND 6c Shared 3a NO CONNECT 2 1 a RECEIVE ADDRESS 9 Port A RECEIVE ADDRESS 10 Port B rj11 wmf 588 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys th Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions 10 MHz REF INPUT This connection allows you to input an external reference Operating Considerations Input frequency 1 2 5 or 10 MHz Input level gt 0 15 V rms Input impedance approximately 500 When a valid signal is applied to the 10 MHz REF INPUT the Test Set automatically switches from internal to external reference This signal is used as a reference for and directly affects these functions RF Generator Frequency including the Tracking Generator RF Frequency Counter AF Frequency Counter RF Analyzer Tune Frequency Spectrum Analyzer Center Frequency AF Generators 1 and 2 and the decoder s frequency counter are not affected using an external reference they use their own reference NOTE The reference output f
80. all bits must be set as indicated VMAC This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station power level associated with the designated voice channel 222 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions CHAN Channel number field Indicates the designated voice channel Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 223 ar wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions RandChalA Message Fields Set Messase RandChalfA Random Challenge A Global Action Message 0011010010100010 Figure 48 RandChalA Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code for new channel ACT Global action field 224 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions RANDA The 16 most significant bits of the 32 bit RAND variable stored by a mobile for use in the authentication process END End indication field Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train set to 0 if not last word OHD Overhead message type field Set to 100 indicating the g
81. amount Selecting this field causes the LTR Encoder to start modulating the RF Generator 405 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 LTR Encoder Send Mode This field selects the output format used when Send is selected to output a sequence Cont is typically used for LIR radio testing Standard Single outputs Message 1 or Message 2 once Burst outputs the message the number of times specified in the Bursts field Cont causes the message to be repeated continuously until Stop is selected Step is not used with this encoder mode This field selects the trunked radio standard for your radio Stop Selecting this field stops the message being output when the Send Mode is set to Cont or Burst After this field is selected the current repetition of the message is finished 406 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the LTR Encoder Using the LTR Encoder en Data Direction ame Tan rm SYNC GO TO REPEATER HOME CHANNEL IDCODEOF FREE ERROR CHECK FOR CALLED RADIO OF CALLED RADIO CALLED RADIO REPEATER BITS Area 1 Goto 1 Home 1 ID 1 Free 1 Area 2 Goto 2 Home 2 ID 2 Free 2 Figure 98 How Message 1 and Message 2 Fields are Used to Create Trunking Data 407 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the LTR Encoder Radio Test Examples The following procedures establi
82. autoranging process Use the Auto setting to establish the initial gain settings while the encoded signal is first being decoded and then select Hold during the decoding process to retain the gain settings The decoder should capture all encoded information the next time you transmit the signal This field displays and selects the gain of the AF Analyzer s input amplifier Refer to the Gain Cnt1 field information 111 ain Men Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Notch Freq This field sets the center frequency for the variable frequency notch filter It is typically used for distortion and SINAD measurements at frequencies below or above the standard 1 kHz notch filter This field is not displayed if your Test Set does not have this feature Operating Considerations When the Notch Coup field on the CONFIGURE screen is set to AFGen1 this filter and the AFGen1 Freq field match their settings A warning message is then displayed if you attempt to set the AFGen1 Freq value outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz range of this filter When the Notch Coup field is set to None this filter and AFGen1 Freq operate independently Notch Gain This field displays and selects the gain of the AF Analyzer s notch filter amplifier This amplifier is only used for making SINAD and distortion measurements Refer to the Gain Cnt1 field information Pk Det To Peak Detector To selects the signal source for the peak detectors This all
83. base station the Test Set does not perform any protocol functions on the voice channel Tre op ae os kag 257 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen To Make an FM Hum and Noise Measurement 1 Ifnot already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information 2 Ifnotalready done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information 3 Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 NOTE NOTE 258 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f The mobile station s speaker output must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO IN and the mobile station s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO OUT in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen 4 Turn on the mobile station Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel 5 Ifthe ANALOG MEAS screen is not displayed select the ANLG MEAS field from the To Screen menu The ANALOG MEAS screen will be displayed It is recommended that the mobile station s microphone be muted if possible when making measurements on the mobile stations RF carrier If the microphone is not muted it is possible for
84. be loaded from disk card ROM or RAM Seqn Order of Tests Selecting this field displays the TESTS Order of Tests screen Spec Pass Fail Limits Selecting this field displays the TESTS Pass Fail Limits screen 534 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestscrn fh Main Menu TESTS Channel Information Figure 133 DO0000 DO00D0 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 The TESTS Channel Information Screen TESTS Channel Information 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Channel Information Print ALII AG aghain Menu tstcinfo wmf This screen displays the channel frequencies to be tested Main Menu 535 Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Channel Information Delete Ch Insert Ch NOTE Main Menu Print All 536 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestscrn fh Main Menu This field allows you to delete a channel from the frequency table at the bottom of the screen This field allows you to enter a new channel in frequency table at the bottom of the screen Operating Considerations You are required to specify if the test channel is a prime test channel Prime test channels are the radio channels primarily used by the radio operator they are the channels you are the most concerned about testing Use the RX Chan Infoor TX Chan Info fields if the channel requires a tone co
85. be modified and then inserted into a messaging protocol at a specific location at a specific time This functionality requires a protocol analyzer When in the Bits mode the Test Set provides the messaging protocol for the user that is for a desired call processing function the correct message s will be sent at the correct time s according to the standard It is the responsibility of the user to generate the contents of all the messages which will be used in a particular call processing function For example if the Call Processing Subsystem was in the active state and the operator wished to register the mobile station from the Bits mode the user would have to set the contents of all the messages used in the registration before selecting the Register field to start the registration process No error checking is done on the bit patterns The bit patterns are used but are not checked against any industry standard It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the bit patterns set in the CALL BIT screen are correct when the Data Spec field is set to Bits Unexpected operation of the mobile station can occur if the contents of the signaling messages are incorrect Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL BIT Screen Changing the Content of a Message Field Perform the following steps to change the contents of a message field 1 Position the cursor on the Data Spec field and select Bits 2 Selectthe Set M
86. can be analyzed from three different types of inputs e The output of the AM FM or SSB demodulators The AUDIO IN RADIO INTERFACE MODULATION INPUT MIC ACC and AUDIO OUT connectors e The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 105 Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram AF Cnt Gate AF Freq 106 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS afascrn fb Audio frequency counter gate specifies how long the AF counter samples the signal before displaying the frequency Specifying a shorter gate time may enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a longer gate time This is the default measurement for this measurement field Selecting this field displays the following measurement choices SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation e Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement e The RF Generator and AFGenl must be set up to provide the radio s carrier AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement e AFGen2 must be turned off e The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN po
87. center pins The shells of both connectors are at chassis ground Operating Considerations Input impedance is switchable between 1 MQ in parallel with 95pF or 600Q floating This port is selected as the AF Analyzer s input using the AF Anl In field in the TX TEST screen DUPLEX TEST screen AF ANALYZER screen and various encoder modes This port is always the AF Analyzer s input when the RX TEST screen is displayed Signals input to the AF Analyzer are routed through different filters amplifiers and detectors that affect the displayed measurement The maximum level between the HI and LO center pins is 42 V peak approximately 30 Vrms Exceeding this value can cause permanent instrument damage See Also Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen 573 Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT This connector provides an external output from various tap points in the AF Analyzer Operating Considerations The Scope To field in the AF ANALYZER screen determines the source of this signal The level is not affected by the front panel VOLUME knob Output impedance lt 1 KQ See Also Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen AUDIO OUT This port is used to output signals from AF Generators 1 and 2 including the encoder functions Operating Considerations The output level is set by the AF Generators and is not affected by the front panel VOLUME control Output impedance lt 1Q Maximu
88. coming from the mobile Serial This field displays the serial number of the mobile station Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 175 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW D Message Fields Figure 27 RECCW D Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile Dig 1 through Dig 8 These fields display digits 1 through 8 of the phone number dialed on the mobile station Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 176 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW E Message Fields Figure 28 RECCW E Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile Dig 9 through Dig 16 These fields display digits 9 through 16 of the phone number dialed on the mobile station Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 177 ain Men
89. display DSAT or DST codes Message data or DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone data This field lists the total number of bits displayed This number is dependent on Data Rate of the signal being decoded the Gate Time of the decoder and the size ofthe decoder s data buffer Operating Considerations The buffer has a maximum capacity of e 1584 bits for decoding Reverse Voice Channel RVC data streams e 1583 bits for decoding Reverse Control Channel RECC data streams This measurement is not available for NAMPS NTACS RVC decoding See Also Gate Time on page 279 This setting is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being analyzed Normal Operation When this field is set to Norm a logical high 1 is displayed when a positive peak in the received signal is detected A negative peak displays a logical low 0 Inverted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 is displayed when a negative peak in the received signal is detected A positive peak displays a logical low 0 RECC Data NAMPS NTACS RECC 280 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu This display field lists the decoded data serially as it is received This is the same information that the AMPS TACS Data hex measurement displays Single Cont Stop Meas Trig Level Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder This field specifies how long you w
90. engineer through your local Agilent Technologies Service Center You can find a list of local service representatives on the Web at http www agilent tech com services English index html If you do not have access to the Internet one of these centers can direct you to your nearest representative United States Test and Measurement Call Center Toll free in US 800 452 4844 Europe 31 20 547 9900 Canada 905 206 4725 Japan Measurement Assistance Center 81 426 56 7832 I 81 426 56 7840 FAX Latin America 305 267 4288 FAX Australia New Zealand 1 800 629 485 Australia 0800 738 378 New Zealand Asia Pacific 852 2599 7777 852 2506 9285 FAX Manufacturer s This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the German Sound Declaration Emission Directive from 18 January 1991 This product has a sound pressure emission at the operator position lt 70 dB A e Sound Pressure Lp lt 70 dB A e At Operator Position e Normal Operation e According to ISO 7779 1988 EN 27779 1991 Type Test Herstellerbescheinigung Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der Maschinenl rminformationsverordnung vom 18 Januar 1991 e Schalldruckpegel Lp lt 70 dB A e Am Arbeitsplatz e Normaler Betrieb e Nach ISO 7779 1988 EN 27779 1991 Typpr fung 11 In this Book 12 The Agilent Technologies 8920B
91. field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test Set This field displays the received order qualifier The field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the Test Set 173 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions LT This field displays the last try code field RSVD Reserved for future use MIN2 This field displays the second part of the mobile identification number received by the Test Set Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 174 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW C Message Fields Figure 26 RECCW C Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words
92. field specifies a tone s on signal level that you input after de emphasis if used The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for every desired tone received If de emphasis is used by setting the AF Analyzer s De Emphasis field to 750 us the Input Level should be set to about 1 5 of the measured signal s level For example a 1 kHz 1 Vpeak sinewave into the AF Analyzer input requires an Input Level of approximately 0 212 V to trigger correctly See Also Trig Level on page 343 Off Time On Time Single Cont Stop Meas Sym Trig Level Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Tone Sequence Decoder This measurement column lists the length of time each tone was off prior to the next tone being received This measurement column lists the length of time each tone was on This field specifies how you want the analyzer to be armed e Single is used to analyze and display the decoded information once each time Arm Meas is selected e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements The symbol column corre
93. for the test procedure is stored Code files are the main program files of the software containing all of the test subroutines If an Agilent 11807 memory card is catalogued the code file is preceded by a lower case c Enter Procedure Filename Main Menu Pass Word Procedure Library This field is used to enter the name of the file you want to save or delete Operating Considerations When you save a procedure file you can use any name with up to 9 characters You can also delete previously saved files to be able to resave a file using the same file name The media must be initialized before a file can be saved Refer to the Programmer s Guide Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen The Pass Word field allows you to access a secured test procedure file Test procedures are secured using the SECURE_IT program in ROM On the Agilent 8920E load and run the ROM IB_UTIL program to access the SECURE_IT program See Also Securing a Test Procedure on page 557 This field is used to select whether the new test procedure will use the current test s library or no library All Agilent 11807 Test Procedures must be saved with a test library Other IBASIC programs may not require an associated library file Library files contain all of the channel parameter and test name information used with the code file If an Agilent 11807 memory card is catalogued the library file is preceded by a lower cas
94. for voltage measurements The reading is displayed in the Voltage measurement field 513 iain Mo Chapter 20 Service Screen Field Descriptions 514 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIservscr 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen The SPECTRUM ANALYZER screen s controls are arranged in four menus The menus are accessed using the Controls field The field descriptions are grouped by menu names Assigning global USER keys to the most used functions on the menus allows you to access the functions without having to change menus 515 ain wenu Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions NOTE The Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models SPECTRUM ANALYZER 1 BH 3 kHz Marker Frea 150 00000 SR cece N ee ee ees La m opo 51 50 BE foovsesseed dposesananajesnnsssanfonsansave Tr Tefoices rn ie ul a PA Main i i i RF Gen Marker Auxiliary Sensitivity Hormol Hi shi Auxiliary Menu Marker Menu Amplitude oft Output Port ARE Que Duell 4 RF Gen Track Menu MHz sascrn wmf Figure 125 The Spectrum Analyzer Screen and Menus 516 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS specscr Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Main Menu Fields Center Frea Ref Level Span gt EE BOREITITOEN MHz dBm MHz sascrn2 wmf
95. frequencies and on off times These are tones that may be used to trigger connected equipment after a mobile to base station connection has been made such as an answering machine or voice mail sys tem 285 iain Mo Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder The Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System CDCSS Decoder analyzes digital data streams used to turn squelch on and off on digitally controlled squelch radios SIGNALING DECODER Statusi Idle Data Rate Data bin Code loct AF Anl In Input Level A ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT Trig Level 383 nY Polarity cdes de1 wmf Figure 73 The CDCSS Sequence Decoder Screen AF Anl In Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 286 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Arm Meas Code oct Data bin Data Rate Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal when Single is selected This field displays all of the code word combinations from the received data stream The top entry in this column is always 1 of the 83 standard primary industry cod
96. function is set to On the RF output level is restricted to a range above and below the present Amplitude setting Attempting to set an amplitude outside the allowed range results in an error message and beep if the beeper is on RF output level accuracy is greatly degraded outside the allowed range Audio Out Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling to the AUDIO OUT connector FM Coupling These fields provide two functions e The upper field specifies ac or dc coupling between the MODULATION INPUT con nector and the RF Generator s FM modulator This field also alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources e Selecting the lower field causes the instrument to offset any dc bias that may exist when dc coupling is selected Mic Pre Emp Microphone pre emphasis determines whether the modulating signal from the MIC ACC connector goes through or bypasses the 750 ms pre emphasis network Two fields are used e The upper field is used to specify whether you want the instrument to automatically turn pre emphasis on during FM operation and off for other modulations Auto or to leave the pre emphasis switching to the user s operation Hold e The lower field tells you whether pre emphasis is on or off when Auto operation is selected or allows you to manually turn pre emphasis on or off if Hold is selected 498 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rfgsern fp Main Menu
97. how to register the mobile station Select the Page field The Page annunciator will light while the Test Set pages the mobile on the forward control channel If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set sends the mobile station an alert order on the assigned voice channel The mobile station should ring Press the SEND key on the mobile station The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set when the SEND key is pressed The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel The voice channel assignment section will be updated that is any in the left hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Paging a Mobile Station That Has Not Registered with the Test Set 1 2 pn Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel on page 145 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CA
98. in Figure 3 to see an example of a units of measure field To change a unit of measure 1 Position the cursor at the unit field on the display 2 Press a key labeled with a different unit of measure such as W If the new units are valid the measurement value is displayed in the unit Underlined Immediate Action Field Underlined immediate action fields provide a choice of two settings See item 2 in Figure 3 to see an example of an underlined immediate action field To change an underlined entry 1 Position the cursor at the field 2 Push the CURSOR CONTROL knob or the ENTER key to move the underline under the desired choice The underlined setting is immediately activated when selected 44 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIgetstart fb Main Menu One of Many Field Chapter 1 Get Started Changing A Field s Setting One of many fields display a list of choices when selected See item 3 in Figure 3 to see an example of a one of many field To make a one of many choice 1 Position the cursor at the field 2 Push the Cursor Control knob or the ENTER key to display the choices 3 4 Push the Cursor Control knob or the ENTER key to make the choice Move the cursor through the choices by turning the knob The choice is immediately activated when selected The To Screen menu see item 5 in Figure 3 is a variation of the one of many field Numeric Entry Field Numeric entry fields contain val
99. is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Pk Hold displays and holds the negative peak value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Pk 2 Hold divides the sum of the positive and negative peak values by 2 and displays the value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Pk Mx Holdcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 109 ain wenu Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Ext Load R Filter 1 and Filter 2 FM Deviation 110 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS afasern fb Main Menu External Load Resistance is used to calculate and display AF power Power is calculated using the voltage measured at the AUDIO IN connections and the resistance value you enter into this field Operating Considerations This field is not displayed when the Audio In Lo field is setto 600 To Hi the load resistance is internally fixed to 600 ohms See Also AC Level on page 105 Audio In Lo on page 107 Filters 1 and 2 select a variety of standard and optional filt
100. level until the microphone is no longer keyed See Also Atten Hold on page 351 Interaction Between Screens on page 56 MIC ACC on page 578 Attenuator hold prevents the fixed RF output attenuators from switching in and out eliminating the loss of the output signal as the level is changed This function is helpful when making squelch measurements Operating Considerations When this function is set to On the RF output level is restricted to a range of 15 dB around the present Amplitude setting Attempting to set an amplitude outside the allowed range results in an error message and beep if the beeper is on RF output level accuracy is greatly degraded outside the allowed range 351 ain wenu Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions Audio Out This field selects ac or dc coupling to the AUDIO OUT connector De Emphasis This setting selects or bypasses the 750 ms de emphasis networks in the audio analyzer and internal speaker circuitry Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 352 U MAA Detector Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions This setting selects the type of detector used when measuring and displaying AF signal levels Detector Types RMS displays the RMS value of signals displays t
101. memory card label is marked with an arrow that must be inserted on the left side when you are facing the Test Set of the front panel slot 74 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Memory Cards NOTE Memory cards may be inserted and removed with the Test Set powered on or off NM Figure 9 Inserting aMemory Card 75 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Memory Cards Setting the Write Protect Switch The SRAM memory card s write protect switch lets the user secure its contents from being overwritten or erased The switch has two positions see Figure 10 e Read write The memory card contents can be changed or erased and new files may written on the card e Read only The memory card contents can be read by the Test Set but cannot be changed or erased Read write setting I Read only setting Figure 10 Setting the SRAM Write Protect Switch 76 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Memory Cards The Memory Card Battery NOTE NOTE SRAM memory cards use a lithium battery to power the card Listed below are the batteries for the Test Set s SRAM cards SRAM cards typically retain data for over 1 year at 25 C To retain data the battery should be replaced annually SRAM Card Battery Part Numbers CR2025 or Agilent Technologies 1420 0509 Rep
102. nStrobe Data 1 Least Significant Bit Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Most Significant Bit 10 nAck 11 Busy 12 PError 13 Select 14 nAutoFd 15 nFault 16 nlnit 17 nSelectIn 18 Signal Ground nStrobe 19 Signal Ground Data and Data 2 20 Signal Ground Data 3 and Data 4 21 Signal Ground Data 5 and Data 6 22 Signal Ground Data 7 and Data 8 23 Signal Ground Busy and nFault 24 Signal Ground PError Select and nAck 25 Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectIn and nlnit SAAT E amp Y PE 2 582 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys fh Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions RADIO INTERFACE This connector is optional on all Test Sets This connector provides parallel communications between the Test Set and external radio equipment The connector provides a 16 line parallel digital interface that you can configure as inputs outputs or acombination of inputs and outputs You can set the logic thresholds and output levels so that the interface will match the levels and thresholds of the device it is connector to Audio and transmitter control lines are also provided Parallel communication parameters are entered in the RADIO INTERFACE screen This screen is only available if the Radio Interface option is installed The audio signal from this connector is input by setting the AF Anl In field to Radio Int The
103. not have to be the same as the measure ment s units For instance when measuring AC Level in Volts you can set HI and LO LIMITs in units of dBm 70 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Measurement Limit Indicators To Reset or Remove Limits To reset a limit that has been exceeded 1 Position the cursor in front of the measurement s unit of measure 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the down arrow or up arrow key to access the LO LIMIT or HI LIMIT function then press ENTER or MEAS RESET To remove a limit 1 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the assigned limit 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the down arrow or up arrow key to access the LO LIMIT or HILIMIT function then press ON OFF Example of Setting HI and LO LIMITs This example sets limits for the TX Freq Error measurement Limits are being set to indicate if a 100 MHz carrier varies more than 10 kHz 1 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the TX FREQ ERROR measure ment the default is kHz 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the down arrow to access the LO LIMIT func tion then enter 1 0 kHz 3 Press and release the SHIFT key then the up arrow to access the HI LIMIT function then enter 1 0 kHz 71 iain Mo Chapter 3 Operating Overview Averaging Measurements Averaging Measurements The AVG average f
104. number and system identification number Call processing functions such as registration page and handoff can be activated from this screen The transmit power of the mobile station can be set from this screen Data messages re ceived from the mobile station are displayed on this screen e The CALL DATA screen displays the decoded signaling messages received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel and the reverse voice channel Call pro cessing functions such as registration page and handoff can also be activated from this screen The transmit power of the mobile station can be set from this screen e The CALL BIT screen allows the advanced user to modify the contents of the forward control channel and forward voice channel messages e The CALL CONFIGURE screen contains the fields used to configure various parame ters related to the Call Processing Subsystem such as CMAX Detector and Input Att e The ANALOG MEAS screen is used to make analog RF and audio measurements on the mobile station while a link is active e AUTHENTICATION screen allows the user to turn on the AMPS authentication pro cess IS 54 during call processing functions Various fields contained on this screen allow the advanced user to select new RAND_A RAND_B RandSSD and RAND_U val ues for transmission to the mobile station The user can also select the number of times the system parameter overhead message is sent to the mobile station AMPS Call Pro
105. occurs disconnect the RF power press the MEAS RESET key and allow the Test Set to cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on this port The ANT IN antenna input connector provides a highly sensitive input for very low level signals such as off the air measurements You cannot measure TX RF Power on this screen using the antenna port However low level RF power at the antenna port can be measured using the Spectrum Analyzer Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it The RF Channel field is displayed only when the RF Display field is set to Chan on the CONFIGURE screen This field displays the current channel number Channel tuning eliminates the need to transmit and receive frequencies directly into the Test Set Once the radio s RF channel standard is selected you only have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF Generator and RF Analyzer to the correct frequency Operating Considerations To utilize the correct transmit and receive frequencies select the appropriate channel standard from the RF Chan Std field on the CONFIGURE screen 1 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models 567 in Menu Chapte
106. of Using Measurement Averaging This example enables the SINAD measurement to be averaged using 25 samples 1 Press PRESET and wait for the instrument to display the RX TEST screen 2 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the SINAD measurement default is dB 3 Press and release the SHIFT key then the INCR x10 key to access the AVG function enter 2 5 then press the ENTER key Avg appears below the displayed measurement value to indicate that averaging is being used 72 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Setting A Measurement Reference Setting A Measurement Reference The REF SET function establishes a measurement reference point This allows you to make a direct comparison between two measurement results or between a measurement standard and the actual measurement results Referenced measurements are displayed in one of two ways depending on the type of measurement Displayed value Measurement Reference The difference between the measured value and the reference value is displayed in the same unit of measure or Displayed value Measurement Reference A ratio of the measured value to the reference value is displayed in dB To Use the Present Value as a Reference Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the measurement you want to set the reference for 1 Press and release the SHIFT key then the INCR 10
107. of digits for this measurement Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low level RF power lt 200 mW at the ANT IN port Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on reset it See Also TX Power on page 490 TX Pwr Zero on page 491 1 The Input Port field is accessed on the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST and RF ANALYZER screens 2 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models 501 ain wenu Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions 502 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rfgscrn fp Main Menu 19 RX Test Screen ain wenu 503 Chapter 19 RX Test Screen Block Diagram Block Diagram RF Gen Freq Amplitude 100 000000 80 0 MHz dBm Duplex Out FM Output Port Atten Hold RF Out Dupl On Off AF Gen 1 Freq AF Gen 1 To FM 1 0000 3 0000 T AM AF Gen 2Freq AF Gen 2 To FM 1 0000 kHz Off Audio Out Filter 1 Filter 2 50Hz HPF 15kHz LPF AC Level SNR AUDIO IN HI AF Freq Distn Ext Load R AF Freq 8 00 DC Level au Current AUDIOINLO Figure 123 The RX Te
108. on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Ensure that the mobile station has registered with the Test Set See Initialize Call Processing with Authentication on page 155 for information on how to register the mobile station Select the Page field The Page annunciator will light while the Test Set pages the mobile on the forward control channel If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set sends the mobile station an alert order on the assigned voice channel The mobile station should ring Press the SEND key on the mobile station The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel The Voice Channel Assignment fields will be updated that is any in the left hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information If page with authentication was successful Page w Auth successful will be dis
109. on page 56 519 ain wenu Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Output Port This field selects the output port for the RF Generator Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel CAUTION Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument A message is displayed when an overpower conditions occurs Whenever possible when testing transceivers use the RF IN OUT connector to prevent damage from accidental transmitter keying If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit remove the reverse power signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it RF Gen Freq This field sets the RF Generator s frequency 520 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS specscr Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions RF Generator Menu Fields Tracking Operation Figure 128 Amplitude EPPPERPPRE DE PERL ee eee eer I ER eee eee eee eee E ea P ET Por BOTEN POA EN AE Fea Controls Offset Frea Amplitude 3 5 io dBm MHz sascrnd wmf Using the Spectrum Analyzer with the Tracking Generator The Tracking Generator performs a frequency sweep operation The start and stop frequencies are determined by the Main Menu Span setting This allows you to characterize devices such as filter networks over a wide span of frequencies An RF offset can be
110. on to reset it RF Gen Freq RF Generator frequency sets the generator s frequency 509 ain wenu Chapter 19 RX Test Screen Field Descriptions SINAD This measurement field is used to select and display any one of the following measurements SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement The RF Generator and AFGen1 must be set up to provide the radio s carrier AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement AFGen2 must be turned off The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port set the AF Anl Infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 510 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIrxtscrn fh Main Menu 20 Service Screen NOTE This screen is used for component level troubleshooting by the manufacturer This method of troubleshooting is not currently supported outside of the factory This screen allows you to monitor individual circuit node measurements and change various MUX and DAC latch settings for isolating faulty modules To access the SERVICE screen you must first access th
111. page 575 SINAD Distortion SNR AF Frequency DC Level DC Current on page 63 Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions on page 571 107 iain wenu Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram DC Level De Emp Gain De Emphasis Distn 108 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSJ afascrn fh Main Menu This field displays the DC voltage entering at the DC input port on the back of the Test Set De emphasis gain displays and selects the desired AF analyzer de emphasis amplifier gain See Also Gain Cntl on page 111 This setting selects or bypasses the 750 ms de emphasis networks in the audio analyzer and speaker circuitry See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 This field displays the percent of distortion The Distortion measurement is only for a 1 kHz signaling tone Detector Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram This setting selects the type of detector used when measuring and displaying AF signal levels Detector Types RMS displays the RMS value of signals displays the RMS value of a signal multiplied by 2 Pk displays the positive peak value Pk displays the negative peak value Pk 2 adds the positive and negative peak values and divides the sum by 2 Pk Max compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value polarity is not indicated Pk Hold displays and holds the positive peak value until the measurement
112. pins when the Parallel Data In field is selected The data appears in bitwise fashion with the 16 bits organized from MSB to LSB When selected this field clocks the data in the Output Data field to the parallel data pins It also outputs a pulse on the Strobe pin The strobe polarity field sets the polarity of the pulse on the Strobe pin This pulse occurs when the Send Data field is selected Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation CAUTION Do not connect a voltage source in excess of 0 3 V for example 0 4 V to any Parallel Data pin Also do not connect a voltage source that exceeds 5 7 V unless the logic voltage has been set to a level other than the default If the logic voltage has been set to some value other than the default of 5 1 V the maximum voltage that can be applied is the logic voltage plus 0 6 V Refer to Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level on page 473 Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level The logic levels on the parallel data bus are determined by the Logic Voltage The two choices for the Logic Voltage are 5 1 V from the default internal Logic Voltage supply or 5 1 V to 20 V from an external power supply The Logic Voltage affects both the input and output logic levels on the Radio Interface board When data is output the logic high voltage level will be determined by the Logic Voltage appli
113. s Data Rate setting to specify how fast the incoming message is being sent Therefore when using the decoder you must first specify the data rate in the encoder 374 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 CDCSS Encoder CDCSS Encoder The Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System CDCSS Encoder generates signals to test radios that use a digitally encoded signal to turn squelch on and off The encoder can be used to modulate the RF Generator or it can be output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector SIGMALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 Code Status bi Send Mode Idle Data Rote Bursts bps TOC Time ns AFGene To Audio Dut ACD FM Couplina RADIO IHT cdcesen1 wmf Figure 91 The CDCSS Encoder Mode Screen 375 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 CDCSS Encoder AFGen2 To Audio Out Bursts Code Data Rate 376 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This audio frequency generator control contains two fields e The upper field determines whether the CDCSS Encoder modulates the RF Generator or is output through AUDIO OUT e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off Audio out coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out Operating Considerations The CDCSS enco
114. s audio analyzer can be accessed through the OPTION INTERFACE connector See Audio Input on page 584 External Transmitter Key Relay Interrupt Capability Two pins on the Radio Interface are connected in parallel with the Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 pins on the front panel MIC ACC connector The Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 pins allow a radio transmitter to be keyed through a front panel display field called Ext TX Key Refer to Key Out 1 on page 584 and Key Out 2 on page 584 Two pins on the Radio Interface are designated as Interrupt lines 1 and 2 If Interrupt 1 or 2 is armed by selecting Arm on the RADIO INTERFACE screen and the corresponding pin is grounded the word Tripped is displayed on the RADIO INTERFACE screen and a status register bit is set Refer to Interrupt Input 1 on page 585 and Interrupt Input 2 on page 585 12 6 V 12 6 V Supplies The Radio Interface provides 12 6 V and 12 6 V power supplies capable of powering low current devices Refer to 12 6 V on page 584 and 12 6 V on page 584 Refer to Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation on page 473 and Using The Radio Interface Remote Operation on page 479 for more detailed information about using the Radio Interface 469 ain wenu Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions RADIO INTERFACE Parallel Data In Strobe Pol Output Data Input Data
115. set between the Tracking Generator and the center frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer This allows you to look at a signal that is related to a source whose frequency is outside of the displayed span This field sets the amplitude of the Tracking Generator Operating Considerations This field operates independently of the RF Generator s amplitude settings in other screens If a microphone is connected and the amplitude is off keying the microphone causes the amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the microphone is no longer keyed 521 ain Men Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Offset Freq Port Sweep 522 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS specscr Frequency offset RF Generator sets the difference between the instantaneous frequencies of the Tracking Generator and the center frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer Operating Considerations The offset can be a positive or negative value When set to zero the Tracking Generator produces a sweeping signal that matches the Spectrum Analyzer s tune frequency This control performs two functions e The upper field specifies the output port of the Tracking Generator e The lower field specifies whether the Tracking Generator sweeps from low to high fre quencies Norm or from high to low frequencies Invert The Spectrum Analyzer always sweeps from low to high frequencies The swept frequency range is determined by the S
116. should hear the 1 kHz tone from your radio and or the Test Set s speaker indicating that the trunked channel has been established If you connected the radio s speaker to the AUDIO IN port s access the DUPLEX TEST screen to display the AC Level and SINAD measurements 408 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the LTR Encoder To make a 12 dB SINAD measurement 1 2 3 Set Filter 1to300Hz HPFandFilter 2to3kHz LPF Decrease the Amplitude until approximately 12 dB SINAD is displayed Use the AVG average function to stabilize the measurement by positioning the cursor in front of the SINAD dB field and pressing and releasing the SHIFT key then the INCR x10 key to access the AVG function then press the ENTER key To Test Your Transmitter To establish a trunked transmit channel on the home channel CPAANAMP ey _ i m 12 13 14 Connect the RF IN OUT port of the Test Set to your radio s antenna port Turn your radio on and select the channel to test Press the PRESET key to establish a known instrument state for this procedure Access the DUPLEX TEST screen Set the Tune Mode field to Manual Enter the home channel s transmit frequency in the Tune Freq field Enter the home channel s receive frequency in the RF Gen Freq field Set AFGen1 To to Off Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod Access the ENC
117. standard It is primarily intended to be controlled using IBASIC programs running on the Test Set s IBASIC controller or on an external controller STGNALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 Status System Identity MED fii Idle Prefix Ident Mode Radio Unit Under Test Simulated Callins Unit Control Channel fl Traffic Channel Ei Hotei Control and traffic channel Arten To numbers entered above are the values Fit used by MPT1327 sianalina and mar be offset from the equivalent RF channel numbers Audio Out AC DC Test Mode Aloha Number E Address Qualifier W for ALH and MOVE messages mpt en1 wmf Figure 99 The MPT 1327 Trunked Radio Encoder Mode Screen Address Qualifier The Address Qualifier field allows you to enter the address qualifier The address qualifier is a bit mask It indicates the number of bits in the identity field which have to be compared by a radio unit RU when it is deciding whether the ALH or MOVE message is addressed to that RU The address qualifier is a two digit decimal integer without leading zeros It has the range 0 through 20 and its default value is 0 e A value of 0 corresponds to no bits being compared all RUs receive the ALH or MOVE message e A value of 20 corresponds to all bits being compared the ALH or MOVE being addressed to one specific RU e Fora value of M between 0 and 20 sub divide the RU population into 2M subsets 411 an
118. station has exited the maintenance state will return to the Connect state and the left hand subfields in the Voice Channel Assignment section will be updated with the current voice channel assignment information Applicable cellular system standards may specify a time out period for the maintenance state If an Alert order is not received during this time out period the mobile station may take some action as defined by the standard One such action might be to terminate the voice channel connection Refer to the applicable cellular system standard for specific information 151 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication The process of testing AMPS authentication IS 54 through the Call Processing Subsystem requires the user to synchronize the base station and mobile station This synchronization requires that the base station and the mobile station possess two pieces of shared secret data SSD to confirm a valid call The first piece is the ESN of the mobile station and the second piece is the mobile station s A key The A key is a secret 26 digit number stored in the mobile station s semi permanent memory The following sections describe how to e Condition the Test Set for Call Processing with Authentication e Configure the Test Set for authentication e Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel e Initialize
119. switch 76 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode 402 waveform dc 402 Gaussian noise 402 selecting 402 sine 402 square 402 triangle 402 universal noise 402 wideband decoder signaling standard 303 encoder signaling standard 393 word abbreviated address 171 extended address 173 first word of called address 176 number of additional word coming 186 reverse voice channel order confirma tion message 178 180 181 182 183 185 186 second word of called address 177 serial number 175 to view from mobile station handoff 192 to view from mobile station origina tion 196 to view from mobile station page 189 to view from mobile station registra tion 188 to view from mobile station release 194 to view from order to change TX pow er of mobile 195 word sync bits 367 369 word sync delay 364 working status 394 Working Channel Number Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 394 Working Channel RX Frequency Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 394 x Xmt Pace T O Configure screen 450 Xon Xoff 448 450 Index Main Menu 663 Y YES key 590 664 Z zero crossing detecting 288 zero reference tranmitter power 102 491 570 zeroing DCFM 498 measurement offset 107 power meter 102 143 153 491 570 ZVEII radio standard 440 ZVEI2 radio standard 440 Index
120. the AUDIO OUT connector and low data rates This field defines the number of digital data streams output each time Send is selected This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst This field specifies how fast the data stream is output in bits per second Common data rates POCSAG 512 1200 GSC GOLAY 300 600 This field enables you to cause an error for a specific bit in the encoded message stream 381 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Digital Paging Encoder FM Coupling Function Mssg Length 382 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector Operating Considerations This field should be set to DC whenever the AFGen2 To field is set to FM this provides better modulation response at low data rates This setting specifies which of the four types of messages to send The pager s response is determined by the Pager Type field setting and the pager s configuration For example when testing a POCSAG pager set for tone only operation functions 00 through 11 typically correspond to the pager beeping one to four times If the pager is set for Alpha Numeric operation the functions correspond to a combination of the
121. the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off The AUDIO OUT level is always in volts rms for standard sinewave operation across a low impedance output If the signaling option is installed the sinewave can be set in units of rms or peak This is done in the Sine Units field for the Function Generator When non sinewave waveforms are used or if the upper field is set to AM or FM the level is always expressed as a peak value See Also Function Generator Encoder on page 400 507 iain Men Chapter 19 RX Test Screen Field Descriptions Amplitude Atten Hold Ext Load R 508 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rxtscrn fp in Menu The amplitude field adjusts the amplitude of the RF Generator Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens If a microphone is connected and the amplitude is off keying the microphone causes the amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the microphone is no longer keyed See Also Atten Hold on page 508 Interaction Between Screens on page 56 MIC ACC on page 578 Attenuator hold prevents the fixed RF output attenuators from switching in and out eliminating the brief loss of the output signal as the level is changed This function is helpful when making squelch measurements Operating Consideration
122. the carrier and adjacent channels to be measured See Figure 14 on page 97 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS aepscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions Tune Frea urn adchpwri wmf in CL een AK Upper ACP eee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee I l 1 I l ie a EIEE AE E A el AE ep A E E E E A AE a E NESE S vate W I 1 N co e ra a iag N E Des ee ee eee le ee ee r ae oO m gt i y sam er i i nS rein T m FHLLLLLLLLLLLELLLLLLLLLLLLS gg NV FLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLIPLLLE 1 oO r Bu en 1O p ce Mm ei i E 7 eee eee ai 7 u a Ch Offset kHz Relationship Between Tune Freq Ch Offset and Channel BW Fields Figure 14 97 3 Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions Ch Offset Ext TX key Input Atten 98 Use the channel offset field to enter the frequency difference between the Tune Freq setting and the center of the adjacent channels you want to measure This is an absolute value only positive values can be entered See Figure 14 on page 97 This field controls a switch at the MIC ACC connector Use it to key an external transmitter See Also MIC ACC on page 578 Input Attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN OUT and ANT
123. the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The release does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA screen When the CALL DATA screen is viewed the contents of the display words will contain the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registration origination page release order 194 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from an Order to Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station 1 2 a 9 10 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station Ensure that the Test Set is in the Connect state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel Ifthe CALL DATA screen is not displayed select CALL DATAunder the To Screen menu The CALL DATA screen will be displayed Select the Order field and select it A Choices menu
124. the functions without having to change menus during operation 454 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS oscscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions Oscilloscope Main Menu Fields Figure 110 Time div Vert Offset Vert div Controls DECODER RADIO INT Time div Vert diu Vert Offset EEREERTEEEEN div oscscrn3 wmf Oscilloscope Main Functions This field selects the horizontal sweep time per division Operating Considerations The time per division is selected from a list of choices Vertical offset moves the displayed signal above or below the oscilloscope s fixed centerline Operating Considerations A centerline is displayed for the signal when an offset is used When the vertical offset is 40 00 the marker level is referenced to the center line generated by the vertical offset feature not the center line of the screen Vertical sensitivity sets the vertical amplitude per division Operating Considerations The value for this field is selected from a list of choices Depending on the AF Analyzer s AF Anl In setting the units for this field may be in Volts kHz or Percent AM For example if the AF Anl In field is set to FM Demod the amplitude is displayed in kHZz div 455 in Menu Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions Oscilloscope Marker Menu Fields Figure 111 Marker To Pos
125. this field set to On the Test Set issues system parameter overhead messages including SPC WORD1 SPC WORD2 ACCESS RandChalA and RandCha1B to the mobile station This field is used to enter the electronic serial number ESN of the mobile station There are two methods which can be used to enter the ESN The serial number can be entered as an 8 digit hexadecimal value directly into this field or it can be captured by the Test Set through a registration order To enter the electronic serial number directly select the ESN field and enter the information in hexadecimal format RAND_A is the 16 most significant bits of RAND and is entered as a 4 digit hexadecimal value The mobile station stores and uses the most recent version of RAND in the authentication process RAND_A is user definable RAND_B is the 16 least significant bits of RAND and is entered as a 4 digit hexadecimal value The mobile station stores and uses the most recent version of RAND in the authentication process RAND_B is user definable Main Menu RANDSSD_1 RANDSSD_2 RANDSSD_3 RAND_U lofN Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem AUTHENTICATION Screen RANDSSD_1 is the 24 most significant bits of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order RANDSSD_1 is entered as a 6 digit hexadecimal value RANDSSD_1 is user definable RANDSSD_2 is the 24 subsequent bits following RANDSSD_1 of the random number issued by the base station in the
126. to Norm a logical high 1 is displayed when a positive peak in the received signal is detected A negative peak displays a logical low 0 Inverted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 is displayed when a negative peak in the received signal is detected A positive peak displays a logical low 0 313 ain Men Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen LTR Decoder Single Cont This field specifies how long you want the analyzer to decode incoming signals e Single tells the analyzer to display valid LTR information received during one gate time e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected Stop Meas Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements Trig Level The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement that has been armed The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field setting 314 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the LTR Decoder Using the LTR Decoder Decoding Mobile Radio Signaling Data A transmit channel must be established before a mobile radio is tested otherwise the transmitter will attempt to transmit but time out and de key automatically A procedure for establishing a trunked transmit channel is provided in Using the LTR Encoder on page 407
127. to change This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On See Also RF Level Offset on page 271 1 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions Base Freq User Defined The Base Frequency field sets the RF Generator reference for channel 0 zero when the RF Chan Std field is set to USER DEF and the RF Display field is set to Chan Channel frequencies are calculated using the following formula Channel N Base Frequency N Channel Spacing The Base Frequency is calculated using the following formula Base Frequency Channel 1 Frequency Channel Spacing For example if your multi channel radio s lowest receive channel frequency is 870 030 MHz and the system channel spacing is 30 KHz you would enter 870 MHz in this field You would also use the Chan Space and Gen Anl fields to tell the Test Set where other transmit and receive channel frequencies are in relation to the base frequency and whether or not the system is duplex Operating Considerations The value of this field is only used if the RF Display field is set to Chan and the RF Chan Std field is set to USER DEF See Also Chan Space User Defined on page 264 Gen Anl on page 266 RF Chan Std on page 269 RF Display on page 270 263 Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions Beeper Chan Space User Defined 264 Tr
128. used to connect this port to the IQ RF IN port 3 DET OUT routes the average power detector s signal to the AUX DSP IN of the cellular adapter for making average power measurements This port may not be used with all models of cellular adapter 4 IQRFIN routes the RF carrier from the cellular adapter back into the Test Set fa cel lular adapter is not present a jumper must be used to connect this port to the CW RF OUT port 5 114 3 MHz IF OUT provides the down converted RF signal to the cellular adapter S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys fb Main Menu DUPLEX OUT CAUTION Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions This connection is an output for the RF Generator and Tracking Generator Operating Considerations Output impedance 500 The RF Generator s output is selected in the Output Port field This field is available in the RX TEST DUPLEX TEST RF GENERATOR and SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens Connecting an RF source of gt 200 mW to this connector can permanently damage the instrument EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT This connector provides an external oscilloscope trigger Operating Considerations Input threshold approximately 2 5 V Maximum Input level approximately 20 V peak Input impedance is 100 kQ for signals lt 5 6 V peak 5 KQ for signals gt 5 6 V peak When measured with no load on the input a 5 Volt level is present on the connector due to the i
129. wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder Aloha Number The Aloha Number field allows you to enter the aloha number The aloha number defines the number of timeslots in the random access frames on the forward control channel The value entered in this field is translated to a frame length according to Table 10 The aloha number is a two digit decimal integer without leading zeros It has a range 0 through 15 and its default value is 5 Table 10 Aloha number encoding for 4 bit aloha numbers Aloha Number Frame length 0 Not a frame marker 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12 12 15 13 19 14 25 15 32 412 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th in Menu Control Channel Test Mode Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder The Control Channel field allows you to enter the Control Channel number Radio units RU are programmed to look for control channel signaling on a restricted set of radio channels known as the hunt group It is essential that the channel number on which the Test Set transmits the control channel signaling matches one of the channels in the RU s hunt group If there is not a match no communication will be possible The control channel is a four digit decimal integer without leading zeros It has the range 0 through 1023 and its default value is 1 The Test
130. with IBASIC programs to communicate with base stations or other equipment when the primary serial port is used for printing or data collection Port B cannot be used for printing screens and its communication settings can only be changed using IBASIC commands listed in the Programmer s Guide Unless you are writing IBASIC programs that require serial printing and other serial data transfer at the same time we recommend that you only use the primary port A The IBASIC Controller sends and receives data to the serial ports using address 9 for the primary port and 10 for Port B For example to enter data from the primary serial port into a program variable named SDATA you could use the following command ENTER 9 SDATA To send data from your program out of the primary serial port you could use the following command OUTPUT 9 SDATA Use an RJ 11 25 pin RS 232 adapter Agilent P N 98642 66508 and RJ 11 cable Agilent P N 98642 66505 to connect the Test Set to a serial printer terminal or computer RJ 11 Connectors RJ 11 cables and adapters can be wired several ways If you buy a cable or adapter other than the Agilent parts listed verify the connections for the pins indicated in the following table before connecting cables to the instruments 587 ain wenu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions The following table lists connections for the primary serial port address 9
131. with the decoded frequencies See Also Using the DTMF Decoder on page 300 296 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu Input Level Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder This field specifies the signal level that you input after de emphasis if used The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for fluctuating signal levels De emphasis Effects De emphasis is a single pole low pass filter with a 212 2 Hz corner frequency It is enabled disabled using the De Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen Refer to Figure 15 AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram on page 104 The Input Level is the expected level at the output of the de emphasis network Assuming a mean DTMF frequency of approximately 1 kHz decoding with de emphasis on set to 750 us requires the input level to be set to 212 1000 0 212 times the peak deviation or about 1 5 the incoming level of the tone Examples of Input Level Settings Example 1 Peak deviation 3 kHz De emphasis off Set the input level to 3 kHz Example 2 Peak deviation 3 kHz De emphasis 750 ms Set the input level to 3x0 212 636 Hz 297 ain Men Chapter 8
132. 191 etc PARITY D919 4567F697AAAAC4D7 4567F697AAAAC4D780FFFC02E001D919 FILLER BUFFER 1 4567F697AAAAC4D780FFFC02E001 D919 2 32 SIGNALING HARDWARE Figure 100 Sequence of Events in Assembling a Signaling Message ain Mo 417 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder If the signaling command has the data codeword extension DCW2 or DCW4 subsequent timeslot locations are overwritten with the data codewords If this results in a write to a timeslot greater than 32 the write will wrap back to timeslot one A new filler pattern typically comprises several commands to be written Since each is written individually the following update command is also needed to transfer data into the working filler buffer ENCoder MPT1327 FILLer UPDATe To complete the command set for managing the filler buffer the individual timeslot locations of the filler buffer are cleared by the following command ENCoder MPT1327 FILLer CLEAR n Where n selects the timeslot to be cleared and has the range 1 through 32 The whole buffer is cleared by the command ENCoder MPT1327 FILLer RESET When the Test Mode field is in Control mode the signaling firmware hardware will cycle through the defined part of the filler buffer transmitting each 128 bit timeslot in turn This is shown in Figure 101 on page 418 Figure 101 also shows the control message buffer for comparison with Figure 102 on page 420 TIMESLOT 1
133. 20 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys fb Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Key Descriptions DATA FUNCTIONS Keys INCR 310 INCR SET and INCR x10 are used to change the increment or decre ment a value when changing field values Up arrow and down arrow keys increment or decrement field values These keys are also used to select alternate field entries without displaying the Choices menu used by some fields They are also used to move the cursor in string entry fields such as the Print Title field on the PRINT CONFIGURE screen LO LIMIT SHIFT down arrow key and HILIMIT SHIFT up arrow key and set measurement end points Exceeding the end points causes screen prompts to blink until they are reset REF SET SHIFT INCR 310 is used to enter or remove a measurement reference for relative AF and RF measurements METER SHIFT INCR SET enables or disables the analog bar graph meter func tion for measurements using large digits such as the RX TEST and TX TEST screen measurements AVG SHIFT INCR x10 enables or disables measurement averaging See Also Operating Overview on page 55 591 iain Mo Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Key Descriptions INSTRUMENT STATE Keys LOCAL returns the instrument to manual control after GPIB control is used RECALL lists any instrument setups that were saved MEAS RESET clears the measurement
134. 29 439 497 507 for call control 128 for tone sequence 441 function generator 401 off 96 350 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 496 497 507 ain wenu 627 RF generator 351 497 508 519 tracking generator 521 twist 388 vertical sensitivity 455 AMPS Call Control screen view of 126 AMPS TACS control channel decoder 277 forward control channel 361 forward voice channel 361 radio standard 373 reverse control channel 282 reverse voice channel 282 simulated system 140 voice channel decoder 277 AMPS TACS decoder mode AF Anl In 278 Arm Meas 278 Channel 278 Data hex 279 Gate Time 279 Input Level 279 Num of Bits 280 Polarity 280 Single Cont 281 Stop Meas 281 Trig Level 281 Trigger Pattern bin 281 view of 277 AMPS TACS encoder mode AFGen2 To 363 Audio Out 363 B I Delay 364 Bursts 364 Busy Idle 364 Channel 364 Data Level 364 Data Rate 365 Filler 366 FM Coupling 367 Message 368 369 Polarity 371 SAT Freq 372 SAT Level 372 Send 372 Send Filler 372 Send Mode 373 Standard 373 628 Stop 373 Stop Filler 373 view of 361 Analog Meas screen AF Anl In 254 AF Freq 254 AFGen1 Freq 254 AFGen1 To 254 Amplitude 254 De Emphasis 255 Detector 255 Filter 1 255 Filter 2 255 FM Deviation 255 TX Freq Error 255 TX Power 255 view of 253 analog meter 65 analyzer arming measurements 281 289 294 298 303 30
135. 3 B I Delay FOCC 364 Bursts 364 Busy Idle 364 Channel 364 Data Level 364 Data Rate 365 FM Coupling 367 Message 368 369 Polarity 371 SAT Freq 372 Send 372 Send Filler 372 Send Mode 373 Standard 373 Stop 373 Stop Filler 373 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode AFGen2 To 376 Audio Out 376 Bursts 376 Code 376 Data Rate 376 FM Coupling 377 Polarity 377 Send 377 Send Mode 378 Standard 378 Stop 378 TOC Time 378 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode AFGen2 To 381 Audio Out 381 ain Mon 655 Bursts 381 Data Rate 381 Error Bit 381 FM Coupling 382 Function 382 Mssg Length 382 Pager Alpha NumericMessage 383 Pager Code 383 Pager NumericMessage 383 Pager Type 383 Polarity 383 Send 384 Send Mode 384 Standard 384 Stop 384 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode AFGen2 To 385 Audio Out 386 Bursts 386 FM Coupling 386 Off Time 386 On Time 386 Pre Emp 387 Send 387 Send Mode 387 Standard 387 Stop 387 Symbol Frequencies 387 Twist 388 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode AFGen2 To 390 Audio Out 390 Control Channel Number 390 Control Channel RXFrequency 390 Control Channel TXFrequency 390 Data Rate 391 FM Coupling 391 Group ID 391 Handshake 391 Logical ID 392 Polarity 392 RX Test 392 Signaling Dev 393 Site ID 393 Standard 393 Status 394 Stop 394 Sub Audible Dev 394 656 Working Channel Numbe
136. 354 U MAA This field controls a switch at the MIC ACC connector Its intended use is to key an external transmitter See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 This field selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector This field also alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This is the default measurement for this field The type of measurement listed here is dependent on the AF Anl In settings See Also AF Anl In on page 348 Displaying Measurements on page 60 IF Filter Input Port CAUTION Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions This field selects the desired IF filter bandwidth for modulated signals being analyzed This field selects the RF IN OUT or ANT IN connector for making RF measurements The RF IN OUT port must be used for making TX Power measurements on this screen Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel If the RF power at the RF IN OUT port exceeds allowable limits a loud warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen If this occurs disconnect the RF power press the MEAS RESET key and allow the Test Set to cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on this port The ANT IN antenna input connector provides a highly sensitive input for ver
137. 38 Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 531 Check 541 Lower Limit 541 Main Menu 541 Output Heading 541 Units 541 Upper Limit 541 view of 540 Tests Printer Setup screen 531 Continue 551 ain wenu 659 FF at End 551 FF at Start 551 Lines Page 552 Main Menu 552 Model 552 Output Heading 552 Output Results For 552 Output Results To 552 Printer Address 553 Printer Port 553 Run 555 Run Test 553 view of 551 Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 331 Code Location 543 Enter Procedure Filename 543 Main Menu 543 Pass Word 543 Select ProcedureLocation 543 544 view of 542 Tests Test Parameters screen 531 view of 537 TESTS key 592 Time Configure screen 52 274 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 324 time markers 457 Time marker Oscilloscope screen 457 time and date 52 Time div Oscilloscope screen 455 timebase decoder 276 external input 589 external output 589 timer low battery 53 Timing Signaling Decoder screen MPT 1327 mode 320 timing response MPT 1327 decoder 321 slot MPT 1327 decoder 320 title 660 for printout 465 552 TOC defined 287 TOC Time Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 378 tone length DTMF encoder 386 tone sequence decoder 298 343 Tone Sequence endcoder 441 tone sequence burst 373 378 384 387 406 440 continuous 373 384 387 406 440 editing 441 entering 441 outputting 440 single 373 378 384 387 406 440 stepped
138. 5 506 508 EXT SCOPE TRIGGER connector description 577 Ext TX key Adjacent Channel Power screen 98 Duplex Test screen 354 RF Analyzer screen 484 TX Test screen 566 extended address word order 217 reverse control channel 173 voice channel assignment 219 external AM input 499 External Disk Specification Tests External Devices screen 549 external FM input 499 external load resistance 63 105 110 495 506 508 external modulation input 499 external monitor 600 F FCC mobile station control word 2 order 217 voice channel assignment 219 FCC mobile station control word 1 216 FF at End Print Configure screen 464 Tests Printer Setup screen 551 FF at Start Print Configure screen 464 Tests Printer Setup screen 551 fields changing settings 43 control channel FOCC 361 interactions 56 priority settings 56 types of 43 voice channel FVC 361 File system initializing media 78 filename procedure to load 533 procedure to save 543 files saving 543 securing 557 selecting 533 filler data FOCC AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 Filter 1 Analog Meas screen 255 Filter 1 and Filter 2 AF Analyzer screen 110 RX Test screen 509 TX Test screen 566 Filter 2 Analog Meas screen 255 filters IF bandwidth 355 485 566 IF for ACP measurements 100 selecting 110 509 566 settings for CDCSS decoder 290 variable notch 112 Firmware Configure screen 265 firmware upgrading 598 Index
139. 50 and STD900 STD450 Equivalents e Austria e Benelux e Bulgaria e Cro Slav Croatia Slovenia e Hungary e Malaysia e Saudi e Saudi 2 e Spain e Thailand e Turkey STD900 Equivalents e France Uses the STD900 protocol at STD450 frequencies Manual Testing of NMT Radios NMT signals contain complex groupings of digital data that vary in format and function depending on a number of system operating needs To be able to test NMT radios using these screens you must be familiar with the theory applications and specifications of the NMT systems The large volume of information required to explain the NMT system is beyond the scope of this manual Documents explaining the structure and specifications for the different NMT standards should be obtained from the radio communications regulatory agency of the appropriate country 329 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the NMT Decoder Encoder Required Test Set Settings The following Test Set settings should be made before using the NMT Encoder Decoder screens These settings assume the Test Set is in its preset state RF Generator Settings AFGenl To Audio Out and Off AFGen2 To FMand 3 5 kHz RF Analyzer Settings Tune Mode Manual Input Atten HoldandO dB Squelch Fixed AF Analyzer Settings AF Anl In FM Demod Filter 1 300Hz HPF Filter 2 15kHz LPF De Emphasis Off Initial NMT Encoder Settings Mode NMT DUT MS for testing Mo
140. 6 bps This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been triggered Enter the expected data signal level in this field typically 1 kHz for LTR data The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the Trigger Level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF An1 In setting kHz when the input is FM Demod The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for valid signals See Also Trig Level on page 314 LTR Display Polarity Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen LTR Decoder e Radio displays the mobile s transmitted trunking data An example display might look like this Area 0 Goto 2 Home 2 ID 128 Free 31 e Repeater lists the 20 possible repeater numbers in an LTR system The data from the monitored repeater is displayed If multiple radios try to access the repeater during decoding the data sent to those radios by that repeater is also displayed The data is displayed as a series of digits next to the number of the repeater that sent it For example a decoded message with a Goto number of 02 may look like this 01 02 0020212806 03 04 04 05 This is interpreted as follows 02 0 02 02 128 06 Repeater Area Goto Home ID Free This setting is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being analyzed Normal Operation When this field is set
141. 69 resolution bandwidth 528 span 528 squelch effects 487 sweep rate 528 traces 526 use of 101 116 355 358 486 490 501 567 569 use with RF generator 519 use with tracking generator 521 Spectrum Analyzer screen Amplitude 519 Amplitude Tracking Gen 521 Auxiliary menu 525 Avg 1 100 527 Center Freq 517 Controls 515 iain Mo 657 Freq marker 524 Input Atten 525 Lvl marker 524 Main menu 517 Marker menu 523 Marker To 523 No Pk Avg 527 Normalize 526 Offset Freq Tracking Gen 522 Output Port RF Gen 520 Pk Hold 527 Port Sweep Tracking Gen 522 Position 523 Ref Level 517 RF Gen Freq 520 RF In Ant 518 Sensitivity 527 Span 518 view of 516 spurs ACP measurement 100 square wave function generator 402 Squelch RF Analyzer screen 487 squelch CDCSS 375 digital decoding 286 effects on decoder 487 effects on HP IB operation 487 effects on oscilloscope 487 effects on remote operation 487 effects on spectrum analyzer 487 fixed level 487 manual control 487 off 487 using attenuator hold 351 498 508 squelch control 594 Standard Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 303 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 326 Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen mode 378 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page CDCSS 658 mode 384 Signaling Encoder mode 387 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 393 Signaling En
142. 7 RX Test screen 507 Signaling Encoder screen TACS mode 363 366 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS AMPS mode 376 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 381 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 385 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 390 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode 401 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 363 366 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 429 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 439 Agilent 8920A Memory Card Part Num bers 74 Agilent 8920B Memory Card Part Num bers 74 Index Alarm Level High Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 430 Alarm Level Low Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 430 ALC disabling 115 internal speaker 115 alert order 151 All Chans Tests Order of Tests screen 538 Aloha Number Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 412 alpha numeric operation digital paging 382 alternate traffic area 436 alternate traffic channel number 437 power 437 AM depth 62 input 499 RF generator 96 350 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 496 497 507 AM Depth Audio Analyzer Screen 107 484 amplifier for distortion measurements 112 for SINAD measurements 112 Amplitude Analog Meas screen 254 Call Control screen 128 Duplex Test screen 351 RF Generator screen 497 RX Test screen 508 Spectrum Analyzer screen 519 amplitude AFGen1 96 350 496 507 AFGen2 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 4
143. 7 input 499 input coupling 354 367 377 382 386 391 401 404 433 440 498 LTR encoder 405 sensitivity input 499 turning off 394 MODULATION INPUT connector coupling 354 367 377 382 386 391 401 404 433 440 498 screen AMPS 646 description 581 for modulating RF generator 499 modulation quality AF frequency 131 FM deviation 131 transmitter frequency error 131 transmitter power 131 monitor external 600 MPT 1327 decoder mode Data Rate 320 Timing 320 view of 317 MPT 1327 encoder mode Address Qualifier 411 Aloha Number 412 Control Channel 413 Delay Parameter 414 FCC Msg and Buffers 415 Msg Structures 421 Radio Unit Under Test 425 Simulated Calling Unit 426 System Identity 425 Test Mode 413 Traffic Chan Msg 420 Traffic Channel 414 undisplayed controls 414 view of 411 MPT 1327 tests manual 318 MS definition 322 MS Id Call Control screen 136 MSN Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 434 MSSG key 592 Mssg Length Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 382 MTX definition 322 mW milliwatt displaying results in 64 ain Mon Index N names printout 465 552 registers 81 NAMPS simulated system 140 NAMPS NTACS control channel decoder 277 forward control channel 361 forward voice channel 361 radio standard 373 reverse control channel 282 reverse voice channel 282 voice channel decoder 277 NAMPS NTACS decoder mode AF Anl In
144. 73 ain Men Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions Serial No This field displays the serial number of the Test Set Time This field sets the time of day for the instrument s 24 hour clock Example 4 53 PM is entered 16 53 Operating Considerations The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off Total RAM This field displays the total amount of RAM available for IBASIC programs and save recall registers 274 Tr Signaling Decoder Screen ain wenu 275 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Field Descriptions for Decoder Modes Field Descriptions for Decoder Modes The Signaling Decoder analyzes different data encoded signaling formats The format is selected in the Mode field in any of the decoder s screens A list of standards for each format is displayed by selecting the Standard field in any screen Separate screen and field descriptions are given for each screen The descriptions are listed in the following order e AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS e CDCSS Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System e Digital Paging e DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Sequence e EDACS Enhanced Digital Access Communications System e Function Generator e LTR Logic Trunked Radio Registered Trademark of EF Johnson Company e MPT 1327 e NMT Nordic Mobile Telephone encoder and decoder e Tone Sequence The Decoder s Signal Source The decoder always gets its signal imme
145. 7721B4C0 666430CB 449DDE30 67230CB2 0980700D oO NO P WwW DY 31 32 FILLER BUFFER CC MESSAGE BUFFER Figure 101 Forward Control Channel in Control Mode and Not Sending 418 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder The IBASIC test program occasionally alters the content of the forward control channel temporarily for example to send an ACKI in response to an RQS The message buffer enables IBASIC to do this without having to reload the filler buffer The control channel message buffer like the filler buffer comprises 32 locations corresponding to the 32 timeslot capacity of the filler buffer These are accessed through GPIB with the following command ENCoder MPT1327 MESSage CONTrol DATA n string Where e nis the location selector and has the range 1 through 32 e stringis a string containing a signaling command The signaling command is assembled as for the filler buffer and written into the selected location If the signaling command has one of the data codeword extensions DCW2 or DCW4 subsequent timeslot loca tions are overwritten with the data codewords The control channel message buffer is activated by the following GPIB command ENCoder SEND If the encoder is configured for single operation the message buffer contents will be sent once If the encoder is configured for burst or continuous
146. 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu DSCC VMAC OE RSVD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the current DSAT Color Code being transmitted by the mobile station This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station power level associated with the designated voice channel The Odd Even data field is used for adjacent channel protection Reserved for future use This field displays the parity of the received data 187 ar wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen Using the CALL DATA Screen To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Mobile Station Registration 1 2 9 10 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done ensure that the Test Set is properly configured See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL DATA screen is not displayed select CALL DATA from the To Screen menu The CALL DATA screen will be displayed Select the Active field The Active annunciator will light when the control channel is turned on Select the Regi
147. 9 314 326 343 calibration 528 disarming measurements 303 frequency markers 524 input port 518 level markers 524 analyzer AF CDCSS decoder settings 290 input 278 286 291 295 301 307 311 323 341 level 279 288 293 297 302 308 312 325 342 analyzer RF frequency 357 489 568 input attenuation 485 input port 486 level 483 measurements 488 sensitivity 487 tuning 357 489 568 ANT IN connector avoiding damage 61 99 116 355 358 486 490 518 567 569 572 connecting to 40 518 description 572 for ACP ratio measurements 95 99 for off the air measurements 99 316 355 486 567 ain wenu Index for RF measurements 99 355 486 567 gain at 262 input attenuation 98 485 525 loss at 262 sensitivity 487 527 Antenna In Configure screen 262 Area Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 430 Area 1 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 Area 2 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 arm measurment 278 281 287 289 291 294 295 298 302 303 308 309 311 314 326 341 343 radio interface interrupt 471 Arm Meas Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS mode 278 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 287 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 291 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 295 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 302 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 308 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 311 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS
148. 98 Current 500 DC Level 500 Distn 500 FM Coupling 498 functional block diagram 495 652 Mic Pre Emp 498 Mod In To 499 Output Port 499 RF Gen Freq 499 SINAD 500 SNR 500 TX Freq Error 501 TX Frequency 501 TX Power 501 view of 495 RF In Ant Spectrum Analyzer screen 518 RF In Out Configure screen 271 RF IN OUT connector connecting to 40 description 586 for ACP level measurements 95 99 for ACP ratio measurements 95 for measuring high power devices 522 for measuring transmitter power 99 116 355 358 486 490 501 567 569 for RF measurements 99 355 486 567 for testing tranceivers 520 for testing transceivers 356 499 509 gain at 271 input attenuation 98 485 525 loss at 271 power measured at 101 116 358 490 501 569 RF input selecting port 99 355 486 567 RF Level Offsert Configure screen 271 RF measurements 61 RF Offset Configure screen 272 RF offset example 87 setting 87 RF output selecting port 356 499 509 520 522 RF power exceeding limits 99 355 486 567 measurement 101 116 358 490 501 569 ain Mon Index zero reference 102 491 570 RF voltage setting 52 RFGen Volts Configure Screen 52 rms dectector 109 353 565 measurement 105 495 506 units 401 497 507 ROM procedure location 534 543 544 ROM program IB_UTIL 557 ROMprogram RAM_MNG 557 Run Tests Printer Setup screen 555 Run Test Signaling Decoder screen NMT mod
149. AF Anl In field is available in the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST and AF ANALYZER screens as well as various DECODER screens Radio Interface Operating Considerations Connector type D Subminiature 37 pin All pins have 4 6 uH chokes in series for RFI suppression Control and data lines have clamp diodes across them for electrostatic discharge protection CAUTION To prevent damage to the diodes the input voltage must not exceed logic voltage 0 6 V or be less than 0 6 V Rise times are affected by capacitive loading This is because the control and data lines have 3 16 kQ pull up resistors Fall times are affected by open collector current sink limitations 19 1 IOOOOOOODOOOODDDO 00000000000000009 9 37 20 Figure 146 Pin Numbers for the Radio Interface Connector 583 an wenu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions The pin numbers for the radio interface connector are listed on the connector and in Figure 146 on page 583 Pin assignments are as follows GND 2 No Connection 3 Audio Out This is an output for the audio sources AF Gen and AF Gen2 It it also connected in parallel to the front panel AUDIO OUT connector Set the AFGen1 To field the AFGen2 To field or both to Audio Out to select this pin and the front panel AUDIO OUT connector as the audio source output These fields are found on the RX TEST and DUPLEX TEST screens as well as on the signalling encoder screen All settings
150. ALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select the Chan field and enter a new valid voice channel number from the choices provided SelecttheCh Loc field NAMPS System Type only and enter anew valid channel location from the choices provided Select the Pwr Lvl field and enter a new valid mobile station power level Select the DSAT field NAMPS System Type only and enter anew valid DSAT from the choices menu Select the SAT field and enter a new valid SAT frequency Select CALL DATA from the To Screen menu The CALL DATA screen will be displayed Select the Handoff field The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with the handoff information If the mobile responds properly it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel switch to the new voice channel assignment and transpond the new SAT frequency assignment When the Test Set detects this has happened the Connect annunciator lights indicating the handoff was successful Selectthe Display Word field A list of reverse channel words which can be displayed will appear ina Choices menu Select the desired word from the list of choices The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel s message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See
151. Agilent Technologies 8920B RF Communications Test Set User s Guide Firmware Version B 06 00 and above ici LEX our _ SANTINO S WN H Se A rm Agilent Part No 08920 90221 Printed in U S A April 2000 Rev E an wenu Notice Edition Print Date Copyright Agilent Technologies 1996 2000 All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies Inc as governed by United States and international copyright laws The material contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies Inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as app
152. Assignment Message FVC O Mes FVC Mobile Station Control Order Message Forward Control Channel Authentication Messages RandChalA Random Challenge A Global Action Message RandCha1B Random Challenge B Global Action Message RAND SSD1 First SSD Update Order Word RAND SSD2 Second SSD Update Order Word RAND SSD3 Third SSD Update Order Word BSChalCon Base Station Challenge Order Confirmation Word UniqChOrd Unique Challenge Order Word Forward Voice Channel Authentication Messages FVC SSD1 First SSD Update Order Word FVC SSD2 Second SSD Update Order Word FVC SSD3 Third SSD Update Order Word FVCBSCon Base Station Challenge Order Confirmation FVCUniqgCh Unique Challenge Order Word 199 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen e NAMPS Forward Voice Channel Messages e EXT PROT Extended Protocol mobile station control message e NCH ASN Extended Protocol Narrow Channel Assignment Message e NMS FVC Narrow Channel mobile station control message e WNHO MES Word 1 Narrow Channel Wide to Narrow Handoff Message e NHO MES Narrow Handoff Message Access When lit the Access annunciator indicates that the Test Set is signaling the mobile station with command information on the forward voice channel This is a transitory state The Test Set s speaker is turned off when in the access state This is done to eliminate any possible audio feedback which may occur if the mobile s
153. Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the second audio frequency sinewave generator It can also be used to set the Function Generator s frequency when the signaling encoder is used This field is also used to control the send stop functions for some encoder modes For example when sending a tone sequence this field is used to send and stop the sequence The field s name changes to AFGen2 when this type of operation is used This field is removed from this screen when NMT encoding or decoding is used NMT programs can only be run from the NMT Decoder screen See Also Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 This Audio Frequency Generator control is used to set two values e The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off The level at the AUDIO OUT connector is always in volts rms across a low impedance output Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Main Menu AFGen2 To Amplitude Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions This Audio Frequency Generator control is use
154. C cables power 602 calibration spectrum analyzer 528 Call Bit screen Access annunciator 200 Active 200 Active annunciator 200 Connect annunciator 200 Data Spec 201 Set Message 203 view of 197 CALL CONFIGURE Sat Tol 260 Call Configure screen CMAX 260 Detector 260 Input Attenuator 260 TX Pwr Zero 260 view of 259 Call Control Screen Ch Loc 129 DSAT 133 DSAT DST 134 Call Control screen Access annunciator 127 Active 127 Active annunciator 128 AF Freq 128 Amplitude 128 Called Number 128 Chan 129 Cntl Channel 130 Connect annunciator 130 Display 131 ESN dec 134 ESN hex 134 FM Deviation 134 Handoff 135 169 201 MS Id 136 Order 137 141 Page 137 Page annunciator 138 Phone Num 138 Pwr Lvl 137 Register 138 Register annunciator 138 Release 138 SAT 139 SCM 139 SID 139 System Type 140 TX Freq Error 140 TX Power 140 view of decoding error message 132 view of measurement display 132 133 Call Data screen Access annunciator 168 Active 168 Active annunciator 168 Connect annunciator 168 Display Word 168 Order 169 202 Page 169 202 Page annunciator 170 202 Register 170 202 Register annunciator 170 202 Release 170 203 view of 166 call origination 150 Call Processing Ch Loc 148 192 call processing AUDIO IN connector 124 connecting mobile station 122 description 117 general procedure 125 operational overview 119 screen description
155. CALL CONFIGURE Screen 259 ain wenu Contents 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions 262 ain wenu 19 Contents 20 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Field Descriptions for Decoder Modes 276 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder 277 Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder 282 Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder 286 Using the CDCSS Decoder 290 Digital Paging Decoder 291 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder 295 Using the DTMF Decoder 300 EDACS Decoder 301 Using the EDACS Decoder 304 Function Generator Decoder 307 Using the Function Generator Decoder 310 LIR Decoder 311 Using the LTR Decoder 315 MPT 1327 Decoder 317 NMT Decoder 322 Using the NMT Decoder Encoder 327 Creating NMT Tests 332 Tone Sequence Decoder 341 ain Mon Contents 9 Duplex Test Screen Block Diagram 346 Field Descriptions 347 ain wenu 21 Contents 22 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Field Descriptions for Encoder Modes 360 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder 361 Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder 374 CDCSS Encoder 375 Using the CDCSS Encoder 379 Digital Paging Encoder 380 DTMF Sequence Encoder 385 EDACS Encoder 389 Using the EDACS Encoder 395 Function Generator Encoder 400 LIR Encoder 403 Using the LTR Encoder 407 MPT 1327 Encoder 411 Using the MPT 1327 Encoder 424 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder 427 Tone Sequence Encoder 439 ain wenu Contents 11 Help S
156. Call Processing with Authentication e Page a Mobile Station with Authentication e Originate a Call with Authentication e Perform an SSD Update e Perform a Unique Challenge 152 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS caliscrn fi Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Condition the Test Set for Call Processing Perform the following steps when first entering the Call Processing Subsystem that is the first time the CALL CONTROL screen is selected during a measurement session 1 Zero the RF Power Meter me ae Select the RF Gen fromthe To Screen menu Set the Amplitude field to off use the ON OFF key This prevents cross cou pling into the power detector while zeroing the power meter Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu Select CALL CNFG from the To Screen menu Disconnect any cables from the RF IN OUT port on the front panel of the Test Set Select the TX Pwr Zero field There are two reasons for zeroing the RF power meter When any Call Processing Subsystem screen is displayed except the ANALOG MEAS screen and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connected state Connect annunciator is lit the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will termin
157. Channel 1 2 ad pi 10 11 12 Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Date Ensure that the Test Set has Initialized Call Processing with Authentication See Initialize Call Processing with Authentication on page 155 for information on how to register the mobile station and activate Authentication Select AUTHEN on the To Screen meun The AUTHENTICATION screen will be displayed Select RANDSSD_1 field Enter a new valid RANDSSD_1 value 6 digit hexadecimal Select RANDSSD_2 field Enter a new valid RANDSSD_2 value 6 digit hexadecimal Select RANDSSD_3 field Enter a new valid RANDSSD_3 value 2 digit hexadecimal Select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select SSD Upd on the CC Order field The Access annunciator light will light while the SSD Update order is in progress If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel SSD Update Order Successful will be displayed in the upper
158. Descriptions Key Out 1 GND Key Out 2 Ground Tab N C No Connect mic con wmf Figure 145 MIC ACC Connections See Also Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Chapter 7 Configure Screen Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen 580 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIconnkeysfh Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions MODULATION INPUT Parallel Port This connector provides an external modulation connection to the RF Generator Operating Considerations Input impedance 6000 Maximum input level 12 V peak Full scale input 1 V peak TheMod In To field of the RFGENERATOR screen sets the type of modulation AM or FM and sensitivity AM Vpk or kHz Vpk for this connection This signal is summed with the microphone MIC IN signal from the MIC ACC connector The FM Coupling field in the RF GENERATOR DUPLEX TEST and various encoder modes selects ac or dc coupling of this signal for FM operation This port is used with printers requiring a parallel interface when printing screen images or test results Set the Printer Port field on the PRINT CONFIGURE screen or TESTS Printer Setup screen to Parallel to print to this port Use address 15 when sending data to this port from IBASIC programs Pin numbers are embossed on the connector Pin assignments are as follows 581 iain Mo Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions
159. EN Output Results Tot AContinye Output Results For All Failures Qutrut Heading Help Main Menu PRINT SETUP PAGE CONTROL Model Lines Poge ThinkJet 60 Printer Port FF at Starti ENCODER Yes Ho DECODER RADIO INT More tstprint wmf Figure 140 The TESTS Printer Setup Screen The TESTS Printer Setup screen determines how tests are run Continue This field is used to restart a paused test FF at End This field can only be controlled programmatically It is used to specify if you want a form feed at the end of printing The underlined entry is the active choice FF at Start This field can only be controlled programmatically It is used to specify if you want a form feed at the start of printing The underlined entry is the active choice 551 an wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Printer Setup Lines Page Main Menu Model Output Heading Output Results To Output Results For 552 This field is used to specify how many lines are printed per page Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen This field is used to specify the type of printer used If your printer is not listed in the Choices menu when you select this field configure your printer to emulate one of those that is listed This field allows you to enter a heading for the test results printout or CRT display This field selects where test results are output The underlin
160. EX TEST and RF ANALYZER screens is no longer displayed As a result the TX Freq Error measurement is displayed since the TX Frequency measurement is only displayed when the Tune Mode field is set to Auto See Also RF Chan Std on page 269 This field specifies whether you want RF voltages expressed as the voltage across a 50 ohm load or the open circuit voltage emf Operating Considerations This setting affects the RF Generator s and the Tracking Generator s amplitudes RF In Out RF Level Offset Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the RF IN OUT port and the device under test e Enter a positive value to indicate a gain such as an amplifier gain When the RF IN OUT port is used as an output the RF Generator s or Tracking Generator s lev el is automatically set the specified amount below what is indicated in the RF Genera tor s Amplitude field Example if this value is 10 dB and the Amplitude field shows 0 dBm the actual level out of this port is 10 dBm When this port is used as an input the TX Power measurement and Spectrum Ana lyzer s Marker Level Lv1 are automatically reduced by that amount e Enter a negative value to indicate a loss such as cable loss The RF Generator s or Tracking Generator s level out this port is automatically set that amount above what is indicated in the RF Generator s Amplitude field
161. Encoder Screen 427 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Access Channel Number This field defines the channel number for the signal that initiates a call from the MS to the MTX Valid Entry Range 1 through 2023 NMT Frames Affected 3d 3dTA2 4b 4bTA2 10aAC Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard This setting affects the RF generator and analyzer frequencies used when the TCHAN AC and RCHAN AC commands are used See Also Calling Channel Number on page 432 Access Channel Power Add Info 428 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This channel s power setting Each power setting represents one of the four available levels allowed by the NMT standards Valid Entry Range 0 through 3 NMT Frames Affected 3d 3dTA2 4b 4bTA2 10aAC Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard The additional information field contains various types of information depending on the frame type Several frame types contain additional information digits in the form Hl to H10 as outlined in the NMT system standards The following table shows the relationship between the Add Info and Bate Save fields and how they are used in frame data The H1 to H10 designations correspond to the frame digit assignments shown in the NMT DOC 900 1 Jan 1985 standards Chapter 10 Sign
162. F then D F then E Traffic G I then A G then C G then D G then E 1200Hz J Jthen A Jthen B N O 1800Hz K K then A K then B M O Dotting L L then A L then B M N A Start the control channel with a 6 bit LET PREAMBLE and SYNC For the first ad ex aaa FAST ozz dress codeword before the repeating SYS CCS PREAMBLE PARITY CODE WORD PARITY structure the codeword comes from the second half of the filler or message buffer timeslot 1 Start the traffic channel with a LET PREAMBLE and SYNT Again the first codeword is taken from the timeslot 1 entry Turn on 1200 Hz sine wave starting at 0 phase Turn on 1800 Hz sine wave starting at 0 phase Turn on dotting with a 1 symbol The starting phase may be 0 or 180 Continue to generate the control channel until the end of the filler buffer and message buffer if messages are present then produce a hang over bit and stop The hang over bit repeats the last bit of the transmission Continue to generate the traffic channel until the message is completed then produce a hang over bit and stop The hang over bit is followed by one off bit before the next sequence begins Stop control channel generation after the next bit Stop traffic channel generation after the next bit Turn off 1200 Hz sine wave on completion of the next symbol Turn off 1800 Hz sine wave on completion of the next symbol Turn off dotting on compl
163. FIGURE screen 2 The current time setting is shown under the Low Battery field 3 Select that field to display a list of setting choices e Select the desired time or e Select Disable to eliminate the low battery warning The low battery warning system is used to alert you when you have not used any front panel controls within a specified amount of time This setting is only used with DC power It does not actually monitor the DC supply voltage Since batteries are most often used for a DC supply this function helps you conserve power by reminding you that the Test Set is still turned on When the specified time has elapsed between front panel entries the Beeper sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen alerting you to the condition This setting is saved when the instrument is turned off 53 ain Men Chapter 2 Configuring Your Test Set General Operating Information 54 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS configts Operating Overview The information in this section discusses some frequently used operating features of the Test Set From reading Chapter 1 Get Started you should understand e What fields and screens are e How to use the Cursor Control knob to select different fields and screens 55 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Interaction Between Screens Interaction Between Screens Most fields operate globally changing the setting in any screen automati
164. FIGURE screen description This program is accessed by running the IB_UTIL program This program is accessed by directly selecting it from the Choices menu 1 Select the TESTS Main Menu screen 2 Select the Select Procedure Location field and choose ROM 3 Select the Select Procedure Filename field e Select RAM_MNG from the list of programs Press Run Test to run the procedure follow directions to clear RAM e Select IB_UTIL from the list of programs Press Run Test to display a list of pro cedures select RAM MANAGER and follow directions to clear RAM To preserve the SAVE RECALL registers don t use the RAM_MNG program Instead load a different test program to clear the previous test from RAM and then reload the desired test 557 an wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen ROM Programs 558 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestscrn fh in Menu 23 TX Test Screen ain wenu 559 Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Block Diagram Block Diagram Input Port IF Filter RE In Ant 230 kHz ANTIN RF STAGES RF IN High Power Attenuator Tune Mode Auto Manual Tune Freq 150 000000 MHz AF Anl In Auto Manual TX Power Measurement Reference TX Pwr Zero Zero FM Demod Filter 1 Filter 2 nn 50Hz HPF 50Hz LPF From AUDIO IN Q Audio IN From Radio Interface Radio Int AR Rear Panel Mod IN Q Ext M
165. Figure 126 Spectrum Analyzer Main functions Center Freq This field sets the tune frequency for the center of the screen Operating Considerations This field also changes the frequency of the Tracking Generator s and the RF Analyzer s center frequency Ref Level Reference level sets the amplitude reference level for the top line of the display All signals displayed are referenced to this line Operating Considerations The unit of measure for the reference can be changed as needed For instance 0 dBm 0 224 V 107 0 dB mV and 0 00100 W can all be used to represent the same level 517 ain wenu Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions RF In Ant CAUTION Span 518 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS specscr This field selects the input port for the analyzer Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it Using the ANT IN port with the field set to High can result in uncalibrated operation a message appears on the screen when this happens Th
166. Firmware revision number Configure screen 265 First Frame Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 322 first word of called address 176 floating input at AUDIO IN LO 107 FM accuracy degradation 135 deviation 62 deviation measurement 110 354 484 566 deviation modulation quality 131 input 499 RF generator 96 350 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 496 497 507 FM Coupling Duplex Test screen 354 RF Generator screen 498 Signaling Encoder screen TACS mode 367 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS AMPS mode 377 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 382 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 386 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 391 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode 401 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 367 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 433 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 FM Deviation AF Analyzer screen 110 Analog Meas screen 255 Call Control screen 134 Duplex Test screen 354 RF Analyzer screen 484 TX Test screen 566 Main Menu 637 FOCC AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 data rate 365 filler data AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 menu 364 outputting 372 FOCC message data format AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 form feed 464 forward control channel 374 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 filler data format AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 message data format AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 361 modifying message
167. Freq Marker frequency displays the frequency at the marker s present position Marker Lvl Marker level displays the amplitude at the marker s present position Operating Considerations The marker s level can be displayed in various units of measure See Also To Change the Measurement s Unit of Measure on page 64 524 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS specscr Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Menu Fields Figure 131 Input Atten Auto Hold sascrn6 wmf Spectrum Analyzer Auxiliary Functions Input attenuation sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN OUT and ANT IN ports This field performs two functions e The upper field determines if the instrument sets the attenuation Auto or if you want to set the value Hold e The lower field displays the present attenuation value and is used to set the desired at tenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Setting the upper field to Hold prevents the RF autoranging process from interrupting Spectrum Analyzer operation when a signal is first measured This can be helpful when you need to see the signal the instant the source is input but requires you to set the needed amount of input attenuation 525 Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Normalize
168. I Addison Wesley Publishing Company ISBN 0 201 56350 9 Agilent P N 5010 7166 or contact Fred Bode Executive Director SCPI Consortium 8380 Hercules Drive Suite P3 La Mesa CA 91942 Phone 619 697 8790 FAX 619 697 5955 CompuServe Number 765 16 254 Negative numbered error messages take the form ERROR XX lt error message gt For example Error 128 Numeric data not allowed or Error 141 Invalid character data S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm ain wenu Chapter IBASIC Error Messages IBASIC Error Messages are associated with IBASIC operation IBASIC error messages can have both positive and negative numbers Refer to the Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for information on positive numbered error messages Refer to the GPIB Error Messages section of the Programmer s Guide for information on negative numbered error messages the error message associated with a negative number is the same for GPIB errors and IBASIC errors IBASIC error messages take the form IBASIC Error XX For example e IBASIC Error 286 Program runtime error 615 ar wenu Chapter GPIB Error Messages GPIB Error Messages are associated with GPIB operation Refer to the Programmers Guide for information on GPIB error messages GPIB error messages take the form HP IB Error XX orHP IB Error For example HP IB Error 410 Query INTERRUPTED or HP IB Error Input value out of range 1
169. IB command is received Many of the messages are displayed on the MESSAGE screen until the instrument is turned off Messages that are about error conditions may tell you what to do to correct the error turn something off reduce a field s value press a certain key and so forth Messages and prompts are sometimes accompanied by a beep or warble Warbles and Beeps A warble sound indicates that an instrument damaging event is occurring Beeps often occur only with the first occurrence of the message Prompts are generally silent S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm ain wenu Chapter Non Recoverable Firmware Error The non recoverable firmware error is very important It appears when an unanticipated event occurs that the Test Set s firmware cannot handle The message appears in the center of the Test Set s display and except for the two lines in the second paragraph has the form Non recoverable firmware error Please record the 2 lines of text below and contact Agilent Technologies through your local service center or by calling 800 827 3848 USA collect and asking to speak to the Service Engineer Address error exception at line number 0 To continue operation turn POWER off and back on Follow the instructions in the message Unfortunately you will not be able to recover from this condition You must switch the Test Set off and back on When you rerun the test
170. IN connectors This function controls two settings e The upper field determines if you want the instrument to set the attenuation automati cally Auto or if you want to set the value manually Hold e The lower field displays the present attenuation value and is used to set the desired at tenuation level when the upper area is set to Hold Operating Considerations Input Attenuator autoranging can interfere with oscilloscope or signaling decoder operation under certain conditions See Input Atten on page 485 for additional information S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS aepscrn fh Main Menu Input Port CAUTION Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions This field selects the RF IN OUT or ANT IN port for making RF measurements The RF IN OUT port must be used for making TX Power or ACP Level measurements on this screen Operating Considerations Power levels for each port are printed on the Test Set s front panel If the RF power at the RF IN OUT port exceeds allowable limits a loud warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen If this occurs disconnect the RF power press the MEAS RESET key and allow the Test Set to cool off for approximately two minutes before making any other measurements on this port The ANT IN antenna input connector provides a highly sensitive input for very low level signals such as off the air measurements You cannot measur
171. If the mobile station transmitted properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen and then the mobile station s phone number ESN decoded SCM and called phone number will be displayed The Test Set will then reconfigure itself to the voice channel assignments set up in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set signals the mobile station on the assigned voice channel The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set on the reverse voice channel The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel The Voice Channel Assignment fields will be replace with appropriate information If origination with authentication was successful then Origination w Auth successful will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen If origination with authentication failed then Origination w Auth failed will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CAll CONTROL Screen Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Perform an SSD Update There are two methods that can be used to perform an SSD Update SSD Update on the Control Channel SSD Update on the Voice Channel Performing an SSD Update on the Control
172. Interrurt i Disabled 170 Contis Send Data Interrupt hex Ee AML Disabled EHCHDER DECODER RADIO INT riscrn wmf Figure 116 The Radio Interface Screen Input Data This field trips the Test Set to latch the data on the parallel data pins that have been designated as inputs 470 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fb Main Menu Interrupt 1 Interrupt 2 Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Field Descriptions This field arms or disarms the Interrupt 1 pin When it is armed and the pin is pulled low by an external device Tripped is displayed below the field until the interrupt is re armed Operating Considerations The field can be queried directly in an IBASIC or GPIB program or it can be monitored with the GPIB status reporting system This is done by reading bit 5 of the status byte and then reading bit 13 of the Hardware 1 status register The Interrupt 1 pin can also be set as the GPIB SRQ mask Once the interrupt has been tripped it must be re armed To do this remove the low on the Interrupt 1 pin and then set the Interrupt 1 field to Disable and then set it to Arm Interrupts can be disabled and any external signals will have no effect on the interrupt Both Interrupt 1 and Interrupt 2 are independent and they can be used simultaneously See also Programmer Guide Same as Interrupt 1 but it applies to the Interrupt 2 pin on the RADIO INTERFACE connector and bit 14 of
173. LL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the lower MS Id field Enter the mobile station identification number either the phone number or the MIN number depending upon what the upper MS Td field is set to Select the Page field The Page annunciator will light while the Test Set pages the mobile on the forward control channel If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set sends the mobile station an alert order on the assigned voice channel The mobile station should ring Press the SEND key on the mobile station The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set when the SEND key is pressed The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel The Voice Channel Assignment fields will be updated that is any in the left hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information 147 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Handoff a Mobile Station to a New Voice Channel 1 2 Ensure that the Test Set is in the connect state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how t
174. Language Option Agilent 8920B Agilent 8920 User s Guide English 08920 90221 Instrument BASIC Language English E2083 90005 Reference Programmer s Guide English 08920 90222 Assembly Level Repair Manual English 08920 90168 Applications Handbook English 08920 90212 User s Guide Japanese ABJ 08920 90191 Programmer s Guide Japanese ABJ 08920 90192 a Not included in manual set 600 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm in Menu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Radio Test Software The Radio Test Software performs automated tests on radios used in various radio communication systems Each test package is contained on an individual memory card The Agilent 11807E Radio Test Software performs automated tests on radios used in various radio communication systems The Agilent 11807E software is used with the Agilent 8920B Table 20 Agilent 11807E Software for the Agilent 8920B Option 001 North American FM Tests Option 002 European PM Tests Option 003 AM Tests Option 004 AMPS EAMPS NAMPS Cellular Tests Option 005 TACS ETACS Cellular Tests Option 007 JTACS NTACS Cellular Tests Option 008 TDMA Dual Mode Cellular Tests Option 009 AMPS EAMPS NAMPS TDMA Dual Mode Option 010 LTR Trunked Radio Tests Includes conventional FM test capability Option 011 EDACS Trunked Radio Tests Option 014 AMPS NAMP
175. MODULATION INPUT MIC ACC and AUDIO OUT connectors e The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator Operating Considerations Changing this field alters the upper AF measurement to the appropriate measurement type This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 562 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItxtsern fh Main Menu Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions AF Freq This is the default measurement for this measurement field Selecting this field displays the following measurement choices SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation e Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement e The RF Generator and AFGen must be set up to provide the radio s carrier AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement e AFGen2 must be turned off e The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port set the AF Anl Infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on p
176. Mod AM Mod Audio Out Detector Pk Max RMS RMS SQRT2 Pk Pk Pk 2 Pk Max Pk Hold Pk Hold Pk 2 Hd Pk Mx hd RF Gen Freq 100 000000 IF Filter 230 kHz RF RFK IF F STAGES RI STAGES Filter 1 Filter 2 50Hz HPF 15kHz LPF Measurements Display Area AF Anl IN FM Demod Tune Mode Auto Manual TX Freq Error FM Deviation TX Frequency AM Depth AC Level TX Power SINAD SNR Distn AF Freq DC Level Current Voltmeter AF Freq Amplitude 60 0 Duplex Out Output Port Atten Hold RF Out Dupl On Off DUPLEX TEST Functional Block Diagram Field Descriptions Figure 83 AC Level Th Freayency MHz 150 081717 TH Power 0 00001 Tune Mode ji uto Manual ne Frea MHz Input ag IF Filter Ext TR Key 3 RF Pal Frea MHz Anplitude otf Atten Hold Qutput Port RE Gut Dup The Duplex Test Screen DUPLEX TEST FH AFGenl Frea kHz AFGent To Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions Deviation kHz 132 6 7 34438 AF Anl In AFM Demod Filter 1 Filter 2 De Enkhasis fod us Off Detector dxscrn wmf This is the default measurement for this field The type of measurement shown is dependent on the AF Anl In settings See Also AF Anl In on page 348 Displaying Measurements on page 60 347 Main Menu Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions AF A
177. Mod In To Output Port CAUTION RF Gen Freq Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions This modulation input field defines how an external modulation source is used with the RF Generator Two fields are used e The upper field determines whether the rear panel MODULATION INPUT signal is set for AM or FM modulation of the RF GENERATOR The lower field sets the modulation sensitivity For instance if FM Vpk is selected for the upper field and you set the lower field to 1 0000 kHz the RF Generator will deviate 1 kHz for every 1 Volt peak at the MODULATION INPUT connector In addition the peak deviation produced by MIC signals will be approximately 1 kHz Output port selects the desired RF Generator output port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument A message is displayed when an overpower conditions occurs Whenever possible when testing transceivers use the RF IN OUT connector to prevent damage from accidental transmitter keying If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit remove the reverse power signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it This field sets the RF generator s frequency 499 ain Men Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions SINAD This is the default measurement for
178. NFIGURE Screen NOTE The number of fields displayed on the CALL CONFIGURE screen depends on the selected system type This screen is used to set some of the less commonly used Test Set configuration parameters When the CALL CONFIGURE screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connect state the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state 259 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL CONFIGURE Screen NOTE CMAX Detector Input Att Sat Tol TX Pwr Zero CAUTION 260 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f In order to ensure that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the Call Processing Subsystem Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually The CMAX field sets the number of access channels in the system This will determine how many channels must be scanned by the mobile station when trying to access the Test Set The value of this field will affect the time requ
179. NFIGURE screen to obtain information necessary to build the messages Whenever a signaling message is used update the contents of all fields in that message on the CALL BIT screen e Bits Use the bit patterns as set on the CALL BIT screen to build all forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages For any call processing function that is setting the message stream on the active control channel registering the mobile station paging the mobile station handing off the mobile station or releasing the mobile station the user is responsible for setting the contents of all signaling messages used in that function The Call Processing Subsystem uses the messaging protocol as defined in the applicable industry standard The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while in the Bits mode There is no coupling between the Bits mode and the Test Set For example if a mobile sta tion was actively connected to the Test Set on a voice channel and the user changed the CHAN field on the forward voice channel mobile station control message FVC V Mes and sent that message to the mobile station the mobile station would change its voice channel assignment However the Test Set will stay on the voice channel assignment specified in the Chan field on the CALL CONTROL screen This situation will result in a dropped call The Bits mode should not be
180. ODER screen and select the LTR mode Set up Message 1 with idle message data a Enter your Area Number 0 or 1 in the Area 1 field b Enter the home channel number in these fields Goto 1 Home 1 and Free 1 c Enter 255 inthe ID 1 field to establish an idle channel Set up Message 2 with transmit message data a Enter your Area Number 0 or 1 in the Area 2 field b Enter the home channel number in these fields Goto 2 Home 2 and Free 2 c Enter the Transmit ID number for your radio in the ID 2 field Set the Send Mode field to Cont Set the AFGen2 To field to FM 1 kHz 15 16 17 18 19 SettheFM Coupling field to DC Set the LTR message field to Messagel Select Send to continuously output idle message Key the transmitter Select Message2 inthe LTR message field to tell your radio to transmit If the transmitter fails to establish a transmit channel before time out occurs try again using these steps a De key the transmitter b Select Message 1 c Key the transmitter d Select Message 2 409 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the LTR Encoder Once a transmit channel is established turn the Test Set s VOLUME up and speak into your radio s microphone You should hear your voice out of the Test Set s speaker Access the DUPLEX TEST screen to display the transmitter s power and frequency error Performing Channel Changes Testing the mobile s ability t
181. OK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder Figure 75 AF Anl In Arm Meas The DTMF Sequence Decoder analyzes Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone sequences and displays the associated parameters SIGHALING DECODER Lo Tone Hi Tone On Syn Frea Frea Time Tine Hz Hz Arti Meas gt ERIE Gate Time 1 0000 in AF Anl In Input Level The DTMF Decoder Screen Sd Status Idle Mode Standard To Screen dtmf de2 wmf Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in this screen Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal when making single measurements an Mo 295 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Decoder Gate Time This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been triggered Hi Tone This for the high frequency tone in each tone pair The measurement type is selected by selecting the Freq field to display a list of measurement choices Operating Considerations Frequency error is calculated by comparing the DTMF Encoder s frequency settings for each tone pair
182. ONS This instrument is intended for indoor use in an installation category II pollution degree 2 environment It is designed to operate at amaximum relative humidity of 95 and at altitudes of up to 2000 meters Refer to the specifications tables for the ac mains voltage requirements and ambient operating temperature range Ventilation Requirements When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage the correct fuse is installed and all safety precautions are taken Note the instrument s external markings described under Safety Symbols ain Men WARNING CAUTION GROUND THE INSTRUMENT To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cover must be connected to an electrical protective earth ground The instrument must be connected to the ac power mains through a grounded power cable with the ground wire firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth terminal will cause a potential s
183. Page Print Configure screen 465 Tests Printer Setup screen 552 LO indicator 70 LO LIMIT key 591 Lo Tone Signaling Decoder mode 298 load external resistance 63 105 110 495 506 508 Load Test Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 325 LOCAL key 592 logic trunked radio decoder 311 DTMF screen encoder 403 Logical ID Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 392 loss between ANT IN and device under test 262 between DUPLEX OUT and device under test 265 between RF IN OUT and device un der test 271 Low Battery Configure screen 53 low battery setting 53 low limit removing 71 setting 70 Lower Limit Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 541 low level RF power measurements 101 116 355 358 486 490 501 567 569 LTR radio standard 406 LTR decoder mode AF Anl In 311 Arm Meas 311 Data 311 Data Rate 312 Gate Time 312 Input Level 312 Polarity 313 Single Cont 314 Stop Meas 314 Trig Level 314 view of 311 LTR encoder mode AFGen2 To 404 Area 1 404 Area 2 404 Audio Out 404 Bursts 404 Data Rate 404 FM Coupling 404 Free 1 405 Free 2 405 Goto 1 405 Goto 2 405 Index Home 1 405 Home 2 405 ID 1 405 ID 2 405 LTR message 405 Polarity 405 Send 405 Send Mode 406 Standard 406 Stop 406 view of 403 LTR message Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 LTR tests setup 315 Lvl marker Oscilloscope screen 457 Spectrum Analyzer 524 LVL_MTR 556 ain we
184. Port FF at Start E Yes No FF at End Print Title 5 prntconf wmf Figure 115 The Printer Configurations Screen Abort Print Select this field to interrupt the print in progress FF at End This field can only be controlled programmatically It is used to specify if you want a form feed at the end of printing FF at Start This field can only be controlled programmatically It is used to specify if you want a form feed at the start of printing 464 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS prinscrn fb Main Menu Lines Page Model Printer Address Chapter 15 Print Configure Screen Field Descriptions This field is used to specify how many lines are printed per page This field is used to specify the type of printer used If your printer is not listed in the Choices menu when you select this field configure your printer to emulate one of those that is listed This field is used to specify the address of an GPIB printer This field is only displayed if the Printer Port field is set to HPIB Print Data Destination Printer Port Print Title This field will be used in the future to select whether the data is formatted specifically for printers or for some other device such as a computer At this time the only selection is Printer This field is used to select the port your printer is connected to This field is used to enter up to 50 characters to be displayed at the top of the
185. S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f The CALL BIT screen should not be used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing Subsystem screen The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while using the CALL BIT screen There is no coupling between the CALL BIT screen and the Test Set For example changing the value of the SAT color code field SCC in the forward control channel mobile station control message MS IntVCh does not change the setting of the SAT field on the CALL CONTROL screen When using the CALL BIT screen the user is responsible for setting the contents of all messages used in a messaging protocol When using the CALL BIT screen the Call Processing Subsystem sends the correct messages at the correct times as defined in the applicable industry standard Message content is the responsibility of the user When the CALL BIT screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connected state the Test Set constantly monitors the station s transmitted carrier power If the Power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state In order to ensure that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the
186. S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Set Message FYC O Mes FYC monies Station Control Order Messase ORDO Orde 000 FVC O Mes Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SAT color code for new channel Present SAT color code Indicates the SAT color code associated with the present channel Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated Local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted ORDQ ORDER Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Order qualifier field Qualifies the order to a specific action Order field Identifies the order type Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 221 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC V Mes Message Fields Set ERT FYC Hanis Station Control Yoice Messase Figure 47 FVC V Mes Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel PSCC Present SAT color code Indicates the SAT color code associated with the present channel RSVD Reserved for future use
187. S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu The DSAT DST field is displayed only when the System Type field is set to NAMPS and Display field is set to NMeas The DSAT DST field displays the received DSAT DST sequence from the mobile station on the reverse voice channel The received sequence is displayed in hexadecimal form and can be checked against the DSAT value displayed in the DSAT right hand DSAT field Four dashes indicate no carrier is present to measure A hexadecimal value would only be displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state This field displays the electronic serial number ESN in decimal form received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The ESN dec field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded This field displays the electronic serial number ESN in hexadecimal form received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The ESN hex field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded This field displays the measured FM deviation of the RF carrier being transmitted by the mobile station on the reverse voice channel Four dashes
188. S DAMPS DCCH mobile test Option 100 System Support Tests frequency scanning cable fault location field strength intermodulation products programs a Requires an Agilent 83201A Dual Mode Cellular Adapter ain Men 601 Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Power Cables Plug Descriptions Agilent Part BE male female cable amp plug Cable Deserptions Straight Straight 8120 1689 79 inches mint gray 79 inches Straight 90 8120 1692 mint gray u plug3 wm Used in the following locations Afghanistan Albania Algeria Angola Armenia Austria Azerbaijan Azores Bangladesh Belgium Benin Bolivia Boznia Herzegovina Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burma Burundi Byelarus Cameroon Canary Islands Central African Republic Chad Chile Comoros Congo Croatia Czech Republic Czechoslovakia Denmark Djibouti East Germany Egypt Estonia Ethiopia Finland France French Guiana French Indian Ocean Areas Gabon Gaza Strip Georgia Germany Gozo Greece Hungary Iceland Indonesia Iran Iraq Israel Italy Ivory Coast Jordan Kazakhstan Korea Kyrgystan Latvia Lebanon Libya Lithuania Luxembourg Macedonia Madeira Islands Malagasy Republic Mali Malta Mauritania Miquelon Moldova Mongolia Morocco Mozambique Nepal Netherlands Netherlands Antilles Niger Norway Oman Pakistan P
189. S Decoder Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder Interaction With the Encoder The encoder screen s Data Rate field tells the decoder how fast the incoming message is being sent Set that field s value before using the AMPS TACS or NAMPS NTACS Decoder The measurement begins here and ends after the Gate Time has elapsed 30 Bits 11 Bits 7 Bits 240 Bits 240 Bits 240 Bits FIRSTWORD SECOND WORD THIRD WORD CODED DOTTING Re pect REPEATED REPEATED REPEATED 5 TIMES 5 TIMES 5 TIMES amps de2 wmf Seizure Precursor Digital Color Code Figure 70 Decoding the Reverse Control Channel RECC Data 282 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder The measurement begins here and ends after the Gate Time has elapsed 101 Bits 11 Bits 48 Bits 37 Bits 11 Bits 48 Bits worp REPEAT 1 WORD REPEAT 2 DOTTING ave OF DOTTING SYNC OF WORD 1 WORD 1 37 Bits 11 Bits 48 Bits 37 Bits 11 Bits 48 Bits 87 Bits 11 Bits REPEAT 3 REPEAT 4 WORD DOTTING WORD OF DOTTING WORD OF DOTTING SYNC SYNC WORD 1 SYNC WORD 1 48 Bits 37 Bits 11 Bits 48 Bits 48 Bits REPEAT 5 REPEAT 1 REPEAT 5 OF DOTTING WORD OF OF WORD 1 SYNC WORD 2 WORD 2 amps de3 wmf Figure 71 Decoding AMPS TACS Reverse Voice Channel RVC Data
190. S decoder 287 color code SAT 139 CONFIG key 592 configuration call control 259 call processing 144 154 ain wenu Index radio interface inputs 472 serial port 89 test set 51 Configure screen Gen Anl 266 Antenna In 262 Base Freq 263 Beeper 53 264 Carrier 273 Chan Space 264 Date 52 265 Duplex Out 265 Intensity 52 266 LAST CALIB 267 Low Battery 53 Notch Coupl 267 PTT 273 Range Hold 268 RF Chan Std 269 RF Display 270 RF Gen Volts 270 RF In Out 271 RF Level Offset 271 RF Offset 272 RFGen Volts 52 RX TX Cntl 273 Serial No 274 Time 52 274 Total RAM 274 User Def Base Freq 263 view of 262 connect DUT to test set 40 mobile station to test set for call pro cessing 122 radio to test set 40 Connect annunciator Call Bit screen 200 Call Control screen 130 Call Data screen 168 connectors 10 MHz REF INPUT 589 10 MHz REF OUTPUT 589 114 3 MHz IF OUT 576 ANT IN 572 AUDIO IN 573 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT 574 AUDIO OUT 574 cellular adapters 576 Control I O 576 CRT VIDEO OUTPUT 575 CW RF OUT 576 DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT 575 DC INPUT 576 DET OUT 576 digital testing 576 DUPLEX OUT 577 EXT SCOPE TRIGGER 577 HP IB 578 IQ RF IN 576 MIC ACC 578 MODULATION INPUT 581 ParallelPort 581 parts kit 576 RADIO INTERFACE 583 RF IN OUT 586 SERIAL PORT 587 Cont Single Oscilloscope screen 459 Continue Tests Execution Conditions screen 546 Tests IBASIC C
191. SCC to be used on the designated voice channel Chan on page 129 for more information about the voice channel This field displays the decoded station class mark information received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The SCM field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message has been decoded This field is used to set the system identification number SID of the Test Set The SID field is an immediate action field If the field is selected and changed the signaling message s being sent on the forward control channel are immediately changed No change occurs to the current state that is active register page access connect of the Call Processing Subsystem 139 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen System Type NOTE NOTE TX Freq Error TX Power 140 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f This field is used to select the type of cellular system AMPS NAMPS TACS JTACS DAMPS DCCH which will be simulated The System Type field is an immediate action field That is whenever the System Type field is changed the change is reflected immediately in the physical configuration of the Test Set The control channel is immediately de activated reconfigured and then re activated to reflect the change This change causes the Test Set to en
192. SIGNALING DECODER Status Hum of Bits Channel Idle Entl Yoice Meas 2 REE Node Data hex AMPS TACS Stor Meas Standard Gate Time AMPS 127 0 ns AF Anl In Input Level y Trigger Pattern bind Tria Level 383 mW Polarity amps de1 tif Figure 68 AMPS TACS Control Voice and NAMPS NTACS Control Channel Decoder 277 ain Mo Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder Figure 69 AF AnlIn Arm Meas Channel 278 SIGNALING DECODER Measure Channel Statusi Crntlyo i ce Idle 5 Mode DSAT OST hex HAMP NTAC Atom Mens Standard HANPS AF Anl In Screen F G Input Level Y Tris Level 383 nY Polarity nmps de1 wmf The NAMPS NTACS Voice Channel Decoder Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in this screen Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal This field selects the type of data to decode Reverse Control Channel Cnt1 or Reverse Voice Channel Voice S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Data hex AMPS TACS Gate Time Input Level Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder This display field lists the decoded data serially as it is received
193. SSD Update Order RANDSSD_2 is entered as a 6 digit hexadecimal value RANDSSD_2 is user definable RANDSSD_3 is the 8 least significant bits of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order RANDSSD_3 is entered as a 3 digit hexadecimal value RAND_U is the 24 bit random number issued by the base station in the Unique Challenge Order RAND_U is entered as a 6 digit hexadecimal value RAND__U is user definable The 1 of N field instructs the Test Set how many times to send a system parameter overhead message The message contains RAND values RAND_A and RAND_B The RAND values are difficult for phones which do not support authentication to parse This field allows for testing of these phones along with the testing of phones which support authentication by altering the number of times the system parameter message is sent to the mobile station 165 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen CALL DATA Screen CALL DATA E Active C Resister U Fase Handoff U Access Release O Connect Order Display Word To Screen CCW A Word A CALL CHTL CALL DATA FI NAHE T STE RSYO Sch CALL BIT 1 O11 1 1 1 0 1010 CALL CHFG ANLG MEAS SPEC ANL MINI Parity AUTHEN 110110011000101010101100 010111100111 Figure 23 The CALL DATA Screen This screen displays the decoded reverse control channel and reverse voice channel signaling messages received by the Test Set from the mobile station Thirte
194. Station Send Word Control Message T1T2 DSCC POSCC EF RSYVD DE 10 100000 LOCAL ORDA ORDER Parit 0 5059 609 1100011 Figure 62 NMS FVC Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DSCC DSAT color code for the new channel Also represents SCC for handoff to a wide analog channel PDSCC Present DSAT color code Indicates the DAST color code associated with the present channel EF Extended protocol order used for multiple word features RSVD Reserved for future use OE The Odd Even data field is used for adjacent channel protection 242 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions LOCAL This field is specific to each system The Order field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted ORDQ The order qualifier field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action ORDER This field indicates the order type Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 243 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions WNHO MESS Message Fields Set Messase WHHO MES Hide to Narrow Handoff Message T1iT2 SCC PSCC ETTP oscc m a oo Figure 63 WNHO MESS Message Fields T1T2 Thi
195. TROL screen This field is used to send an order on the forward voice channel to the mobile station The orders available are e Change Power to Power Level 0 7 e MRI issues a request for mobile reported interference report NAMPS system type only e Maintenance puts the mobile station in maintenance mode e Alert alerts the mobile station The Order field is a one of many selection field To send an order to the mobile station select the Order field A list of choices is displayed Select the desired order from the Choices menu Once the selection is made a mobile station control message is sent to the mobile station The Access annunciator will light momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile station control message A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator must be lit before you can attempt to send an order to a mobile station When the Authent is set to ON the Order field is not displayed This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is the Active annunciator must be lit and the MS Id information field on the CALL CONTROL screen must be correct before you can attempt to page a mobile station 169 ain Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Page Register Register Release 170 S agilent 8920 8920b USRG
196. This column lists the NMT standards frame type for each frame Operating Considerations The received frame type is determined using the decoder s Standard field setting and the encoder s DUT field setting If these settings do not agree with the actual DUT and its standard the received R frame types may not be correctly identified The transmitted frame type is determined by the Send f commands used in the NMT test program being executed Input Level Load Test NMT Test Entry Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen NMT Decoder This field specifies the signal level that you input The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for fluctuating signal levels De emphasis can greatly affect the input level required for proper decoding When decoding NMT data streams you should turn de emphasis off controlled by the De Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen See Also Trig Level on page 294 This double field is used to select and load NMT tests from a variety of mass storage devices After the appropriate Mass Storage device is selected using the field on the right the desired NMT test is selected using the field on the left Load Test T Test Name Mass Storage nmt l
197. To AF Analyzer screen 113 461 SCREEN CONTROL keys 592 screen control keys 42 screen dump 69 463 592 screens accessing 42 go to previous 592 interactions 56 printing 69 463 592 Index RX TX screen interactions 273 setting intensity 52 266 using screen control keys 42 second word of called address 177 SECURE IT 557 securing files 557 Select Procedure Filename Tests Main Menu screen 533 Select Procedure Location Tests Main Menu screen 534 Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 544 Send Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 372 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 377 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 384 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 387 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 372 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 Send Data Radio Interface screen 472 Send DSAT Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 372 Send Filler Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 372 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 372 Send Mode Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 378 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 384 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 387 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 406 ain wenu 653 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 Sensitivity RF Analyzer screen 487 Spectrum Analyzer screen
198. UIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f When lit the Page annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is currently being paged on the forward control channel This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is the Active annunciator lit before you can attempt to register a mobile station When lit the Register annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the base station This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection to the mobile station When the Release field is selected a mobile station control message with a release order is sent to the mobile station on the forward voice channel A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator must be lit before you can attempt to send a release order to the mobile station Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions This section describes the individual data fields contained in each of the decoded reverse control channel and reverse voice channel messages RECCW A Message Fields Figure 24 RECCW A Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this
199. Using Automated Test Software The Agilent 11807A Option 012 MPT 1327 Trunked Radio Tests software provides comprehensive automated tests of MPT 1327 radios All Test Set RF AF and Encoder Decoder controls are automatically set requiring minimal operator inputs You can choose any combination of tests from full transmitter and receiver testing to a single test The software is shipped on a memory card that inserts directly into your Test Set and comes with complete documentation and a blank SRAM memory card for storing your test procedures and test data 424 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu System Identity Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the MPT 1327 Encoder The System Identity uses two areas to enter the system identity number as either a decimal or hexadecimal value When a value is entered in either field the corresponding value is automatically entered in the other field The first field is a four digit hexadecimal integer with leading zeros H indicates the hexadecimal number base It has the range 0 through 7FFFj and its default is 0000 6 The second field is a five digit decimal integer with leading zeros It has the range 0 through 32767 and its default is 00000 It is essential that the 15 bit system identity transmitted by the Test Set matches the system identity programmed into the radio unit If there is not a match the RU will not recognize the forwa
200. X b K1 1 DUPLEX c K2 2 PREV d K3 3 TESTS_MAIN e K4 4 LOCAL f K5 5 RECALL g K1_PRIME 6 MEAS_RESET h K2_PRIME 7 PRESET i K3_PRIME 8 INCR_DIV_10 j ASSIGN 9 INCR_SET k KNOB_TURN_CCW lt INCR_TIMES_10 1 KNOB_TURN_CW gt DOWN m MSSG A UP n HELP B SEVEN o CONFIG Cc EIGHT p HOLD D NINE q PRINT E FOUR r ADRS F FIVE s SAVE G SIX t REF_SET J ONE u METER K TWO v AVG L THREE w LO_LIMIT M ZERO x HI_LIMIT N POINT y E R PLUS_MINUS z F S OHM_PCT_DEL_DBUV B U DB_GHZ_DBM c v MS_HZ_UV D w 90 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Remote Control Alternate sequences for 5 commonly used functions are also available Hold down the Cntl control key and select the corresponding key for the desired function Example Cntl H moves the cursor to the left one space ENTER JorM CANCEL C BACKSPACE H KNOB_TURN_CW R KNOB_TURN_CCW L 91 man wenu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Remote Control 92 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSS opoverv fh in Menu NOTE Adjacent Channel Power Screen This screen is displayed on the Test Set with Option 102 Spectrum Analyzer This screen is used to measure Adjacent Channel Power This is ameasurement of the power of signals at a specific channel spacing above and below the RF Analyzer s center frequency This screen is accessed by selecting AD CH PWR from the To Scre
201. _th in Menu Tone Sequence Encoder Figure 107 AFGen2 To Audio Out Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Tone Sequence Encoder The Tone Sequence Generator outputs sequences of tones of variable frequency amplitude and duration Its signal can be used to modulate the RF Generator or can be output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector Symbol Seayence Seq On off Hum Time Tin WE Ms 00 So ed hi nn Symbol Definition E Sym Frea Anetd 4 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 0 0 D mo n 0 Den e Pre The Tone Sequence Encoder Mode Screen This audio frequency generator control contains two fields SIGMALIMG ENCODER CAF GENERATOR 2 AFGen2 To FH tone ec wmf e The upper field determines whether the tone sequence modulates the RF Generator or is output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the Tone Sequence Generator to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out an wenu 439 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Tone Sequence Encoder Bursts FM Coupling Pre Emp Send Send Mode Standard Stop 440 This field defines the number of sequences output each time Send is selec
202. a logic high since the output transistor is essentially clamped to ground A logic OR function is implemented in the Radio Interface design between I O Config field and the Send Data the Entering a hex value in the I O Config field writes that value to the output data lines just as selecting Send Data writes the value entered in the Output Data field to the output data lines The effect of this operation is that it will not be possible to use the Output Data field to set a parallel data bus line low if that line has been designated as an input by the value entered in the I O Config field The fastest rate at which input data can change is about 50 kHz The practical limits on data transfer however are based on the speed of the IBASIC or external controller program since all data transfer is asynchronous 475 ain wenu Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation Outputting Data 476 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fb Main Menu Outputting data is accomplished by entering the appropriate hex value in the Output Data field and then selecting the Send Data field The output data value can be incremented or decremented by turning the cursor control knob with the Output Data field highlighted The output data lines are implemented by open collector output voltage comparators Sending a logic 0 causes active pull down through a transistor in the voltage comparato
203. ade 08920 61051 Connector Kit one each de power MIC ACC RS 232 RJ 08920 61061 11 and radio interface connectors DC Power Connector Housing Qty 1 1251 4782 DC Power Connector Contacts 1252 0385 Qty 2 System Rack Mount Flange Kit Option 908 5061 4846 Rack mount kit for Agilent 8920D or 08921 61037 Agilent 8921D Padded Carrying Case 1540 1130 Hardshell Transit Case 08920 90033 Passive Oscilloscope Probe Agilent 10435A 1 MQ 7 5pF 10 1 Passive Oscilloscope Probe Agilent 10438A High Z 40pF 1 1 Passive Oscilloscope Probe Agilent 10439A High Z 64pF 1 1 RF Detector Probe Agilent 34301A 100 kHz to 700 MHz Resistor Divider Probe Kit Agilent 54006A Power Splitter DC to 3 GHz 50Q Agilent 11850C 599 in Menu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Table 18 Accessories Continued Description Agilent 8920B 64 KByte SRAM Memory Card PCMCIA Agilent 83230A 256 KByte SRAM Memory Card PCMCIA Agilent 83233A 1 MByte SRAM Memory Card PCMCIA Agilent 83231A a Allows rack mounting of Cellular Adapter example Agilent 83201A to Agilent 8920B External Monitor The CRT s Video Output drives a multisync monitor at 19 2 kHz analog Examples of this type of monitor include the Electrohome ECM 1410 DMS 14 inch color monitor and the EVM 1242 P4VID 12 inch monochrome monitor Manuals English and non English Table 19 Manuals Description
204. age 60 563 ain wenu Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions AFGen1 Freq AFGen 1 Lvl Current DC Level De Emphasis 564 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItxtscrn fh Main Menu This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the level out the AUDIO OUT connector in volts rms across a low impedance output or in mW W or dBm across a 600 ohm load mW is selected by pressing SHIFT ENTER Operating Considerations In the TX TEST screen the signal is always output through the AUDIO OUT connector The Current field is found by selecting the SINAD field on the Test Set display of the TX TEST screen This field only displays the DC current measured at the DC input port on the back of the Test Set Any offset can be removed by selecting Zero from the DC Current field This field displays the DC voltage entering at the DC input port on the back of the Test Set This setting selects or bypasses the 750 ms de emphasis networks in the audio analyzer and speaker circuitry Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Detector Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions This setting selects the type of detecto
205. age Type Extended Protocol Message Type Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 239 ar wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions NCH ASN Message Fields Set LEE EIS NCH AS FCC Narrow Channel Assisnment Message _CHAN Figure 61 NCH ASN Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DSCC DSAT color code for the new channel Also represents SCC for handoff to a wide analog channel RSVD Reserved for future use C13 Channel number bit 13 set 10 kHz above channel number in CHAN Field C12 Channel number bit 12 set 10 kHz below channel number in CHAN Field VMAC This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station power level associated with the designated voice channel 240 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions CHAN Channel number field Indicates the designated RF channel Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 241 ar wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions NMS FVC Message Fields et Message NMS FYC FYC Mobile
206. ake Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 391 hardware modifications 596 heading for printout 465 552 HELP key 592 Help screen view of 444 hexadecimal format 67 hexadecimal numbers for tone sequence 441 HI indicator 70 HI LIMIT key 591 Hi Tone Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 296 high limit removing 71 setting 70 Hold All Range Hold 268 HOLD key 592 Home 1 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 Home 2 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 horizontal sweep oscilloscope 455 HP IB address external devices 549 address printer 465 553 address test set 447 592 HP IB Address T O Configure screen 447 HP IB connector description 578 HP IB control 88 HP IB operation 640 Main Menu Index I VO Config Radio Interface screen 472 VO Configure screen Data Length 447 HP IB Address 447 IBASIC Echo 447 Inst Echo 447 Mode 448 Parity 448 Rcv Pace 448 Save Recall 449 Serial Baud 449 Serial In 450 Stop Length 450 view of 446 Xmt Pace 450 IB_UTIL 557 IBASIC INITIALIZE command 78 IBASIC controller configuring 450 IBASIC Echo T O Configure screen 447 IBASIC error messages 447 IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl Tests Main Menu screen 533 IBASIC programs running 88 ID1 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 ID2 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 identification base station 431 mobile station 136 mobile station subscriber 434 mobile telephone exchange 430
207. al suffixes discussed in Special Frame Suffixes on page 331 are ignored by this instruction Valid entries for l are integers from 0 to 255 The specified label I must appear somewhere before the END statement of the program 339 iain wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests 340 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu CLEAR Clear the received frame register This statement should appear before an IF f 1 statement in the test program SETnm Set the counter n to the value m Valid entries for the parameter n are integers 1 and 2 Valid entries for m are integers from 0 to 255 REPEAT n1 Decrement the counter n by one and go to the label 1 if the counter value is still greater than 0 Valid entries for n are 1 and 2 Valid entries for I are integers from 0 to 255 The specified counter n must have been set with a SET n m statement previously in the test program The label 1 must appear somewhere in the test program before the END statement WAIT n Wait n bits with no data being sent Valid entries for the parameter n are integers from 0 to 4095 The actual wait time depends on the data rate setting in bits per second on the NMT ENCODER Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Tone Sequence Decoder Tone Sequence Decoder Figure 81 AF Anl In Arm Meas The Tone Sequence Decoder analyzes sequential tone signals and displays the associated parameters
208. al to be analyzed See Also Tune Mode on page 100 This field selects Automatic or Manual tuning of the RF Analyzer Auto tuning causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude gt 36 dBm and to set the Tune Frequency for that signal Manual tuning requires the operator to set the Tune Frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations Changing the Tune Mode also changes the RF frequency display Automatic tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement Manual tuning enables the TX Freq Error measurement Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions TX Freq Error TX Frequency TX Power TX Pwr Meas This measurement displays Transmitter Frequency Error or absolute Transmitter Frequency See Also Tune Mode on page 100 Transmitter TX Power measures RF power at the RF IN OUT port Operating Considerations Only the RF IN OUT port can be used for measuring TX Power on this screen When the Input Port is set to Ant four dashes appear in place of digits for this measurement Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low level RF power lt 200 mW at the ANT IN port The transmitter power measurement field specifies how transmitter power measurements are made e Peak can be used to measure AM FM and un modulated CW signals e Sample can be used to measure FM or CW signals with increased measurement speed This method can only be used with si
209. aling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Table 13 NMT Additional Information Bits Frames Content of Additional Information Digits la la la H1H2H3H4H5H6H7H8H9H10 All from Add Info field laS la S la S H1H2H4H5H6H7H8H9H10 From Add Info field H3 From Bate Save field lb 1bTA1 1bTA2 H1H2H3H4H5H6H7 From Add Info field H8H9H10 From Area field 1bS H1H2H4H5H6H7 From Add Info field H3 From Bate Save field H8H9H20 From Area field 2a 2a 2a 2e 3b H1H2H3H4H5H6H7 Not Used 3bTA2 3bTC2 4 H8H9H10 From Area field 4TA2 4b 4bTA2 30 2c 2c 2c 2d 2d 2d H1H2H3H4H5H6H7 Not used 2f H8H9H10 Fixed by standard as fictitious channel numbers Valid Entry Range 0000000000 FFFFFFFFFF hex NMT Frames Affected Refer to the Frames column in the preceding table Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard AFGen2 To Audio frequency generator 2 to contains two fields e The upper field determines whether the NMT Encoder modulates the RF Generator or is output through AUDIO OUT e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off 429 ain wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Alarm Level Low Alarm Level High Area 430 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This field sets the lower trigger level for the signal st
210. alone IBASIC computer See the Instrument BASIC documentation for information about writing your own tests for the Test Set If you need to perform a simple IBASIC operation such as a SAVE or GET function you can enter commands one at a time To do this access the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen and use the knob to enter commands Refer to the Programmer s Guide for information about using the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen to write and store your own tests 554 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestscrn fh Main Menu Clr Scr Continue Main Menu Run Sngl Step Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS IBASIC Controller This field is used to clear the IBASIC controller screen This field is used to restart a paused test Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen Selecting this field runs the IBASIC program This field single step allows you to step through an IBASIC program line by line 555 ar wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen ROM Programs ROM Programs Using the Signal Strength Meter TESTS IBASIC Controller 100 4 552 Hewlwti Packard Tune Freq 105 700 MHz sigmeter tif Figure 142 The Signal Strength Meter Screen The Signal Strength Meter is accessed by loading and running the LVL_MTR ROM program 1 2 3 Select the TESTS Main Menu screen Move the cursor to the Select Procedure Location field and choose ROM Move the cursor to t
211. alyzer Screen for further information Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem Generalized Procedures Using the Call Processing Subsystem For general procedures for using the Call Processing Subsystem see the following sections e Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 e Configure the Test Set on page 144 e Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel on page 145 e Register a Mobile Station on page 145 e Page a Mobile Station on page 146 e Handoff a Mobile Station to a New Voice Channel on page 148 e Release A Mobile Station on page 148 e Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station on page 149 e Originate a Call from a Mobile Station on page 150 e Send an Alert Order to a Mobile Station on page 151 e Changing the Content of a Message Field on page 251 e Selecting The Message Content Generation Method on page 248 e To Make an RF Sensitivity Measurement on page 257 e To Make an FM Hum and Noise Measurement on page 258 125 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen The CALL CONTROL Screen CALL CONTROL Display lata heas Phone Num 509 981 2793 ESN decli 157 9232940 fictive ESN hexli 9D8CEZ2C CO Resister SCM Class IIIs Continuous 25 MHz CI Page CO Access CO Connect System TypelYoice Channel Assignment To Screen AMPS Entrl C
212. ames Affected 20 21b 21c 22 Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard The the length of the battery saving period in 5 second increments For example a setting of 5 produces a 25 second period Valid Entry Range 0 through 7 NMT Frames Affected 1aS 1a S la S 1bS Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard 431 ain wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Calling Channel Number This number setting when initiating a call from the BS to the MS Valid Entry Range 1 through 2023 NMT Frames Affected la la 1a 1aS 1a S 1a S 1b 1bS 2a 2a 2a 2b 2b 2b 2c 2c 2c 2d 2d 2d 2e 2f 10a 10d 11b Operating Considerations This setting affects the RF frequencies the RF generator and analyzer tune to when the TCHAN CC and RCHAN CC commands are used Each NMT standard has its own range of available channels Table 14 lists the valid channel assignments for Calling Traffic and Access channels Table 14 Valid Channel Assignments NMT Standard Valid Channel Numbers STD450 1 to 180 STD900 1 to 1000 1025 to 2023 Calling Channel Power This field specifies the calling channel s power setting Each Power setting represents one of the four available levels allowed by the NMT standards Valid Entry Range 0 through 3 NMT Frames Aff
213. an 518 spectrum analyzer 524 symbol 342 transmitter 61 tuning 100 357 489 568 frequency error measurement 101 115 358 489 501 569 modulation quality 131 symbol 342 transmitter 61 frequency offset 87 tracking generator 522 frequency pair ain Mon Index DTMF high tone 296 DTMF low 285 298 Function Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 382 function generator waveform 402 Function Generator decoder mode AF Anl In 307 Arm Meas 308 Frequency 308 Gate Time 308 Input Level 308 Single Cont 309 Stop Meas 309 Trig Level 309 view of 307 Function Generator encoder mode AFGen Freq 401 AFGen2 To 401 Audio Out 401 FM Coupling 401 Sine Units 401 view of 400 Waveform 402 functional diagram AF Analyzer 105 Duplex Test screen 347 RF Analyzer 483 RF Generator 495 RX Test 505 TX Test 561 functional test for verifying operation 46 FVC AMPS TACS 361 data rate 365 menu 364 NAMPS NTACS 361 outputting 372 FVC message data format AMPS TACS 361 data format NAMPS NTACS 361 FVC mobile station control message order 220 voice channel assignment 222 224 226 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 240 242 244 246 gain automatic control 111 between ANT IN and device under test 262 between DUPLEX OUT and device under test 265 between RF IN OUT and device un der test 271 de emphasis 108 input 111 manual control 111 notch filter 112
214. an be initiated The Status field indicates Control when the control channel is transmitting and changes to Working when the working channel is being sent 391 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 EDACS Encoder Logical ID Polarity RX Test 392 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This field is used to specify the identification number of the calling radio It should be set to the Logical ID of the radio being tested when performing transmitter tests Generally when performing receiver tests it must be set to a Logical ID different from that of the radio being tested This setting determines how the encoder s digital data modulates the RF Generator This field is usually set to Norm Invert is used for narrowband systems This field is automatically set to the correct polarity by the Standard field When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 causes the output level of the encoder to be negative A logical low 0 causes the level to become positive When using FM the RF Generator would then produce a negative frequency deviation for a positive going digital transition the opposite of the normal mode of operation This field is automatically set to the correct polarity by the Standard field When Start is selected the encoder sends a digital message over the control channel to tell the mobile to go to the specified working channel called a channel as
215. anel MODULATION INPUT connector This field sets the length of time each DTMF tone is on during the sequence This field sets the length of time each DTMF tones is off during the sequence Pre Emp Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 DTMF Sequence Encoder This field determines whether the encoder s signal passes through or bypasses the 750 ms pre emphasis network Pre emphasis may be required when testing some FM receivers See Also Twist on page 388 Send Selecting this field causes the DTMF sequence to be output Send Mode This field selects the format used when Send is selected to output a sequence Standard Single outputs the entire sequence once Burst outputs the sequence the number of times specified in the Bursts field Cont causes the sequence to be output continuously until Stop is selected Step allows you to output the tones in a sequence one at a time by pressing Send for each tone This field selects the DTMF standard used for your radio Stop Selecting this field stops the sequence being output Symbol Frequencies Hz The eight column row frequencies are automatically entered by the Standard field setting You can change the frequency values using the DATA keys 387 ain wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 DTMF Sequence Encoder Twist 388 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu Twist is the ratio of amplitu
216. annel receive frequency for the mobile Control Channel TX Frequency This field is used to specify the Control Channel transmit frequency for the mobile 390 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encosernth Main Menu Data Rate FM Coupling Group ID Handshake Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 EDACS Encoder This field sets the data rate in bits per second for the high speed signaling The value can be changed using the keypad or by selecting a value from the Standard field However the 9600 bps rate is the EDACS default and should not be changed under most circumstances 4800 is used for narrowband 900 MHz systems in the U S This field is used to select ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the RF Generator when the AFGen2 To field is set to FM Because the EDACS Encoder sends low speed data this field should be set to Dc This field is used to specify the group identification number for the trunked radio group your radio is set up to access This field is used to get the mobile up on a working channel after it has accessed the control channel When Send is selected the control channel message is output at the receive frequency specified in the Control Channel settings The Status field changes from Idle to Control and the RF Analyzer is tuned to the control channel s transmit frequency Operating Considerations The control channel message must be transmitting before a handshake c
217. ant the analyzer to decode incoming signals e Single tells the analyzer to display the information received during one Gate Time or after one measurement for NAMPS NTACS RVC data e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement that has been armed The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field s setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for valid signals This may require you to set the input level well below the expected level Trigger Pattern bin This field allows you to enter a specific bit pattern to filter displayed information The decoder only displays the received data when this binary pattern is encountered immediately after triggering This is helpful when you only want to display messages containing very specific information The trigger pattern is entered as a sequence of ones zeros and dots A dot will cause the decoder to trigger for either a one or a zero in that bit position in the received data stream Operating Considerations This function is not available for decoding NAMPS NTACS RVC information 281 ain Men Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTAC
218. apter 5 AF Analyzer Screen 594 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIconnkeys fb Main Menu 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm 595 ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Modifications Modifications This section includes information regarding e Hardware Upgrades Modifications e Firmware Upgrades e Accessories e Manuals English and non English e Radio Test Software e Power Cables e Sales and Service Support Hardware Upgrades and Modifications You can install several options in your Test Set or have Agilent Technologies install them for you If you want Agilent to install the options contact the nearest regional sales office listed at the end of this chapter 596 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm ain Me NOTE Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Modifications Some options may not be available depending on which model number you have One or more options may already be installed in your instrument For more specific information see table 14 on the following page Table 16 Hardware Retrofits and Modifications Description Option 001 High Stability Timebase RO1 Option 004 Tone Digital Signaling R04 Option 006 6 dB RF Attenuation 15 W max input R06 Option 007 0 dB RF Attenu
219. araguay Poland Portugal Rep South Africa Romania Russia Rwanda Saudi Arabia 220V Senegal Slovak Republic Slovenia Somalia Spain Spanish Africa Sri Lanka St Pierre Islands Sweden Syria Tajikistan Thailand Togo Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan USSR Ukraine Uzbekistan Western Africa Western Sahara Yugoslavia Zaire 602 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Plug Descriptions Agilent Part 9 Plug Type male female cable amp plug Cable Descriptions Straight Straight 8120 0698 90 inches black plug6 wm Used in the following locations Peru Plug Descriptions Agilent Part eos Plug Type male female cable amp plug Cable Descriptions Straight Straight 8120 2104 79 inches gray Straight 90 8120 2296 79 inches gray Ground Used in the following locations Switzerland 603 ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Plug Descriptions Agilent Part E Plug Type male female cable amp plug Cable Descriptions 125V Straight Straight 8120 1378 90 inches jade gray gt Straight 90 8120 6177 90 inches jade gray Straight Straight 8120 1751 90 inches jade gray oh Ground Line Neutral Used in the following locations America
220. asurements Hold All disables these routines requiring you to manually set the affected settings The following fields are affected by the Range Hold field RX TX Cntl1 in the CONFIGURE screen Tune Mode inthe TX TEST DUPLEX TEST and RF ANALYZER screens e Input Atten in the RF ANALYZER and SPECTRUM ANALYZER screens e Gain Cnt1 in the AF ANALYZER screen This field controls three AF gain setting fields Input Gain De Emp Gain Notch Gain Operating Considerations The Hold All setting is primarily used when the instrument is operated by remote control such as in an automated test system Unless you have very specific reasons for disabling the automatic functions you should set this field to Auto A11 when operating the instrument manually See Also Programmer s Guide RF Chan Std Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions Use the RF channel standard field to select the channel standard for the radio under test The RF Generator s and the RF Analyzer s frequencies are automatically set to correspond to the channel number entered in the RF Channel field RF Channel replaces the Amplitude and Tune Freq fields on several screens when channel tuning is used Each standard has a prefix code that indicates what type of radio to test mobile station MS or land station LS For example if you are testing an AMPS mobile select MS AMPS For the NAMPS standards a third letter is added indicating whi
221. ata stream is finished and the turn off code is output Turn off code time defines the length of time the turn off code is output Operating Considerations This code is always the last information output before the encoder s Status indicator changes from Sending to Idle whether several bursts or only one data stream is sent If no TOC is desired set this field to 0 0000 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the CDCSS Encoder Using the CDCSS Encoder The CDCSS Data Stream lt Data is Shifted Out This Direction 01101111010100001100011 fl Ld Error Detection Code Fixed 3 Digit Code You Computed by 8920A Octal 4 Enter CDCSS Data Stream Bit Assignments The CDCSS encoder creates a 23 bit digital data stream and Turn Off Code TOC The data stream consists of three parts e lt A 3 digit 9 bit octal code you supply that corresponds to your radios digital squelch code number e A fixed octal 4 coded 100 e A mathematically derived 11 bit error detection code The data stream is output serially beginning with the error detection code The Turn Off Code The turn off code is a tone burst that is output after the data stream has been output the desired number of times or after a series of bursts has been interrupted using the Stop field 379 ain Mo Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Digital Paging
222. ate the call and return to the active state Zeroing the power meter cancels any inherent dc offsets that may be present within the power meter under zero power conditions This ensures that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier Zeroing the power meter establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring the mobile station s RF power at the RF IN OUT port This ensures the most accurate RF power measurements of the mobile station s RF carrier at different power levels 2 Couple the variable frequency notch filter to AFGen1 This step is only required if audio testing is to be done on the mobile station This step couples the variable frequency notch filter to the output frequency of AFGen1 audio frequency generator 1 The notch filter is used when making SINAD measurements AFGen1 is used to generate the audio tone for the SINAD measurement Coupling the notch filter to the audio source ensures the most accurate measurement a b Press and release the blue SHIFT key and then the DUPLEX key to display the CONFIGURE screen Position the cursor on the Notch Coup field and select AFGen1 153 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Configure the Test Set 1 Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed 2 Verify that the Test Set configuration information is appr
223. ater Select the triggering mode e Select Single to decode and display only the first valid transmitter data received The decoder must be re armed before another measurement can be made e Select Cont to continuously monitor a repeater and display its transmitted data Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod Set the Input Level to 1 kHz Select Arm Meas if you are using single triggering The transmitted data is displayed after computing is displayed in the Status field If no decoded data is displayed 316 The repeater may not be transmitting The RF signal may be too low for off the air measurements Use a better antenna or set the RF ANALYZER screen s Sensitivity field to High The Gate Time may be too short Increase the value The received data may be inverted Set the Polarity field to Invert The trigger level may be too low or too high Change the Input Level setting S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu MPT 1327 Decoder Figure 79 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen MPT 1327 Decoder The MPT 1327 Decoder screen is used with the MPT 1327 Encoder screen to decode and display MPT 1327 data streams Like the MPT 1327 Encoder the MPT 1327 Decoder is primarily intended to be controlled using IBASIC programs running on the Test Set s IBASIC controller or on an external controller Dato Rote WIEN Timing Receive Buffer pers Ooo 00 Soon e oo The MPT 1327 Decoder
224. ates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the message type received from the mobile station e Set to 1 to identify the message as an origination or an order e Set to 0 to identify the message as an order response or page response This field displays the random number use in the SSD update procedure This field displays the parity of the received data 185 in Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions NRVC Ord Message Fields Display Word NRYC Ord Narrow Order or Order Confirmation Message lee Local ORDG Order DSCC YMAC 11 00000 001 01011 000 000 RSYD arity 0000000000000 100000500100 Figure 35 NRVC Ord Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message AWC This field indicates the number of additional words coming Local This field displays the local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test Set ORDQ This field displays the received order qualifier The field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action Order This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the Test Set 186 S agilent
225. atically turns AFGenl on and off when the Carrier Ref field is set to Unmod you must use AFGen1 and the AUDIO OUT port as the modulation source for making AM ACP mea surements 94 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS aepscrn fh Main Menu Field Descriptions Figure 13 ACP Meas TR Freauency 150 0661 78 m 00004 TR Power Auto Manual MHz TH Pur Heas Input Fort Input Atten fal uto Hold 0 Ext TH Key Dn tE AFGenit Frea kHz AFGent To kHz Carrier Ref L Hng J Mod The Adjacent Channel Power Screen ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER 5 Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Urper ACP Ratio Lower ACP Ratio Rotio Level Ch Offset kHz Channel BW kHz Res BH 300 Hz Field Descriptions dB dB To Screen SPEC ANL ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT adchpwr wmf This field selects the format for displaying upper and lower adjacent channel power levels e Ratio displays the power levels relative to the power around the center frequency Tune Freq Levels can be displayed in dB or as a percentage e Level displays the absolute power levels in mW W dBm V mV and dBmV Operating Considerations TX Power and ACP Level can only be measured through the RF IN OUT port Four dashes are displayed for these measurements when the Input Port is set to Ant ANT IN ACP Ratio can be measured on either the ANT IN port or RF IN OUT port For more info
226. ation 4 W max input R07 Option 009 Electronic Attenuator 30 W max 1 2 W continuous R09 Option 010 400 Hz High Pass Filter RIO Option 011 CCITT Weighting Filter R11 Option 012 4 kHz Bandpass Filter R12 Option 013 C Message Filter R13 Option 014 6 kHz Bandpass Filter R14 Option 020 Radio Interface Card R20 Option 051 Dual mode Rear panel Connectors R51 Option 102 Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator R02 Firmware Feature Upgrade Kit R58 High Level RF Power Measurements to 100 watts continuous G05 a The Agilent 8920B cannot be configured with more than one input range option Do not order Options 006 007 and H08 or any combination of these options concurrently b A maximum of two filters options can be added to an instrument an Mo 597 Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Modifications Firmware Upgrades Table 17 Firmware Upgrades Agilent Description 8920B Operating System and Signaling ROMs R58 a Option 004 Tone Digital Signaling 598 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm in Menu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Accessories Table 18 Accessories Description Agilent 8920B Telescoping Antenna 08920 61060 Microphone 08920 61059 DC Battery Pack 24V 08920 80027 Battery Charger 08920 80028 CRT Sun Sh
227. ay This is the SINAD measurement s default state when the instrument is turned on or preset As the measurement is displayed graphically on the meter the value is also displayed in small digits below the meter You can specify the high and low end points and display interval or you can use the default meter settings This function is only available for measurements displayed using the large digits such as the measurements displayed in the RX TEST and TX TEST screens To Make Beat Frequency Measurements 1 2 3 Select the DUPLEX TEST screen to set up for beat frequency oscillator measurements SettheAF Anl Infieldto SSB Demod Manually adjust the Tune Freq field to the desired carrier frequency 65 ain Men Chapter 3 Operating Overview Entering and Changing Numbers Entering and Changing Numbers To Enter Numbers 66 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Values for numeric entry fields can be entered and changed using various methods depending on your testing needs The unit of measure for some of these fields can also be changed such as changing the RF Generator s Amplitude units from dBm to uV 1 Position the cursor in front of the numeric entry field to be changed 2 Use one of the following methods a enter the number and unit of measure directly using the keypad or b press the Cursor Control knob or ENTER to highlight the field and use the knob or c use the dow
228. ayed measurements but does cause a brief interruption of the displayed information during the process Setting Resolution Bandwidth and Sweep Rate The resolution bandwidth and sweep rate are determined by the span setting and cannot be set independently These settings are listed in the following table Table 15 Relationship Between Span Resolution Bandwidth and Sweep Rate Span a By Sweep Rate lt 50 kHz 0 3 28 6 kHz second lt 200 kHz 1 0 329 0 kHz second lt 1 5 MHz 3 0 3 0 MHz second lt 3 MHz 30 0 21 4 MHz second lt 18 MHz 30 0 36 3 MHz second lt 200 MHz 300 0 257 0 MHz second 1 GHz 300 0 1 0 GHz second 528 EE vein Menu 22 Tests Screen ain wenu 529 Chapter 22 Tests Screen Description of the Tests Subsystem Description of the Tests Subsystem 530 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestscrn fh Main Menu The TESTS screens are the also referred to as the Tests Subsystem a group of screens used to create edit and run automated test programs Using program control the Test Set can run radio tests by itself and control other instruments using the GPIB or Serial Port The Agilent 11807E Radio Test Software is an example this type of automated testing Tests can be run from memory cards the Test Set s internal ROM or RAM or from an external disk drive Test programs are written in the Instrument BASIC IBASIC programming language
229. bile Stations Initial NMT Decoder Settings Input Level 3 0 kHz 330 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decosernth Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the NMT Decoder Encoder Special Frame Suffixes Some frame designations include a suffix to identify specific encoder screen fields such as TC2 for Alternate Traffic Channel or to indicate special frame values affected such as the S suffix that indicates Battery Save information example laS The following suffixes are appended to some frame designations AC Access Channel CC Calling Channel S Battery Save TA1 Main Traffic Area TA2 Alternate Traffic Area TC1 Main Traffic Channel TC2 Alternate Traffic Channel 331 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests Creating NMT Tests The NMT Encoder outputs signals using programs running in the NMT Decoder This differs from the Test Set s other signaling encoder functions that have a send function to directly output their signals such as DTMF and Tone Sequence To use the NMT Encoder and Decoder functions you must first understand how tests are written Programming Overview NOTE 332 Special program commands are used by the Test Set to test NMT radios These commands are used to send frames perform simple branching and looping operations change RF channels and test received frame types The NMT Decoder has its own RAM to run programs
230. bits of the system identification number as defined by the EIA TIA 553 Mobile Station Land Station Compatibility Specification When the Data Spec field is set to Std the contents of the applicable message s on the CALL BIT screen are updated with the bit patterns generated using the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard whenever that signaling message is sent to the mobile station This feature allows a user to set the Data Spec field to Std select a message of interest perform a call processing function and view the bit patterns generated using the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard It is important to note individual messages can be used more than once during a messaging protocol The contents of any message viewed on the CALL BIT screen when the Data Spec field is set to Std will reflect the message contents for the last time the message was used in a messaging protocol For example if the Call Processing Subsystem is in the active state and the user selects the Register field a registration message will be sent to the mobile station When the registration completes the Call Processing Subsystem returns to the active state The contents of some messages such as the System Parameter Overhead Message Word 1 will reflect the correct settings for the active state not the register state since the messages are currently being used in the active state 249 ain Men Chapter 6 Call
231. cally changes that setting in all screens where it is available AFGen1 Freq is an example of this field type AFGen1 Freq AFGen1 Freq RX TEST 1 000 1 250 p kHz N kHz AFGen1 Freq Py AFGen1 Freq RF GENERATOR 1 000 gt ua gt Bm p kHz 0 p kHz AFGen1 Freq TX TEST 1 250 p kHz AFGen1 Freq DUPLEX 1 250 kHz Figure 6 Example of How Global Fields Work Priority fields give the RX TEST and TX TEST screens priority control of their settings No matter what these fields were set to in other screens if the RX TEST or TX TEST screen is these screens The RF type These fields and 56 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh accessed the field changes to whatever it was last set to in Generator s Amplitude field is an example of this field their preset values are listed in Table 4 Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Interaction Between Screens Table 4 Priority RX TEST and TX TEST Fields Priority Field RX TEST TX TEST RF Gen Amplitude Presets to 80 dBm changeable Always Off AFGen1 To Presets to FM changeable Always Audio Out AF Anl In Always Audio In Presets to FM Demod changeable Detector Always RMS Presets to Pk Max changeable De emphasis Always Off Presets to 750us changeable AF Anl Measurement Presets to SINAD changeable
232. ce audio power power supply voltage and so forth By selecting the Parm Value or Units fields and using the data and units keys you can modify or enter parameters NOTE The tests you select determine the parameters that are required Your radio test documentation provides details if you are using Agilent 11807 software Print All This field allows you to print the Test Set s screen image Main Menu Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen 537 ain wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Order of Tests TESTS Order of Tests Figure 135 All Chans 538 TESTS Test Parameters Porm Description Yalue Units Print A1 hele arain Menu Screen 0 000000 2 tstparam wmf The TESTS Order of Tests Screen The order of tests is set up by selecting one or more tests from the complete list of available tests such as selecting a subset of an entire Agilent 11807E package The TESTS Order of Tests menu lets you select the radio tests you want to perform and the order in which the tests are done Tests can be selected in any order but to reduce testing time you should strategically organize the test sequence Tests requiring operator intervention changing volume channels and so forth should be grouped together If you are using Agilent 11807 software see its documentation to see which parameters go with each test This field allows you to choose if a new te
233. ces e The output of the AM FM or SSB demodulators The AUDIO IN RADIO INTERFACE MODULATION INPUT MIC ACC and AU DIO OUT connectors e The signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 This field indicates which EXIT n command caused the program to stop running See Also EXIT n command in Program Command Syntax on page 337 ain wenu 323 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen NMT Decoder Frame Log 324 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu The Frame Log area lists the recorded frame information generated by the encoder and received by the decoder Field descriptions for this area are listed together D The Direction column tells if a frame was transmitted by the encoder T or received by the decoder R Frame Digits This column lists the information part of the recorded frames displayed as hexadecimal digits Num This column lists the reference numbers assigned to the recorded frames in the order they were transmitted and received Time The times in this column indicate when each frame was transmitted or received after Run Test was selected The times are listed in bit intervals that are dependent on the data rate set in the NMT Encoder For example at a data rate of 1200 bps one bit interval is equivalent to 0 833 ms 1 1200 Type
234. ch frequency band is used upper middle or lower For example when testing a mobile station using the lower band choose MSL NAMPS Testing a land station using the upper band you would select LSU NAMPS The USER DEF selection is used to define your own channel assignments When selected you enter the Base Freq Chan Space and Gen Anl settings See Also Base Freq User Defined on page 263 Chan Space User Defined on page 264 Gen Anl on page 266 269 iain Mo Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions RF Display RF Gen Volts 270 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS confscr This field selects the format for entering the RF Generator s and RF Analyzer s frequencies e When Freq is selected you enter the RF Generator s and the RF Analyzer s frequencies directly using the keypad or knob e When Chan is selected the RF Gen Freq and Tune Freq fields on all screens are replaced by the RF Channel field and only the channel number is entered and displayed Channel tuning eliminates the need to enter transmit and receive frequencies directly into the Test Set Once your radio s RF channel standard is selected you only have to enter the channel number to automatically set the RF Generator and RF Analyzer to the correct frequencies Operating Considerations When channel tuning is used the RF Analyzer is set to manual tuning The Tune Mode field on the TX TEST DUPL
235. ch level adjustment e Open disables squelch operation e Fixed sets the squelch to a fixed level disabling the front panel SQUELCH knob control Operating Considerations Most measurement processes on this screen are not displayed if the incoming signal falls below the squelch level with the exception of TX Power The measurements are replaced by four dashes to indicate they have been squelched The decoder and Oscilloscope measurements are also disabled when the signal has been squelched Spectrum Analyzer measurements are not affected by the squelch setting although squelch still affects whether the demodulated signal can be heard while viewing the RF signal Trying to read a squelched measurement using GPIB will cause your program to halt until the squelch is either turned down a measurement is made or until a program time out aborts the measurement process 487 an wenu Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions SINAD This is the default measurement for this field Selecting this field displays the following measurement choices SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurements The RF Generator and AFGen1 must be se
236. change the input use the arrow keys down arrow or up arrow or press ENTER to access the Choices menu A field that is accessed using a global user key is only displayed at the top of the screen while it is being accessed Moving the cursor to any other field in the screen causes the user key field to disappear until it is accessed again To Release Global USER Keys 1 Move the cursor to the field with the global user key assigned to it 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k5 key to access the RELEASE function Then press SHIFT and the USER key to be released k1 k3 86 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Setting an RF Generator Analyzer Offset Setting an RF Generator Analyzer Offset To Set an RF Offset You can set a fixed frequency offset between the RF Generator and the RF Analyzer This feature is convenient for testing radios with a fixed transmit receive frequency offset 3 Access the CONFIGURE screen Position the cursor in front of the RF Offset field and press the Cursor Control knob or press ENTER to turn the offset On or Off Select the Gen Anl field and enter the frequency offset value Example of Setting an RF Offset Af amp Pe 1 Access the CONFIGURE screen Set the RF Offset to On Enter an offset frequency Gen An1 of 10 MHz Access the DUPLEX screen Set the Tune Mode to Manual Select
237. coder screen LTR mode 406 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 436 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 station class mark 139 Status Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 394 status control 394 idle 394 indicators 378 working 394 STD450 NMT radio standard 329 436 STD900 NMT radio standard 329 436 Step Tests Order of Tests screen 539 Stop Signaling Encoder screen TACS mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 378 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 384 Signaling Encoder mode 387 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 394 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 406 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 stop bit 450 Stop DSAT Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 373 Stop Filler DTMF screen AMPS DTMF screen Main Menu Index Signaling Encoder AMPS TACS mode 373 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 373 Stop Length T O Configure screen 450 Stop Meas Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS mode 281 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS screen mode 289 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 294 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 299 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 303 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 309 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 314 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 281 Signaling Decoder screen To
238. codewords must be added to occupy a whole number of timeslots For messages with an odd number of data codewords the padding word must be generated by IBASIC An example of the format is given in the sequence of commands below It defines a two timeslot random access frame with a broadcast message transmitted on channel 212 of system 490146 ENC MPT1327 FILL DATA 1 ALH 0 ALLI 212 0 0 2 ENC MPT1327 FILL DATA 2 ALH 0 ALLI 212 0 0 0 ENC MPT1327 FILL DATA 3 BCAST 2 H4901 0 0 The signaling commands from such strings are assembled into 48 bit address and data codeword message values For an address codeword message the timeslot 128 bits consists of a 64 bit control channel system codeword CCSC followed by the address message followed by a 16 bit parity word Data codeword messages are taken in pairs Each has its own 16 bit parity word The firmware is never supplied with an odd number of codewords The resulting pair of 64 bit words is concatenated to again give 128 bits The resulting 128 bits are stored in the addressed location of the filler buffer Figure 100 on page 417 shows a signaling instruction being processed and should clarify this explanation S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder SIGNALING FIRMWARE ASSEMBLER ENCODER SCREEN ALH 0 8191 100 0 0 1 PFIX 0 80FFFC02E001 IDENT 8
239. connected state Connect annunciator is lit the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state Zeroing the power meter cancels any inherent dc offsets that may be present within the power meter under zero power conditions This ensures that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier Zeroing the power meter establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring the mobile station s RF power at the RF IN OUT port This ensures the most accurate RF power measurements of the mobile station s RF carrier at different power levels 2 Couple the variable frequency notch filter to AFGen1 This step is only required if audio testing is to be done on the mobile station This step couples the variable frequency notch filter to the output frequency of AFGen1 audio frequency generatorl The notch filter is used when making SINAD measurements AFGen1 is used to generate the audio tone for the SINAD measurement Coupling the notch filter to the audio source ensures the most accurate measurement a Press and release the blue SHIFT key and then the DUPLEX key to display the CONFIGURE screen b Position the cursor on the Notch Coup field and select AFGen1 143 an wenu
240. cordingly We Spokane Washington USA Date October 17 1996 Vince Roland Quality Manager ain wenu Table 1 Regional Sales Offices United States of America Canada Agilent Technologies Agilent Technologies Canada Inc Test and Measurement Call Center 5150 Spectrum Way P O Box 4026 Mississauga Ontario Englewood CO 80155 4026 LAW 5G1 tel 1 800 452 4844 tel 1877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 3120 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies Japan Ltd Measurement Assistance Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 Japan tel 81 456 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin America Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 805 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 Australia tel 1 800 629 485 fax 61 3 9272 0749 New Zealand tel 0 800 738 378 fax 64 4 802 6881 Asia Pacific Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 111 Kings Road Taikoo Shing Hong Kong tel 852 3197 7777 fax 852 2506 9233 an Men Service and Support Table 2 10 Any adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed by qualified personnel Contact your customer
241. creen Field Descriptions 444 ain Menu 23 Contents 24 12 T O Configure Screen Field Descriptions 446 iain wenu Contents 13 Message Screen Field Descriptions 452 ain wenu 25 Contents 26 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions 454 Using the Oscilloscope 461 iain wenu Contents 15 Print Configure Screen Field Descriptions 464 ain wenu 27 Contents 28 16 Radio Interface Screen Radio Interface Functional Description 468 Field Descriptions 470 Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation 473 Using The Radio Interface Remote Operation 479 iain wenu Contents 17 RF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram 482 Field Descriptions 483 ain wenu 29 Contents 30 18 RF Generator Screen Block Diagram 494 Field Descriptions 495 iain wenu Contents 19 RX Test Screen Block Diagram 504 Field Descriptions 505 ain wenu 31 Contents 32 20 Service Screen Field Descriptions 512 iain wenu Contents 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions 516 Using the Spectrum Analyzer 528 ain wenu 33 Contents 34 22 Tests Screen Description of the Tests Subsystem 530 TESTS Main Menu 532 TESTS Channel Information 535 TESTS Test Parameters 537 TESTS Order of Tests 538 TESTS Pass Fail Limits 540 TESTS Save Delete Procedure 542 TESTS Execution Conditions 545 TESTS External De
242. creen Digi Page mode 291 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 295 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 301 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 307 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 311 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 278 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 323 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 341 TX Test screen 562 AF Cnt Gate AF Analyzer screen 106 AF Freq AF Analyzer screen 114 Analog Meas screen 254 Call Control screen 128 Duplex Test screen 349 RF Generator screen 500 RX Test screen 510 TX Test screen 106 563 AF frequency modulation quality 131 AF generator 1 amplitude 350 496 507 frequency 96 350 496 506 564 level 564 modulation 96 350 496 507 AF generator 2 amplitude 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 497 507 frequency 401 496 506 modulation 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 497 507 use of 360 AF power external load resistance 63 105 495 506 measurement 63 AFGen1 Freq Adjacent Channel Power screen 96 Analog Meas screen 254 Duplex Test screen 350 RF Generator screen 496 RX Test screen 506 TX Test screen 564 AFGen1 Lvl TX Test screen 564 AFGen1 To Adjacent Channel Power screen 96 Analog Meas screen 254 Duplex Test screen 350 RF Generator screen 496 RX Test screen 507 AFGen2 Freq RF Generator screen 496 RX Test screen 506 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode 401 AFGen2 To RF Generator screen 49
243. d The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 236 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVCUnigCh Message Fields Set Message FYCUniach Uniaue Challense Order Word Figure 59 FVCUnigCh Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message RSVD Reserved for future use RANDU The 24 bit random number issued by the base station in the Unique Challenge Order Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 237 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions EXT PROT Message Fields Figure 60 TIT2 SCC MIN2 EF MSL 238 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu FCC Mobile Station Control Message EXT PROT Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SAT color code for new channel Second part of the mobile identification number Extended Protocol Forward Channel Indicator Message Length Extended Protocol Message Length Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MST Mess
244. d cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 215 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MS WORD Message Fields Set Message MS WORDI FCC Mobile Station Control Message Abbreviated Address Word Figure 43 MS WORD Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code field MINI First part of the mobile identification number field Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 216 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh in Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MSMessOrd Message Fields Set Messase MSMessOrd FCC Mobile Station Control Message Extended Address Word Tite scc MIN2 RSYD Local E 00000 Figure 44 MSMessOrd Message Fields Send Word The Send Word field sends the currently defined bits displayed in the MSMessOrd field to the mobile station T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code field MIN2 Second part of the mobile identification number field RSVD Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 217 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT
245. d message contents are displayed If the data messages cannot be correctly decoded the raw data message bits are displayed in hexadecimal format Figure 19 on page 132 shows the layout ofthe CALL CONTROL screen when a decoding error has occurred The decoded order confirmation message origination message and order message are available from the reverse control channel The following pieces of information are displayed when these messages are properly decoded phone number ESN dec ESN hex the decoded Station Class Mark SCM and the called number The decoded SCM consists of the mobile station power class Class I II or IID the transmission type continuous discontinuous and the transmission bandwidth 20 MHz or 25 MHz The decoded Order Confirmation Message is available from the reverse voice channel For system type NAMPS choose NData instead of Data Select Meas to display modulation quality measurements made on the mobile station s RF carrier while on a voice channel For system types AMPS TACS JTACS and wide channel NAMPS four characteristics of the RF carrier are measured TX Freq Error TX Power FM Deviation and AF Frequency When set to the Meas display the AF Analyzer s settings are 300 Hz HPF 15 kHz LPF De Emphasis Off PK detector The Meas information is available only when the Test Set s Connect annunciator is lit connect state Refer to the individual field descriptions for further informat
246. d then select MIN2 MIN1 from the Choices menu Select the lower MS ID field and enter the information in hexadecimal format Select AUTHEN from the To Screen menu The AUTHENTICATION screen will be displayed Select the A_KEY field and enter a valid A_KEY in decimal format Select the ESN field and enter the mobile station s electronic serial number in a hexadecimal format Position the cursor on the O f f On field and select On Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select SSD Upd from the CC Order field The Access annunciator light will light while the SSD Update order is in progress If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel SSD Update Order Successful will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen The test set and the mobile station now share common secret data and further call processing functions with authentication can be tested If the order failed then SSD Update Order Failed will appear on the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Page a Mobile Station with Authentication Paging A Mobile Station That Has Registered With The Test Set 1 2 ja pi Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information
247. d to set two values e The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off The level at the AUDIO OUT con nector is always in volts rms for standard sinewave operation across a low impedance output If the signaling option is installed the sinewave can be set in units of rms or peak This is done in the Sine Units field for the Function Generator When non sinewave waveforms are used or if the upper field is set to AM or FM the level is always expressed as a peak value See Also Function Generator Encoder on page 400 RF Generator amplitude adjusts the amplitude of the RF Generator Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens If a microphone is connected and the amplitude is off keying the microphone causes the Amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the microphone is no longer keyed See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 497 iain wenu Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions Atten Hold Attenuator hold prevents the fixed RF output attenuators from switching in and out eliminating the loss of the output signal as the level is changed This function is helpful when making squelch measurements Operating Considerations When this
248. d you are using You can change the values using the DATA keys lists the relative amplitude for each tone Amplitude is based on a percentage of the level shown in the AFGen2 To field This area performs two functions The Symbol Sequence field at the top of the screen is used to enter and edit the tone sequence The sequence uses the symbol numbers Sym listed in the Symbol Def inition table A total of 16 symbols can be entered Below the Symbol Sequence is the sequence on off times table This table contains three entries Seq Num identifies which position in the Symbol Sequence is affected by the On and Off times listed On Time specifies the length of time a tone is output during the sequence Off Time specifies the length of time a tone is off before the next tone in the sequence is output Operating Considerations The symbol numbers can be entered directly using the DATA keys or by using the Choices menu that appears when this field is selected The Choices menu is also used to edit an existing sequence The on and off times are changed using the DATA keys 441 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Tone Sequence Encoder 442 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu 11 Help Screen ain wenu 443 Chapter 11 Help Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions The HELP screen is used to access tutorial information for a wide variety
249. dd Info 428 AFGen2 To 429 Alarm Level High 430 Alarm Level Low 430 Area 430 Audio Out 431 basic operation 328 Batt Save 431 BS Identity 431 Calling Channel Number 432 Data Rate 432 DUT 433 FM Coupling 433 Meas Ch 433 Meas Field Strength 434 Megmt Maint 434 MSN 434 Password 435 Phi Signal 434 Pre Emp 435 SIS Challenge 435 SIS Response 435 Standard 436 TCI 436 Traffic Area Alt 436 Traffic Area Main 437 Traffic Channel Alt Number 437 Traffic Channel Alt Power 437 Traffic Channel Main Number 438 Traffic Channel Main Power 438 view of 427 NMT tests base station 327 creating 332 manual 329 mobile station 327 mobile telephone exchange 327 programming 332 programming commands 337 programming example 334 335 programming file format 332 required settings 330 saving 333 stopping 326 terms and abbreviations 322 using external computer 335 Index using RAM 333 NO key 590 No Pk Avg Spectrum Analyzer screen 527 Nordic mobile telephone decoder 322 encoder 427 Normalize Spectrum Analyzer screen 526 Notch Coupl Configure screen 267 used with variable notch 112 notch filter gain 112 variable 112 Notch Freq AF Analyzer screen 112 Notch Gain AF Analyzer screen 112 NPC defined 287 NRVC Ord CALLP 167 Num Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 324 Num of Bits Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS mode 280 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mod
250. de LTR 311 Mode MPT 1327 317 Mode NAMPS NTACS 277 Mode NMT 322 ain wenu Index Mode Tone Seq 341 Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS mode AF Anl In 278 Arm Meas 278 Channel 278 Data hex 279 Gate Time 279 Input Level 279 Num of Bits 280 Polarity 280 Single Cont 281 Stop Meas 281 Trig Level 281 Trigger Pattern bin 281 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode AF Anl In 286 Arm Meas 287 Code oct 287 Data bin 287 Data Rate 287 Polarity 288 Stop Meas 289 Trig Level 289 Signaling Decoder screen CSCSS mode Input Level 288 Single Cont 289 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode AF Anl In 291 Arm Meas 291 Data Display 292 Data Rate 292 Display Page 292 Gate Time 293 Input Level 293 Number of Pages 293 Polarity 294 Single Cont 294 Stop Meas 294 Trig Level 294 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode AF Anl In 295 Arm Meas 295 Gate Time 296 Hi Tone 296 Input Level 297 Lo Tone 298 Off Time 298 On Time 298 Single Cont 298 Stop Meas 299 Sym 299 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode AF Anl In 301 Arm Meas 302 Data 302 Input Level 302 Polarity 302 Radio Repeater 303 RX Test 303 Single Cont 303 Standard 303 Stop Meas 303 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode AF Anl In 307 Arm Meas 308 Frequency 308 Gate Time 308 Input Level 308 Single Cont 309 Stop Meas 309 Trig Level 309 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode AF Anl In 311 Arm Meas
251. de or frequency for testing radios that have CTCSS Continuous Tone Controlled Squelch System squelch For example if your radio uses a CTCSS tone of 91 5 Hz you could enter the tone frequency in both RX and TX channel information fields as CT FR91 5 or you could enter the tone code itself as CT 22 The specific entries are described in your Agilent 11807E software manual When testing cellular radios the Channel Information is the channel number you are testing don t confuse this with the Chan field used to list channels on this screen When the cellular radio channel number is entered the Agilent 11807Esoftware automatically sets the channel frequencies when testing You do not need to enter the RX and TX frequencies because they correspond directly to the channel numbers Enter 1 in the RX and TX test frequency fields to have all subsequent channels ignored when testing is started Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen This field allows you to print the Test Set s screen image Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Test Parameters TESTS Test Parameters TESTS Test Parameters Porm Description Yalue Units Print All Bele Main Menu 0 000000 ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT More tstparam wmf Figure 134 The TESTS Test Parameters Screen Test Parameters are used to define operating and testing characteristics to match those of the radio being tested audio load impedan
252. der creates data streams using squarewaves For optimum waveform quality set this field to DC when using the AUDIO OUT connector This is especially beneficial at low data rates This field defines the number of data streams output each time Send is selected This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst This field defines the 3 digit octal code used to identify the radio being accessed This field specifies how fast the data stream is output in bits per second This setting is also used to determine the Turn Off Code frequency TOC frequency Hz Data Rate in bps Example 1000 bps 1 kHz Operating Considerations This field is also used by the CDCSS Signaling Decoder screen to approximate the data rate for the signal being decoded FM Coupling Polarity Send Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 CDCSS Encoder This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector Operating Considerations This field should be set to DC whenever the AFGen2 To field is set to FM this provides better modulation response at low data rates This setting determines the relationship between the data stream s logic levels and the effect on the modulated signal This function is helpful to restore the proper data polarity when the trans
253. des in dB between the high frequency and low frequency tone in each DTMF pair A positive value indicates a higher amplitude for the high frequency tones A negative value indicates a higher amplitude for the low frequency tones The amplitude of the combined tones is set in the AFGen2 To field Twist and Pre emphasis Interaction Twist and Pre emphasis affect the relative levels of the high and low tones within each symbol tone pair If pre emphasis is off twist sets the difference in deviation in dB between the high and low tones If twist is off pre emphasis places a 6 dB per octave difference in deviation between the high and low tones If both twist and pre emphasis are on the two effects are summed For most conditions set Twist to 2 5 dB Pre Emp on and 60 rated deviation 3 kHz for a typical 5 kHz deviation rated receiver Examples of Twist and Pre emphasis Interaction Example 1 3 kHz deviation Twist 0 dB Pre emphasis off The level of each low tone and high tone individually generate 1 5 kHz deviation The tones are summed to produce 3 kHz deviation Example 2 3 kHz deviation Twist 2 5 dB Pre emphasis off The high tone has 2 5 dB a factor of 1 334 more deviation than the low tone The two tones are summed to produce 3 kHz peak deviation Therefore the low tone s deviation is 1286 Hz and the high tone s deviation is 1714 Hz Example 3 3 kHz deviation Twist 0 dB Pre emphasis on There is a 6 dB per
254. diately after the de emphasis network of the AF Analyzer De emphasis can be turned on or off on the AF ANALYZER screen or can be controlled while using the decoder by assigning a global USER key to the De Emphasis field Refer to the AF ANALYZER screen s field descriptions and functional block diagram in Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen on page 103 Decoder Frequency Measurements The decoder uses a different timebase for frequency counting than the AF Analyzer Therefore their measurements may be different when measuring the same signal by a very small amount 276 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder The AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS decoder acts like a base station receiver by analyzing Reverse Control Channel RECC and Reverse Voice Channel RVC message streams for various cellular telephone formats The decoder can also be used to analyze Forward Control Channel FOCC and Forward Voice Channel FVC data from the base station Decoder Mode Differences The AMPS TACS and NAMPS NTACS Decoder modes are essentially the same for analyzing Reverse Control Channel RECC information However the Voice Channel RVC information for NAMPS NTACS is displayed differently than AMPS TACS information Fields and decoder measurements that are only used for either mode are noted in their descriptions
255. dicates that this is the first word of the system overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 205 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions SPC WORD2 Message Fields Figure 38 TIT2 DCC REGH 206 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Set Message SPC WORD2 System Parameter Overhead Message Hord 2 TiT2 occ S E REGH REGR DTX N 1 10 0 10 0 REF CPA CMAX 1 END OHD Pari E 0011001 SPC WORD2 Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message Digital color code field This field displays whether the serial number word is sent to the mobile station e Set to 1 if the serial number word is sent e Set to 0 if the serial number word is not sent This field displays the extended address word sent to the mobile e Set to 1 if the extended address word is sent e Set to 0 if the extended address word is not sent Registration field for home stations Main Menu REGR DTX RCF CPA CMAX 1 END OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Registration field for roaming stations Discont
256. ding Programs Once programs are entered into the Test Set s IBASIC Controller s RAM and saved on mass storage they can be retrieved and run from the NMT Decoder Downloading A Program Into IBASIC Controller RAM To copy a program from your BASIC computer to the Test Set s RAM follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Connect an GPIB cable from your BASIC computer to the Test Set Load the program into your computer Set the GPIB Mode field in the I O CONFIGURE screen to Talk amp Listen Enter the following commands on your computer OUTPUT Addr PROG DEL OUTPUT Addr PROG DEF 0 LIST Addr OUTPUT Addr END Addr is the GPIB address of the Test Set The END statement indicates that EOI is asserted with the last byte sent Refer to IEEE 488 2 standards for more information NOTE Although your NMT program is now in the Test Set s IBASIC program RAM it cannot be run from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen since IBASIC does not recognize the NMT commands You must copy the program to mass storage before it can be run in the decoder Copying Programs to Mass Storage Programs copied to RAM disk external disk or memory cards require specific initialization and configuration procedures for proper storage and retrieval Refer to the Programmer s Guide 336 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests
257. e DSCC DSAT color code for the new channel Also represents SCC for handoff to a wide analog channel PDSCC Present DSAT color code Indicates the DAST color code associated with the present channel CTYP Channel type indicator OE The Odd Even data field is used for adjacent channel protection RSVD Reserved for future use 246 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu C13 C12 VMAC CHAN Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Channel number bit 13 set 10 kHz above channel number in CHAN Field Channel number bit 12 set 10 kHz below channel number in CHAN Field This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station power level associated with the designated voice channel Channel number field Indicates the designated RF channel Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 247 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL BIT Screen Using the CALL BIT Screen Selecting The Message Content Generation Method The contents i e bit patterns of the signaling messages sent to the mobile station on the forward control channel and the forward voice channel are generated using one of two methods Method 1 uses the formats defined in the applicable industry standard to build the contents of the signaling mes
258. e 326 Tests Execution Conditions screen 547 Tests Main Menu screen 533 Tests Printer Setup screen 553 RVC AMPS TACS 282 measurements AMPS TACS 284 measurements NAMPS NTACS 285 NAMPS NTACS 282 RVCBSChal CALLP 167 RVCOrd CALLP 167 RVCOrdCon CALLP 167 messages 178 180 181 182 183 185 186 RX key 592 RX Test Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 303 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 392 RX Test screen AC Level 506 AF Freq 510 AFGen1 Freq 506 AFGen1 To 507 AFGen2 Freq 506 AFGen2 To 507 Amplitude 508 Atten Hold 508 Current 510 DC Level 510 Distn 510 Ext Load R 508 Filter 1 and Filter 2 509 functional block diagram 505 Output Port 509 priority settings 56 RF Gen Freq 509 SINAD 510 SNR 510 view of 505 RX TX Cntl Configure screen 273 S s 387 440 S battery save 331 sampling AF counter 106 RF counter 486 SAT Call Control screen 139 SAT color code 139 SAT Freq Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 372 Sat Tol CALL CONFIGURE 260 save example 80 instrument setups 79 settings 79 SAVE key 592 using 79 Save Recall V OConfigure screen 449 saving instrument setups 79 saving settings 79 scale for oscilloscope 456 SCC 139 scientific notation entering numbers 590 SCM Call Control screen 139 scope horizontal sweep 455 input 461 level markers 457 markers 457 triggering display 459 vertical offset 455 Scope
259. e There is no coupling between the Bits mode and the Test Set For example if a mobile station was actively connected to the Test Set on a voice channel and the user changed the CHAN field on the forward voice channel mobile station control message FVC V Mes and sent that message to the mobile station the mobile station would change its voice channel assignment However the Test Set will stay on the voice channel assignment specified in the Chan field on the CALL CONTROL screen This situation will result in a dropped call The Bits mode should not be used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing Subsystem screen 248 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL BIT Screen System Operation When Data Spec Field Set to Std When the Data Spec field is set to Std the Test Set builds the signaling messages by first examining the fields which contain the information needed to build the messages i e SID BIS SAT Tone VMAC etc After obtaining the necessary information the Test Set builds the bit patterns according to the signaling formats specified in the applicable industry standard For example if the type of cellular system being emulated is AMPS and the SID field on the CALL PROC screen was set to 231 the SID1 field in the System Parameter Overhead Message SPC WORD1 would be set to 00000001110011 the 14 most significant
260. e 113 Tests Printer Setup screen 552 squelch effects 487 Output Results To triggering display 459 Tests Execution Conditions screen Duplex Test screen 356 RF Generator screen 499 RX Test screen 509 Spectrum Analyzer screen 520 Oscilloscope screen 546 Auto Norm 458 Cont Single 459 Controls 454 at ANT IN 61 572 Internal 458 at RF IN OUT connector 99 355 486 Level div 459 567 Lvl marker 457 damage 40 Main menu 455 damage at ANT IN connector 99 116 Marker menu 456 355 358 486 490 518 567 569 Marker To 456 damage at DUPLEX OUT 356 499 Position 456 509 520 Pre Trig 459 warning 99 355 486 567 Time marker 457 overview of operation 55 Time div 455 Trigger menu 458 Vert Offset 455 Vert div 455 view of 454 Tests Printer Setup screen 552 overpower Oscilloscopescreen Trig Delay 460 output coupling 352 363 376 381 386 390 401 404 431 439 498 data stream 377 data radio interface 472 digital paging data stream 384 FOCC 372 FVC 372 RF 356 499 509 520 522 tone sequence 387 440 tracking generator 522 Output Data Radio Interface screen 472 Output Heading Tests Execution Conditions screen 546 Tests Printer Setup screen 552 Output Port ain wenu P Page Call Control screen 137 Call Data screen 169 202 page selecting 292 Page annunciator Call Control screen 138 Call Data screen 170 202
261. e 280 Number of Pages Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 293 numbers changing 66 decimal format 66 entering 66 hexadecimal format 67 scientific notation 590 numeric entries 66 ain wenu 647 o octal code for CDCSS encoder 376 Off Time Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 298 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 343 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 386 Tone Sequence encoder 441 offset example 87 for dc bias 498 frequency receiver transmitter 266 frequency RF generator analyzer 266 frequency tracking generator 522 measurement zeroing 107 RF generator analyzer 272 RF level 271 setting frequency 87 tracking generator 521 vertical oscilloscope 455 457 Offset Freq Tracking Gen Spectrum Analyzer screen 522 off the air measurements 99 355 486 567 572 On Time Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 298 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 343 Signaling Encoder screen mode 386 tone sequence 441 ON OFF key 590 operating basics 55 operation messages 620 Options Tests External Devices screen 550 options adding 596 Order Call Control screen 137 141 Call Data screen 169 202 origination call 150 oscilloscope display 456 DTMF 648 Index input 461 input attenuator 111 485 level markers 457 marker types 456 markers level 457 Output Results For resolution 113 Tests Execution Conditions screen scale 456 547 signal sourc
262. e NMT Encoder Meas Field Strength This field specifies the Phi Signal strength measurement that is sent from the BS to the MTX Valid Entry Range 0 through 99 NMT Frames Affected 26 Megmt Maint The management maintenance field is used to send system status information Valid Entry Range 000000 through FFFFFF hex NMT Frames Affected 22 27 28 MSN The mobile subscriber number field specifies the unique seven digit code that identifies an MS Valid Entry Range 0000000 through FFFFFFF hex NMT Frames Affected 2a 2a 2a 2b 2b 2b 2c 2c 2c 2d 2d 2d 2e 2f 3al 3a2 3b 3bTA2 3bTC2 3c 3d 3dTA2 5a 5b 10a 10aAC 10b 10c 10d 11 11a 11b 12 13a 13b 14a 14b Phi Signal This field specifies the F Phi signal frequency Valid Entry Range 0 through F hex NMT Frames Affected 20 21b 21c 25 26 434 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encosern th Main Menu Password Pre Emp SIS Challenge SIS Response Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder This field specifies the 3 digit code added to the end of the MSN to prevent unauthorized use of a subscriber number Valid Entry Range 000 through FFF hex NMT Frames Affected 10b 10c 11a 12 Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard Pre emphasis when used attenuates the lower frequency tone 1200 Hz at 1200 b
263. e data level The voltage on this pin determines the high output voltage and input logic thresh olds of the parallel data strobe and interrupt pins Either 12 volts or 5 volts is supplied by the radio under test to indicate the HI 1 logic level it uses for serial parallel communications If no signal is supplied the logic level defaults to 5 volts The load that this pin presents to an external voltage source depends on how many lines are pulled low Input range is 5 1 to 20 V de Load at maximum current all lines pulled low is 145Q 10 No connection 11 Parallel Strobe Out This pin outputs a digital pulse to indicate when data is output on the parallel data pins The leading edge occurs when the pins change state But to allow for settling time the external device should latch on the level of the pulse or the trailing edge The strobe can be set to go high or low with the Strobe Pol field on the RADIO INTERFACE screen The output level and current sink capability is the same as the parallel data pins Strobe pulse width is 5 us typical Logic Sense is programmable high or low 12 Interrupt Input 1 The interrupt lines can be used together or independently The lines must be armed for the Test Set to sense an interrupt This is done in the Interrupt 1 or In terrupt 2 fields on the RADIO INTERFACE screen When an armed interrupt is pulled low the Interrupt lorInterrupt 2 fields will show that the in terrupt is Trip
264. e 1 543 ain wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Save Delete Procedure Select Procedure Location 544 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestscrn fh Main Menu This field is used the select where a new procedure will be saved or the location from which a procedure will be deleted Procedures can be saved to or deleted from disk card or RAM Operating Considerations Procedure files contain a subset of the library file This is where you save all of your own frequency parameter test sequence specification and system configuration information A procedure file is not a directly executable file for Agilent 11807 tests it requires the code and library files to be present before running To save a file to an external disk drive you must enter the drive s GPIB address into the External Disk Specification field on the TESTS External Devices screen Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Execution Conditions TESTS Execution Conditions TESTS Execution Conditions i WIMMER TO CONTROL raCarntinue Output Results Tot Ert Printer Qutrut Results For SE Qutput Headinat dhain Menu To Screen TO CONTROL RUN TEST If Unit Under Test Foils Cio Ht i hues Stor SLUF Test Procedure Run Mode SPEC AHL ENCODER DECODER Continuous Sinale Ster Autostart Test Procedure on Power Up Off On Nore 5 tstexec wmf Figure 138 The TESTS Execution Co
265. e 8 on page 60 63 iain Mo Chapter 3 Operating Overview Displaying Measurements To Change the Measurement s Unit of Measure 1 Position the cursor in front of the present unit of measurement 2 Press the key labeled with the desired unit All measurements allow you to change the associated unit of measure For instance the TX Power measurement is usually displayed in Watts but can be changed to display in mW dBm V mV or dBuV Select mW by pressing SHIFT ENTER For example to display transmitter power in units of dBm instead of Watts 1 Move the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the TX Power measurement W 2 Press the dBm key The measurement value is changed immediately to display in dBm 64 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Displaying Measurements To Use the Analog METER Format To display measurement results using the analog meter format use the following procedure 1 3 4 5 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the measurement you want to dis play Press and release the SHIFT key then the INCR SET key to display the Meters menu in the lower right corner of the screen Select On Off to display the meter Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter each meter end point and the meter intervals Repeat steps 1 2 and 3 to cancel the METER function The METER function displays an equivalent analog displ
266. e AF ANALYZER screen and set the De Emphasis field setting to Off See Also Trig Level on page 294 See the Display Page on page 292 293 ain Mon Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Digital Paging Decoder Polarity Single Cont Stop Meas Trig Level 294 This setting is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being analyzed Normal Operation When this field is set to Norm a logical high 1 is displayed when a positive peak in the received signal is detected A negative peak displays a logical low 0 Inverted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 is displayed when a negative peak in the received signal is detected A positive peak displays a logical low 0 This field specifies how long you want the analyzer to decode incoming signals e Single tells the analyzer to display the information received during one gate time Measurements are displayed until Arm Meas is selected again e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display new measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected Previous measurement results are over writ ten by subsequent measurements Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement that has been armed The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field setting S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BO
267. e CONFIGURE screen then select Service from the To Screen menu in the bottom right corner 511 ain wenu Chapter 20 Service Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions Counter Connection Frequency Gate Time Latch RAM Initialize Value 512 MA This field selects the desired circuit node to connect to the frequency counter This measurement field displays the frequency measurement for the circuit node shown in the Counter Connection field This field is used to adjust the frequency counter s gate time A shorter gate time may enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a longer gate time This field is used to alter the circuit latches that control a variety of operations The value of the selected latch is displayed and changed in the Value field Selecting this field clears all SAVE registers and test programs that may be in RAM and resets all latches to their factory power up configuration Operating Considerations If you have saved one or more instrument setups using the SAVE function using this function will permanently remove them This field displays and changes the value for the latch shown in the Latch field Chapter 20 Service Screen Field Descriptions Voltage This measurement field displays the voltage measurement for the circuit node shown in the Voltmeter Connection field Voltmeter Connection This field selects the desired circuit node
268. e DISPlay subsystem Knob Access to Screens Front Panel Key Access to Screens AM SCREEN CONTROL M ja INSTRUMENT STATE d MSSG HELP CONFIG HOLD PRINT ADRS SAVE ca USER IN AMDATA FUNCTIONS I 2 DATA ME O Knob a oma nn m Access to Zn urn IE M I Additional we SO Screens ae Ea En e Er AAN N gt Set Up the Al am nen Instrument Screen zonou s4 with the Cursor Moves Cursor Selects Choice Figure 2 Accessing the Screens 42 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIgetstart fb Main Menu Chapter 1 Get Started Changing A Field s Setting Changing A Field s Setting Figure 3 There are several types of CRT display fields in the Test Set This section describes some of the different types of fields 3 1 RR TEST dB AC Level Ea m 5 me 24 0 00009 RF Gen Frea AFGenid Frea AFGen2 Frea Filter 1 To Screen EED ET ea RF GEN MHz kHz kHz RF AHL AF AHL Anplitude AFGeni To AFGen To i SCOPE in i FH SkHz LP SPEC A Jen off ENCODER Atten Hold DECODER METE RADIO IHT Output Port RF Out Durl intro4 wm 2 4 5 Different Types of Fields 43 Chapter 1 Get Started Changing A Field s Setting Unit of Measure Field Unit of measure can be changed to display measurements in different values or magnitudes See item 1
269. e FM or CW signals with increased measurement speed This method can only be used with signals having no amplitude modulation component Operating Considerations If you change this field zero the power measurement using the TX Pwr Zero field before measuring power The transmitter power zero function establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring RF power at the RF IN OUT port CAUTION RF power must not be applied while zeroing Set the RF GENERATOR screen Amplitude field to off to prevent internal cross coupling into the power detector while zeroing 570 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItxtsern fh Operating Considerations When power is applied to the RF IN OUT connector the temperature of the internal circuitry increases This can cause changes in the TX Power measurement when low power levels are measured immediately following high power measurements When alternately making high and low power measurements always zero the power meter immediately before making the low power measurements this provides the best measurement accuracy Main Menu 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions ain wenu 571 Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions Connector Descriptions ANTIN The antenna input is used for analyzing low power RF signals lt 200 mWatts and is typically used for off the air measurements This port can be selected in the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST
270. e Oscilloscope Selecting the Oscilloscope s Input The oscilloscope s input is determined by theAF Anl In field setting in the AF ANALYZER TX TEST or DUPLEX TEST screens Figure 114 Oscilloscope Input Indicator Using the Scope To Field The Scope To field in the AF ANALYZER screen allows you to look at the signal at different stages in the AF Analyzer s process Refer to the AF ANALYZER screen description to understand the different Scope To choices Except for the Input setting all the choices are capacitively coupled If the signal to be measured is lt 1 Hz use the Input setting to provide the needed dc coupling 461 ain wenu Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Using the Oscilloscope 462 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS oscscrn fh in Menu 15 Print Configure Screen This screen configures the Test Set to print screen images with your printer Images are printed using either the front panel PRINT function see Printing a Screen in volume 1 or the Print All USER key available on some TESTS environment screens Refer to your Agilent 11807 software manual for information on how to use your printer to print automated test results 463 ain wenu Chapter 15 Print Configure Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions PRINT CONFIGURE Print Data Destination PRINTER eAbort Print PRINT SETUP PAGE CONTROL Model Lines Poaet AThinkdet 60 Printer
271. e Printer displays test results on the Test Set s CRT and outputs them to a printer The printer information must first be entered on the TESTS Printer Setup screen S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestsern fh Main Menu Output Results For Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Execution Conditions This field selects which test results are output The underlined entry is the active choice All outputs all test results on to the location selected in the Output Results To field Failures outputs only the results of tests which fail Run Test Selecting this field loads and runs the test chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field on the TESTS Main Menu screen Test Procedure Run Mode This field selects how the test will be run The underlined entry is the active choice Continuous runs the tests in the test sequence one after another without stopping Testing pauses only if the operator is required to interact with the UUT or Test Set In teractions such as changing UUT channels and setting squelch and audio levels cause testing to pause Selecting Stop inthe If Unit Under Test Fails field may also stop a test Single Step runs the tests in the test sequence one at a time The operator is prompt ed to press Continue to proceed with testing 547 Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS External Devices TESTS External Devices TESTS External Devices Callina Home Model Options External Disk
272. e TX RF Power or ACP Level on this screen using the ANT IN port Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it Lower and Upper ACP Ratio Level These two measurements display the amount of power in signals above and below the Tune Freq signal The level is displayed as a ratio referenced to the power around the Tune Freq or as an absolute value See Also ACP Meas on page 95 99 Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions Res BW Tune Freq Tune Mode 100 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS aepscrn fh Main Menu The resolution bandwidth field selects the IF filter used when measuring the power of the carrier and the adjacent channels Operating Considerations Using a narrower bandwidth filter 300 Hz slows the measurement but rejects carrier leakage and out of channel spurs Using a wider bandwidth filter 1 kHz speeds measurements but may allow unwanted spurs and carrier leakage to be integrated into the measurement when measuring at the edges of the selected channel bandwidth This field sets the center frequency for the RF sign
273. e Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel The right hand field highlighted field is used to enter the voice channel number which will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial voice channel assignment or as a handoff voice channel assignment This field is displayed only for the NAMPS system type CH Loc is divided into two fields The left hand field displays the current narrow analog channel location assignment in relation to the standard wide analog channel A range of U M L or Wis only displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel The right hand field highlighted field is used to enter the channel location range which will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial channel location range assignment or as a handoff channel location range assignment 129 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen Cntl Channel This field is used to set the control channel number used by the Test Set The Cnt1 Channel field is an immediate action field That is whenever the Cntl Channel field is changed the change is reflected immediately in the physical configuration of the Test Set the control channel is immediately de ac
274. e mobile station is then handed off again by sending the modified message to the mobile station from the CALL BIT screen 1 2 IAM RP amp 10 11 12 13 252 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the Chan field and enter a new valid voice channel number Select the Pwr Lv1 field enter a new valid mobile station power level Select the SAT field and enter a new valid SAT frequency Select the Handoff field The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with the handoff information If the mobile responds properly it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel switch to the new voice channel assignment and transpond the new SAT frequency assignment When the Test Set detects that this has happened the Connect annunciator is lit indicating that the handoff was successful The left hand fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section will be updated with the new voice channel assignment information Select CALL BIT from the To Screen menu The CALL BIT screen will be displayed Position the cursor o
275. e purpose for the high sensitivity setting is to allow you to look and listen to very low level signals when absolute accuracy is not essential See Also Sensitivity on page 527 Sets the span of frequencies to be displayed on the screen Operating Considerations When the Tracking Generator is used the span also defines the frequency sweep range Spans gt 1 5 MHz disable the AF Analyzer when the analyzer s AF Anl In field is set to FM Demod AM Demod or SSB Demod This disables all the AF Analyzer s measurement and output functions When the AF Analyzer s AF Anl In field is set to any of the other available inputs such as Audio In or Ext Mod the speaker and AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT are not affected when the Spectrum Analyzer s span is changed Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions RF Generator Menu Fields Fixed Operation Controls RF Gen Frea Amplitude Output Port EEEIEE a Dur Tun MHz sascrn3 wmf Figure 127 Using the Spectrum Analyzer with the RF Generator Amplitude This field sets the amplitude of the RF Generator Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST screen overrides the Amplitude setting on this screen If a microphone is connected and the amplitude is off keying the microphone causes the amplitude to turn on to its previous level until the microphone is no longer keyed See Also Interaction Between Screens
276. e settings in case you need to clear them from memory see Memory Considerations on page 82 for running large programs or when a firmware upgrade is performed see Save Recall on page 449 To Save an Instrument Setup Use the More menu to access the I O CONFIGURE screen 1 Select the storage media using the Save Recall field The default is internal mem ory p Make any changes to the instrument that you want to save in a register 3 Press and release the SHIFT key then the RECALL key to access the SAVE function 4 Use the DATA keys or the Save menu at the bottom right of the screen to enter the reg ister s name To Recall an Instrument Setup Use the More menu to access the I O CONFIGURE screen 1 Select the media to recall settings from using the Save Recall field The default is internal memory 2 Press RECALL 3 Use the knob to select the desired setup to be recalled from the Recall menu at the bottom right of the screen 79 an wenu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups Example of Saving and Recalling an Instrument Setup This example SAVES changes made to the RX TEST screen and then RECALLS them The register is saved to wherever the Save Recall field is set internal memory unless you have changed it 1 2 3 Access the RX TEST screen and set the RF Gen Freq to 500 MHz Set Amplitude to 35 dBm Press and release the SHIFT key then the RECALL
277. e that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Ensure that the Test Set has Initialized Call Processing with Authentication See Initialize Call Processing with Authentication on page 155 for information on how to register the mobile station and activate Authentication Ensure that the mobile station is assigned an active voice channel See Page a Mobile Station with Authentication on page 157 Select AUTHEN from the To Screen menu The AUTHENTICATION screen will be displayed Select the RAND_U field Enter a new valid RAND_U value 6 digit hexadecimal Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select Uniq Ch from the VC Order field The Access annunciator light will light while the Unique Challenge order is in progress If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel Unique Challenge Successful will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen If the order failed then Unique Challe
278. each time Send is selected This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst Enter the LTR signaling data rate used for your radio The standard and default value is 297 6 bits per second This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from the LTR Encoder s modulation source This field should be set to DC when testing trunked radios This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector Free 1 Free 2 Goto 1 Goto 2 Home 1 Home2 ID 1 1D 2 LTR message Polarity Send Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 LTR Encoder Enter the repeater number to transmit to when the radio is keyed When channel switching is performed you would specify any of the other repeaters in the system Enter the repeater number to receive when the message is sent Enter the home repeater number programmed into your radio Enter the transmit or receive ID number programmed into your radio This field selects which message Messagel or Message2 is output when Send is selected The underlined message is output This setting determines the relationship between the LTR Encoder s data stream logic levels and the effect on the modulated signal When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative A logical low 0 causes the level to become positive by the same
279. ected la la 1a 1aS 1a S 1a S 1b 1bS 2a 2a 2a 2b 2b 2b 2c 2c 2c 2d 2d 2d 2e 2f 10a 10d 1 1b Data Rate This field specifies the rate that the frames are output in bits per second This field also sets the data rate expected by the NMT Decoder Valid Entry Range 9 2 through 2400 432 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrn_th Main Menu DUT FM Coupling Meas Ch Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder The device under test field defines the device you are testing Valid Entries MS BS MTX NMT Frames Affected None Operating Considerations This field affects the RF generator and analyzer frequencies used for the NMT TCHAN and RCHAN program commands This field also affects how frames are interpreted by the decoder when determining the type of frame being received This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector The measurement channel number field specifies the channel whose signal strength is measured Valid Entry Range through 2023 NMT Frames Affected 21b 21c 26 See Also Calling Channel Number on page 432 433 iain wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephon
280. ected on a voice channel e The right hand field highlighted field is used to enter the Voice Mobile Attenuation Code VMAC The VMAC determines the mobile station s power level to be used on the voice channel See Chan on page 129 for more information about the voice channel This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station that is connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is Active annunciator must be lit and the MS Id information must be entered before you can attempt to page the mobile station 137 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen Page Phone Num CAUTION NOTE Register Register Release 138 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh When lit the Page annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is currently being paged on the forward control channel This field displays the decoded MIN number received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The Phone Num field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded Do not confuse the Phone Num field which is displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen with the Phone Num selection of the MS Id field An all zero MIN number 000000000 wh
281. ed 373 ain wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Using This Information This screen is used to create various types of cellular telephone data streams Selecting the Standards field displays a list of the supported signaling formats The theory and applications of cellular telephone systems are beyond the scope of this manual The field descriptions describe their basic functions and are not intended to be used as tutorial information If additional information is needed refer to the many technical manuals available on the subject of cellular telephones Automated Test Software Agilent Technologies offers software packages to test your cellular phone in a fraction of the time normally required for manual testing You can choose any combination of tests from full parametric testing to a single test The software is shipped on a memory card that inserts directly into your Test Set and it comes with complete documentation and a blank SRAM memory card for storing your test procedures and test data Encoder Decoder Interaction The AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder acts like a base station transmitter creating Forward Control and Voice channel information FOCC FVC The AMPS NAMPS TACS NTACS Decoder acts like a base station receiver analyzing Reverse Control and Voice channel signals RECC RVC The decoder uses the encoder
282. ed word can be selected first then the mobile station can be paged If the page is successful the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The page does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA screen When the CALL DATA screen is viewed the contents of the display words will be the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registration origination page release order 190 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen Viewing the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Page to a Mobile Station That Has Not Registered with the Test Set 1 2 10 11 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select the lower MS Id field Enter the mobile station identification number either the phone number or the MIN number depend
283. ed entry is the active choice e Crt displays test results on the Test Set s CRT e Printer displays test results on the Test Set s CRT and outputs them to a printer This field selects which test results are output The underlined entry is the active choice e All outputs all test results on to the location selected in the Output Results To field e Failures outputs only the results of tests which fail S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestsern fh Main Menu Printer Address Printer Port Run Test Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Printer Setup This field is used to specify the address of an GPIB printer This field is only displayed if the Printer Port field is set to HPIB This field is used to select the port your printer is connected to Selecting this field loads and runs the test chosen in the Select Procedure Filename field on the TESTS Main Menu screen 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 553 an wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS IBASIC Controller TESTS IBASIC Controller TESTS IBASIC Controller iain Nenu To Screen RF GEH RF AHL AF ANL SCOPE SPEC ANL ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT tstibasc wmf Figure 141 The TESTS IBASIC Controller Screen The IBASIC controller is used to run IBASIC programs This screen is also used as a stand
284. ed for the mobile station to con nect with the Test Set Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel 1 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Selectthe Active field The Active annunciator will light when the control channel is turned on Register a Mobile Station 1 Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel on page 145 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mo bile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the Register field The Register annunciator will light while the registration is in process If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash mo
285. ed through internal 3 16 k ohm pull up resistors When data is input the voltage comparator s reference voltage is determined by the Logic Voltage applied to a resistive divider The formulas for calculating logic levels are shown below The default values are calculated in the examples and if these are not compatible with the device that is sending receiving data connect an external power supply to pin 9 At levels above 5 1 V the external power supply will reverse bias a steering diode and turn off the default Logic Voltage See Figure 117 on page 474 473 ain wenu Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation Input Data Line 1 of 16 Output Data Line 1 of 16 Pin 9 Logic Voltage gt 56 2k FixedRef 3 16 k erence Pins 19 34 l LM 339M I Parallel En oii 316k LM339M DPM Output Data Data Out Voltage Figure 117 For data input use the following formula to determine the logic threshold voltage Logic Voltage 0 7 x 0 34 Vinreshold For example the default Logic Voltage of 5 1 V would give 4 4x0 34 1 5V A 12 5 V supply connected to the Logic Voltage pin 9 would give 11 8x0 34 4V For data output calculate the logic high level using this formula Logic Voltage 0 7 through a 3 16 k ohm pull up resistor A logic low on the data output will be near 0 V depending on the amount of current the comparator is sinking For example if the output current is 4 mA the output v
286. efer to the main traffic channel TC2 and TCA refer to the alternate traffic channel AC refers to the access channel S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests SEND f Send the designated frame f Valid entries for the parameter f are as follows 1A 1A or LAP 1A or LAPP LAS 1A S or LAPS 1A S or 1APPS 1B 1BS 1BTA1 1BTA2 2A 2A or 2AP 2A or 2APP 2B 2B or 2BP 2B or 2BPP 2C 2C or 2CP 2C or 2CPP 2D 2D or 2DP 2D or 2DPP 2E 2F 3A 3Al 3A2 3B 3BTA2 3BTC2 3C 3D 3DTA2 4 4TA2 4B 4BTA2 5B 6 7 10A 10AAC 10B 10C 10D 11 11A 11B 12 13B 15 16 21B 21C 22 26 27 28 and 30 Some of these frame types are only valid for certain NMT Standards This will be checked when the program is run SEND fn Send the designated frame f with the signal n Valid entries for the parameter f with parameters n are as follows Table 9 Valid Channel Assignments f n 5a 13a Line signal number 0 to 15 or 0 to F hex 14a 14b Digit signal value 0 to 13 A to D 10 to 13 and 20 Channel activation order 0 to 15 or 0 to F hex 25 Channel status information 0 to 15 or 0 to F hex IF fl If the received frame register contains the frame f go to label I Valid entries for the parameter f include all the valid entries for f in the two SEND statements however the speci
287. en Field Descriptions Gen Anl Gen Anl User Defined Intensity 266 Tr This field is used with the RF Offset field to specify the amount of frequency offset between the RF Generator and RF Analyzer This field is not displayed when the RF Display field is set to Chan the offset is automatically set when using channel tuning See Also Setting an RF Generator Analyzer Offset on page 87 This field defines the receiver transmitter frequency offset when using User Defined channel operation Use a positive value when the radio s receive frequency is higher than the transmit frequency such as 45 MHz Use a negative value when the radio s receive frequency is lower than the transmit frequency such as 45 MHz Operating Considerations The value of this field is only used if the RF Display field is set to Chan and the RF Chan Std field is set to USER DEF See Also Chan Space User Defined on page 264 RF Chan Std on page 269 RF Display on page 270 This field adjusts the screen intensity from a setting of 1 very dim to 8 bright If the setting is set too low the screen can no longer be read If you can t read the screen and you don t know where the cursor is or even what screen is displayed press PRESET and re access the CONFIGURE screen The cursor automatically goes to this field at that point Press 8 ENTER to set the maximum intensity and re adjust if de
288. en Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 Damage to internal components may result 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 578 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS connkeys fb Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions To Use the Microphone To modulate the RF Generator using the optional microphone Agilent part number 08920 61059 Connect the microphone to the MIC ACC connector Access the RFGENERATOR screen Enter the carrier frequency in the RF Gen Freq field Enter the RF Generator s Amplitude Select the Output Port RF IN OUT or DUPLEX OUT Connect the selected output port to your receiver or antenna aA a PF YS SP Using the Mod In To field e select the type of modulation FM Vpk e enter the modulation sensitivity to a 1 Vpeak signal usually 1 kHz for microphone use See Mod In To on page 499 8 Key the microphone to transmit MIC ACC Operating Considerations Mic In specifications Input impedance 100 kQ Maximum input level 10 V peak Full scale input 10 mV Bandwidth is limited to 3 kHz The Mic In signal is filtered and amplified to provide a stable deviation limited signal to the RF Generator 750 us microphone pre emphasis is selected in the RF GENERATOR screen 579 Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector
289. en different decoded messages can be viewed on this screen The message to be viewed is selected using the Display Word field 166 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen The messages which can be viewed are Reverse Control Channel Messages for Paging Origination Orders and Order Confir mation RECCW A Word A Abbreviated Address Word RECCW B Word B Extended Address Word RECCW C Word C Serial Number Word RECCW D Word D First Word of the Called Address RECCW E Word E Second Word of the Called Address Reverse Voice Channel Messages for Order Confirmation RVCOrdCon Reverse Voice Channel Order Confirmation Message Reverse Control Channel Authentication Messages BSChalOrd Word C Base Station Challenge Word AuthWORD Word C Authentication Word UniqChCon Word C Unique Challenge Order Confirmation Word Reverse Voice Channel Authentication Messages RVCOrd Word one Reverse Voice Channel Generic Order RVCBSChal Word 2 Reverse Voice Channel Base Station Challenge Order NAMPS Reverse Voice Channel Messages NRVC Ord Narrow Order or Order Confirmation Message The field descriptions for each of the decoded messages are given in the CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 When the CALL DATA screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connected state the Test Set constan
290. en menu 93 ain wenu Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power ACP How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power ACP When you access this screen the Test Set automatically starts a multi step process for measuring ACP 1 AF Generator is turned off if the Carrier Ref field is set to Unmod 2 The amplitude of the center frequency Tune Freq is measured to establish a reference 3 AF Generator 1 is turned back on if it was previously turned off 4 The power in each of the adjacent channels is analyzed 5 Adjacent Channel Power is calculated and displayed This value can be displayed as an absolute power level or as a ratio referenced to the center frequency s level Which Input Port to Use The TX Power measurement is used to calculate absolute Adjacent Channel Power Since TX Power can only be measured using the RF IN OUT port you must use this port to measure ACP Level ACP Ratio can be measured using either the RF IN OUT or the ANT IN port Measuring ACP on AM Transmitters When measuring AM signals the reference level must be measured on an unmodulated carrier so the Carrier Ref field must be set to Unmod After the reference is measured the power in the adjacent channels must be mea sured with modulation This requires the modulating signal to be turned off and on repeat edly as measurements are being calculated and displayed Since the Test Set autom
291. er low level RF power at the antenna port can be measured using the Spectrum Analyzer Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the over power circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press MEAS RESET or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it RF counter gate specifies how long the RF counter samples the signal before displaying the frequency Specifying a shorter gate time may enable you to see frequency fluctuations that might not be seen using a longer gate time 1 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSTrfansern fh Main Menu Sensitivity Squelch Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions RF Analyzer sensitivity adds about 6 dB of sensitivity for the ANT IN port when High is selected Operating Considerations Selecting High sensitivity may cause Spectrum Analyzer measurements to be uncalibrated when the ANT IN port is used a message appears when this occurs High level AM measurements may be distorted when high sensitivity is used with the ANT IN port This setting determines the squelch operation when demodulating FM AM or SSB signals Three settings are available e Pot uses the front panel SQUELCH knob for squel
292. erator 402 up arrow key 591 upgrades firmware 598 hardware 596 Upper Limit Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 541 User Def Base Freq Configure screen 263 user keys assigning global 86 assigning local 85 clearing global assignment 86 clearing local assignment 85 deleting global assignment 86 deleting local assignment 85 example 85 explanation 83 global assignment 86 global defined 83 local assignment 85 local defined 83 preassigned 84 releasing global assignment 86 releasing local assignment 85 setting global 86 setting local 85 ain wenu Index Vv v displaying results in 64 V volts displaying results in 64 Value Service screen 512 variable frequency notch filter 112 version number firmware 265 Vert Offset Oscilloscope screen 455 Vert div Oscilloscope screen 455 vertical offset oscilloscope 455 457 vertical sensitivity oscilloscope 455 video averaging spectrum analyzer 527 VMAC power level 137 voice channel assignment 129 voice channel decoder AMPS TACS 277 NAMPS NTACS 277 voice guard 301 Voltage Service screen 513 voltage measurement 105 495 506 RF across 50 ohm load 270 RF emf open circuit 270 setting 52 Voltmeter Connection Service screen 513 volume beeper 53 264 control 594 internal speaker 115 W Working Channel TX Frequency W watts Signaling Encoder screen EDACS displaying results in 64 mode 394 Waveform Write protect
293. ering This is a TTL level trigger approximately 2 5 V ENCODER uses the signaling encoder for triggering The encoder must be sending its signal to trigger the oscilloscope Auto Norm This field specifies how the trigger level is set e Auto automatically triggers if a triggering signal is not detected within approximately 50 ms of the last trigger e Norm requires a specific triggering signal before triggering Operating Considerations Automatic triggering should be used for signals gt 20 Hz Normal triggering should be used for signals lt 20 Hz Also when measuring lt 1 Hz signals you should set the Scope To field in the AF ANALYZER screen to Input to provide dc coupling to the oscilloscope s input 1 Optional on some Test Set models 458 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS oscscrn fh Main Menu Cont Single Level div Reset Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions This field specifies whether the oscilloscope is continuously triggered Cont or if it is only triggered each time Reset is selected Single This control is divided into two fields The upper field 0 00 sets the internal trigger level as a function of vertical divisions The trigger level is indicated by small pointers that appear on each side of the screen only used for internal triggering The lower field Pos Neg specifies whether triggering happens when the waveform being measured is positive going Pos
294. ers Selecting either field lists the choices available for that field This is the default measurement for this field The FM Deviation field displays the frequency deviation between the FM signal and the carrier The FM Deviation measurement field is only displayed when the AF An1 In field is set to FM Demod or FM Mod See Also AF Anl In on page 105 Displaying Measurements on page 60 Gain Cntl NOTE Input Gain Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram AF Analyzer Gain Control specifies whether the AF Analyzer s gain settings are controlled automatically by AF autoranging Auto or by manual control Hold The following settings are affected by AF autoranging e Input Gain e De Emp Gain e Notch Gain Operating Considerations The normal mode of operation for the Gain Cnt1 field is Auto allowing the instrument to adjust the AF gain settings for optimum measurement accuracy This field can be set to Hold to disable the autoranging routines to increase measurement speed However this requires you to select the desired gain settings manually for each measurement Decoder and Oscilloscope Interference The AF autoranging function Auto takes a small amount of time to determine the attenuation settings for the AF Analyzer If you are decoding an encoded signal and your transmitter begins sending encoded information the instant it transmits the initial encoded information may not be decoded during the
295. es or NPC No Primary Code All other possible code combinations are listed in numerical order after this entry If a Turn Off Code TOC is measured for a full sampling period Toc is displayed with no other codes listed This measurement field displays a 23 bit segment of the data stream being received After 23 bits have been received the decoder shifts the bit sequence 23 times until all possible bit patterns have been analyzed Any possible code words are displayed in the Codes oct column Even if no code words are found this field will still display the bit sequence that was received Operating Considerations This field is blank if the only signal received during the decoder s latest sampling period is a turn off code The final bit pattern displayed will not necessarily match any of the displayed codes since the bits are shifted 23 times during decoding This measurement field displays the data rate in bits per second for the data stream being received Operating Considerations For accurate measurements the Data Rate for the CDCSS encoder should be set to the expected data rate for the signal being analyzed by the CDCSS decoder 287 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder Input Level Polarity 288 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu This field specifies the signal level that you input after de emphasis if u
296. essage field AChoices menu is displayed listing the available messages Select the desired message The message fields will be displayed on the screen 3 Select the desired bit field AChoices menu will be displayed Using the Choices menu enter the desired bit pattern Select Done from the Choices menu when the desired bit pattern has been entered When a message field is being modified the original contents of the field that is the contents of the field before modification was started is sent whenever the message is used in a messaging protocol The new contents are not used until Done is selected from the Choices menu Use the CANCEL key to abort a modification If the CANCEL key is selected the original field contents are restored NOTE If a message field is modified while the Data Spec field is set to Std the modified contents will be overwritten with the bit patterns generated using the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard immediately after Done is selected from the Choices menu 251 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL BIT Screen Typical Example The following example illustrates the use of the CALL BIT screen In this example an AMPS mobile station is brought up on a voice channel and then handed off to a new voice channel assignment The contents of the FVC V Msg message which was set when the first handoff occurred is then modified from the CALL BIT screen Th
297. essage is no longer displayed Change RF Gen Amplitude Output Port or Atten Hold if on This message appears when the RF Generator s Amplitude field is set too high when using the RF IN OUT port or when adjusting the amplitude with the Atten Hold field set to On The RF IN OUT port has a lower maximum output level than the DUPLEX OUT port Use the DUPLEX OUT port or reduce the RF Generator s level If Atten Hold is On you may be adjusting the amplitude outside of the allowed range Change the amplitude Direct latch write occurred Cycle power when done servicing The SERVICE screen was accessed and one or more internal latch settings were changed Turn the instrument off and back on to reset the latches This condition can occur during periodic calibration 623 ain Men Chapter 624 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm Main Menu Symbols meaning of ACP level measurement Gen Anl 95 Configure screen 266 meaning of AF frequency 128 meaning of FM deviation 134 meaning of squelch 487 meaning of TX frequency error 140 meaning of TX power measurement 61 95 101 116 358 490 501 569 Index Numerics 10 MHz REF INPUT connector description 589 10 MHz REF OUTPUT connector description 589 114 3 MHz IF OUT connector description 576 24 hour clock setting 274 600 ohm impedance at AUDIO IN 107 625 A abbreviated address word forward contr
298. est Set is already active selecting this field will deactivate and then reactivate the control channel When lit the Active annunciator indicates that the control channel of the Test Set is turned on If this annunciator is lit the base station is transmitting system parameter overhead messages on the assigned control channel If the annunciator is not lit the base station is not active The Test Set may still be outputting a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set s firmware is not active and no communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set When lit the Connect annunciator indicates the mobile station is connected to the Test Set on a voice channel This field is used to select the desired reverse control channel or reverse voice channel message to be viewed Main Menu Handoff Order NOTE Page Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen This field is used to initiate a handoff from the current voice channel assignments to a new set of voice channel assignments The voice channel number to hand the mobile station off to the channel location NAMPS system type only the initial power level to use on the new voice channel the DSAT sequence NAMPS system type only to transpond on the mobile station and the SAT tone frequency to transpond on the new voice channel are specified using the Chan Ch Loc Pwr Lvl DSAT and SAT fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CON
299. etion of the next 1010 symbol Dotting is sent as the se quence 1010 rather than 10 This makes the trace on the internal scope stable when trig gered by the encoder since every second 1 starts on the opposite phase Make a phase continuous transition to 1200 Hz on completion of the next symbol Make a phase continuous transition to 1800 Hz on completion of the next symbol Make a phase continuous transition to dotting starting with a 1 symbol on comple tion of the next 1010 sequence 423 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the MPT 1327 Encoder Using the MPT 1327 Encoder Manually Testing MPT 1327 Radios MPT 1327 signals contain complex groupings of digital data that vary in format and function depending on a number of system operating parameters To be able to test MPT 1327 radios using this screen you must be familiar with the theory applications and specifications of the MPT 1327 system You must also be familiar with IBASIC programming since some of the required signaling commands are not available on the encoder screen they must be sent using IBASIC commands See Undisplayed Controls on page 414 The large volume of information required to explain the MPT 1327 system is beyond the scope of this manual Documents explaining the structure and specifications of this system should be obtained from the radio communications regulatory agency of the appropriate country
300. ev 393 Site ID 393 Standard 393 Status 394 Stop 394 Sub Audible Dev 394 view of 389 Working Channel Number 394 Working Channel RX frequency 394 Working Channel TX frequency 394 edit tone sequence 441 EEX key 590 EIA radio standard 440 electronic serial number decimal 134 hexadecimal 134 emergency call 301 emf voltage 270 encoder AMPS TACS 361 ain wenu Index CDSCC 375 data rate 374 digital paging 380 DTMF 385 EDACS 389 function generator 400 LTR 403 MPT 1327 411 NAMPS NTACS 361 narrowband 393 NMT 427 selecting 360 set up for 360 tone sequence 439 turning off AF Gen 1 360 wideband 393 encoder decoder interactions 374 enhanced digital access communications system decoder 301 encoder 389 ENTER key 590 Enter Procedure Filename Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 543 EPSON card see Memory card 74 equivalent front panel control characters 89 Error Bit Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 381 error detection code CDCSS encoder 379 error message buffer overflow 293 error messages 611 IBASIC 447 operation 620 ESC characters 89 ESN dec Call Control screen 134 ESN hex Call Control screen 134 Euro radio standard 440 Exec Execution Cond Tests Main Menu screen 532 Exit Status Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 323 exponents entering numbers 590 Ext Load R 63 AF Analyzer screen 110 effect of Audio In Lo 110 RX Test screen 105 49
301. everse voice channel 374 AMPS TACS 282 data 131 decoding AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 278 DSAT NAMPS NTACS 280 DST NAMPS NTACS 280 DTMF NAMPS NTACS 280 measurements AMPS TACS 284 measurements NAMPS NTACS 285 message viewing 168 NAMPS NTACS 282 order confirmation message 178 180 181 182 183 185 186 revision number firmware 265 RF Analyzer screen AC Level 483 Current 488 DC Level 488 Distn 488 Distortion 484 Ext TX key 484 FM Deviation 484 functional block diagram 483 IF Filter 485 Input Atten 485 Input Port 486 RF Cnt Gate 486 Sensitivity 487 SINAD 488 ain wenu 651 SNR 488 Squelch 487 Tune Freq 489 Tune Mode 489 TX Freq Error 489 TX Frequency 489 TX Power 490 TX Pwr Meas Agilent 8920B 490 TX Pwr Zero 491 view of 483 RF auto tuning 100 357 489 568 RF Chan Std Configure screen 269 RF Cnt Gate RF Analyzer screen 486 RF counter sampling 486 RF Display Configure screen 270 RF Gen Freq Duplex Test screen 356 RF Generator screen 499 RX Test screen 509 Spectrum Analyzer screen 520 RF Gen Volts Configure screen 270 RF generator amplitude 351 497 508 519 frequency 356 499 509 microphone modulation 579 output 499 509 522 output port 356 499 520 use with spectrum analyzer 519 RF Generator screen AC Level 495 AF Freq 500 AFGen1 Freq 496 AFGen1 To 496 AFGen Freq 496 AFGen2 To 497 Amplitude 497 Atten Hold 498 Audio Out 4
302. extraneous noise to be picked up by the microphone and adversely affect the measurements 6 The following example illustrates how to make a FM Hum and Noise measurement Srp me eae oD rw Select the Amplitude field and set it to 47 dBm Select the AFGen1 Freq field and set it to 1 kHz Select the upper AFGen1 To field and set it to Audio Out Select the AF Anl In field and select FM Demod Select the Filter 1 field and select C MESSAGE Select the Filter 2 field and select gt 99kHz LP Position the cursor on the De Emphasis field and select 750 us Select the Detector field and select PK Select the measurement field and select AF Freq Select the lower AFGen1 To field and adjust the signal level until the FM Devi ation field on the upper portion of the CRT reads 8 kHz Select the Detector field and select RMS Select the FM Deviation field Press the blue SHIFT key the INCR 10 key then the ENTER key This sets a zero reference point Select the lower AFGen1 To field and press the ON OFF key This turns off the modulating signal to the mobile station transmitter The FM Hum and Noise figure is displayed in the FM Deviation field Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL CONFIGURE Screen CALL CONFIGURE Screen CALL CONFIGURE CHAK Th Pur Zero Zero Detector RHS Input Att 20 dB Sat Tol To Screen Ez SPEC ANL More Figure 66 The CALL CO
303. f the EDACS Encoder When the mobile is receiving the control channel the transmitter can be keyed to send a call request message to go to a working channel The working channel settings are specified in the EDACS Encoder After the mobile starts transmitting the EDACS Decoder displays the decoded signaling data You can then access the DUPLEX TEST screen to make modulation and RF carrier measurements Transmitter Test Procedure This procedure establishes a control channel connection between the Test Set and your mobile After the mobile locks to the control channel the decoder is armed and the mobile s transmitter is keyed to make measurements NOTE Each EDACS radio is pre programmed to access a specific control channel and one or more working channels Other mobile and system identification information is also programmed into the radio You cannot test an EDACS mobile without first entering these values into the EDACS Encoder screen CAUTION Before testing your transmitter read the MAX PWR limit printed under the Test Set s RF IN OUT port Exceeding this limit could damage your Test Set Preset the Test Set Press the PRESET key on the Test Set to set all controls to a known state and display the RX TEST screen Connect the Mobile to the Test Set Connect the antenna port of the mobile to the RF IN OUT port of the Test Set 304 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signali
304. field to be changed 2 Press INCR SET and enter the desired value and unit of measure using the DATA keys 3 Use the down arrow and up arrow keys or CURSOR CONTROL knob to change the field s value by the increment value you set Example of Setting an Increment Value This example changes the Tune Freq in increments of 15 MHz 1 Access the TX TEST screen and position the cursor in front of the Tune Freq field 2 Press 1 0 0 MHz to set the frequency at 100 MHz 3 Press INCR SET 1 5 MHz 4 Turn the Cursor Control knob The field s value changes by 15 MHz for each knob click 68 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Printing A Screen Chapter 3 Operating Overview Printing A Screen To Print A Screen s Contents 1 2 Connect a printer to the appropriate rear panel connector Access the PRINT CONFIGURE screen from the More menu and set the Printer Port field to the appropriate type of printer connection e If HP IB is selected enter the GPIB Printer Address of the printer Select the type of printer you are using in the Model field If your printer is not listed configure your printer to emulate one that is listed Entera Print Title using the knob if desired This text will appear at the top of your printout Display the screen you want to print and press and release the SHIFT key then the TESTS key to access the PRINT function To interrupt printing select the
305. for the audio source affect the signal at this pin Output specifications are the same as the front panel AUDIO OUT connector 4 Key Out2 Connector Descriptions 1 5 6 7 8 584 This pin is a key relay contact Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 are connected in parallel with the Key Out and Key Out 2 pins of the front panel MIC ACC connector They go to internal relay contacts and can be used to key a transmitter The relay contacts are closed which connects the two pins when the Ext TX Key field is set to On This field can be found on the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST or RFANALYZER screen See MIC ACC on page 578 Capacitance is 0 1 WF per pin 300 pF per pin after approximately 6 us Contact Rating is 0 5 A 50 V Audio Input SettheAF Anl In fieldtoRadio Int to select this pin as the audio analyzer s input This field is found on the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST or AF ANALYZER screen as well as various signalling decoder screens Input impedance is 100 KQ Key Out 1 See pin 4 See MIC ACC on page 578 12 6 V Pins 7 and 8 can supply power to a low current device The voltage is always present when the Test Set is powered on and cannot be varied or turned on or off Output current is limited by an internal 100Q 2 W resistor 12 6 V See pin 7 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIconnkeys fb Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions 9 Logic Voltag
306. frequency sinewave generator It can also be used to set the Function Generator s frequency when the signaling encoder is used This field is also used to control the send stop functions for some encoder modes For example when sending a tone sequence this field is used to send and stop the sequence The field name changes to AFGen2 when this type of operation is used This field is removed from this screen when NMT encoding or decoding is used NMT programs can only be run from the NMT Decoder screen See Also Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AFGenl To AFGen2 To Chapter 19 RX Test Screen Field Descriptions This Audio Frequency Generator control is used to set two values e The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator or is out put through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off The AUDIO OUT level is set either in volts rms across a low impedance output or dBm mW or W across a 600 ohm load mW is selected by pressing SHIFT ENTER Operating Considerations The upper field is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 This Audio Frequency Generator control is used to set two values e The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through
307. g Decoder screen Func Gen mode 309 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 314 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 281 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 326 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 343 SIS Challenge Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 435 SIS Response Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 435 Site ID Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 393 slot timing MPT 1327 decoder 320 Sngl Step Tests IBASIC Controller screen 555 SNR AF Analyzer screen 114 Duplex Test screen 349 measurement 63 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 operation 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 RF Analyzer screen 488 RF Generator screen 500 RX Test screen 510 TX Test screen 106 563 software automated testing 601 for automated testing 374 running 530 source oscilloscope 113 Index peak detector 112 Span Spectrum Analyzer screen 518 span effect on AF analyzer 518 spectrum analyzer 528 speaker ALC 115 disabling 115 volume control 115 Speaker ALC AF Analyzer screen 115 Speaker Vol AF Analyzer screen 115 Spec Pass Fail Limits Tests Main Menu screen 534 Spec Tests Order of Tests screen 541 specifications setting limits 540 spectrum analyzer calibration 528 frequency markers 524 input port 518 level markers 524 marker position 523 markers 523 markers frequency 524 markers level 524 measuring low level RF power 101 116 355 358 486 490 501 567 5
308. g NMT programming commands e Loading existing NMT tests from a variety of storage media e Running NMT tests e Decoding received NMT signals Operating Steps Manual NMT radio tests generally follow four basic steps 1 Write your test program to send encoded information and evaluate received frames 2 Enter the necessary information into the various encoder and decoder fields 3 Make the required Test Set AF Analyzer RF Analyzer and RF Generator settings 4 Load and run your program from the decoder Changing Standards Each NMT standard affects several operating parameters for the encoder and decoder screens however there are no visual changes to the contents of either screen when standards are changed You must be aware of these changes when man ually testing radios using these screens Refer to the Standard and Calling Channel Number field descriptions for expla nations on the effects of these fields 328 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decosernth Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the NMT Decoder Encoder Standard Equivalents Only two standards are referred to in this section STD450 and STD900 All other national standards are based on these two If a field description says only used with the STD900 standard the field can also be used with other national standards listed under the STD900 equivalents below The following list identifies which national standards are based on STD4
309. g this measurement e AFGen2 must be turned off e The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port set the AF Anl Infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 349 ain wenu Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions AFGen1 Freq This field sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator AFGen1 To This field is used to set two values for the first audio frequency generator e The upper field determines whether the AF signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off The AUDIO OUT level is always in volts RMS Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 350 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS dxtsern Amplitude Atten Hold Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions This field adjusts the amplitude of the RF Generator Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens If a microphone is connected and the amplitude is set to Off keying the microphone causes the amplitude to turn on to its previous
310. ge 432 The tariff class information field is used to specify MS billing information to the MTX Valid Entry Range 0 through 99 NMT Frames Affected 5b 13b This field specifies the alternate traffic area code that identifies the base stations used to simultaneously transmit a calling signal to an MS Valid Entry Range 0 through FF hex NMT Frames Affected 1bTA2 3bTA2 3dTA2 4TA2 4bTA2 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Traffic Area Main This field specifies the main traffic area code that identifies the base stations used to simultaneously transmit a calling signal to an MS Valid Entry Range 0 through FF hex NMT Frames Affected la la 1a 1aS 1a S la S 1b 1bS 1bTAl 2a 2a 2a 2b 2b 2b 2c 2c 2c 2d 2d 2d 2e 2f 3al 3a2 3b 3bTC2 3c 3d 4 4b 5a 5b 7 10a 10aAC 10b 10c 10d 11a 11b 12 20 21b 21c 22 30 Traffic Channel Alt Number This field specifies the alternate traffic channel used for conversation after communications have been established Valid Entry Range through 2023 NMT Frames Affected 3a2 3bTC2 3c Operating Considerations This setting affects the RF generator and analyzer frequencies used when the TCHAN TC2 and RCHAN TC2 or TCHAN TCA and RCHAN TCA programming commands are used See Also Calli
311. ge 56 565 an wenu Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions Distn Ext TX Key Filter 1 and Filter 2 FM Deviation IF Filter 566 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItxtscern fh Main Menu This field displays the percent of distortion The Distortion measurement is only for a 1 kHz signaling tone This field controls a switch at the MIC ACC connector Its intended use is to key an external transmitter See Also Figure 145 on page 580 Filters 1 and 2 select a variety of standard and optional filters Selecting either field lists the choices available for that field See Also Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen This is the default measurement for this field The type of measurement listed here is dependent on the AF An1 In settings See Also AF Anl In on page 562 Displaying Measurements on page 60 This field selects the desired IF filter s bandwidth for modulated signals being analyzed Input Port CAUTION RF Channel Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions This field selects the RF IN OUT or ANT IN port for making RF measurements The RF IN OUT port must be used for making TX Power measurements on this screen Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel If the RF power at the RF IN OUT port exceeds allowable limits a loud warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen If this
312. gering but low enough to allow triggering for fluctuating signal levels If de emphasis is used by setting the AF Analyzer s De Emphasis field to 750 us the Input Level should be set to about 1 5 of the measured signal s level For example a 1 kHz 1 Vpeak sinewave into the AF Analyzer s input requires an Input Level of approximately 0 212 V to trigger correctly See Also Trig Level on page 314 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Function Generator Decoder Stop Meas Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making single measurements Single Cont This field specifies how you want the analyzer to be armed e Single is used to analyze and display the decoded information once each time Arm Meas is selected e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected Trig Level The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement that has been armed The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field setting 309 ar wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the Function Generator Decoder Using the Function Generator Decoder Decoding Considerations Frequency measurements are affected by the Filterl Filter2 Settling and De Emphasis settings in the AF ANALYZER screen Four dashes are displayed if the incoming signal is out of range or if the Gate Time is too long for the f
313. gnaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Message FVC FVC Message DSAT DSAT j DSAT DSAT DSAT Sync word Message Info Parity j j oo 24 bits 30 bits 28 bits 12 bits 24 bits 24 bits 24 bits Data Direction Figure 90 NAMPS NTACS FVC Message Data output Format This description applies to the NAMP NTAC mode The 7 hexadecimal characters 28 bits of this FVC message are combined with 12 parity bits calculated by the encoder to output a 40 character data stream This information is output when the Message DST field is set to Message and Send is selected Operating Considerations The entire field must contain data no blank spaces are allowed DSAT is turned off while the FVC Message Stream is being sent 370 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu Message DST FVC Polarity Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder This field is available only in NAMP NTAC mode This field determines what type of data is sent when Send is selected 1 Selecting Message causes the contents of the Message field to be output 2 Selecting DST causes the digital signaling tone sequence to be output The sequence sent is the inverse of the sequence entered in the DSAT field and is automatically de termined by the Encoder The DST values are DAA934 DAA4D4 DA9564 DA52B2 D954D4 D94D52 and D69654 This setting de
314. gnals having no amplitude modulation component Operating Considerations If you change this field zero the power measurement using the TX Pwr Zero field before measuring power 1 Optional on some Test Set models 101 in Menu Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions TX Pwr Zero The transmitter power zero function establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring RF power at the RF IN OUT port CAUTION RF power must not be applied while zeroing Set the RF Generator screen s Amplitude field to off to prevent internal cross coupling into the power detector while zeroing Operating Considerations When power is applied to the RF IN OUT connector the temperature of the internal circuitry increases This can cause changes in the TX Power measurement when low power levels are measured immediately following high power measurements When alternately making high and low power measurements always zero the power meter immediately before making the low power measurements this provides the best measurement accuracy 102 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS acpsern fh Main Menu AF Analyzer Screen ain wenu 103 Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Block Diagram From IF Filters From AUDIO Out O From Radio Interface AF Ant In FM Demod Input Gain 0 db FM Demod Filter 1 Filter 2 AM Demod 50Hz HPF 15kHz LPF SSB Demod Audio Out Radio Int
315. h can be used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer Refer to Filter 1 and Filter 2 on page 110 for further information This field displays the measured FM deviation of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicate that no carrier is present to measure This field displays the frequency error error assigned carrier frequency measured carrier frequency of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicates that there is no carrier frequency present to measure This field displays the measured RF power of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicates that there is no carrier present to measure 255 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen Using the ANALOG MEAS Screen 256 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu The ANALOG MEAS screen combines some of the Test Set s Audio Analyzer fields and some of the Test Set s RF Generator fields onto one screen for the purpose of testing the audio characteristics of the mobile station Only those fields which are pertinent to testing the mobile stations audio characteristics have been combined onto the ANALOG MEAS screen The Test Set must be in the connected state that is the Connect annunciator is lit in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen The mobile station
316. h the following GPIB with the command DECoder MPT1327 TIME MODE SLOT e works in the Control and Traffic test modes it is disabled in all other modes eIn Control mode the timing counter is reset atthe end of each message transmitted from the control channel message buffer It is not affected by the on going trans mission of the control channel filler pattern eIn the Traffic mode the timing counter is reset at the end of each message trans mitted from the traffic channel message buffer There is no background filler pat tern eIn the response timing mode both next slot and slot offset timing can be checked The received message must however be solicited by a forward message so that the timer is reset and the measurement is meaningful This mode is selected via the GPIB with the command DECoder MPT1327 TIME MODE RESPONSE 321 iain Mo Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen NMT Decoder NMT Decoder 322 The NMT Encoder and Decoder work together to test Nordic Mobile Telephone equipment used in a number of countries using different NMT standards As each standard is selected the Test Set configures the encoder and decoder to create and measure the corresponding RF carrier and digital data structure The following terms are used throughout the NMT sections of the manual DUT Device Under Test The device being tested MS BS or MTX Frames Groups of digital information that comprise an NMT signal
317. han Order MS Id Phone Hum Figure 18 The CALL CONTROL Screen NOTE The number of fields displayed on the CALL CONTROL screen depends on the selected system type 126 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Access Active Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen The CALL CONTROL screen is the primary Call Processing Subsystem screen It contains the most often used call processing configuration and command fields Figure 18 on page 126 shows the CALL CONTROL screen AMPS The top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen is used to display the following information e decoded data messages received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel or the reverse voice channel e modulation quality measurements made on the mobile station s RF carrier while on a voice channel e raw data message bits displayed in hexadecimal format received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel or reverse voice channel when a decoding error occurs The type of information to be displayed is selected using the Display field Refer to Display on page 131 for further information When lit the Access annunciator indicates the Test Set is signaling the mobile station with command information on the forward voice channel This is a transitory state The Test Set s speaker is turned off when in the access state This is done to eli
318. hapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions TX Power CAUTION TX Pwr Meas 490 Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN OUT port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Only the RF IN OUT port can be used for measuring TX power on this screen When the Input Port is set to Ant four dashes appear in place of digits for this measurement Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low level RF power lt 200 mW at the ANT IN port Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press MEAS RESET or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it See Also Sensitivity on page 487 Operating Considerations TX Power on page 490 TX Pwr Zero on page 491 The Transmitter Power Measurement field specifies how transmitter power measurements are made e Peak can be used to measure AM FM and unmodulated CW signals e Sample can be used to measure FM or CW signals with increased measurement speed This method can only be used with signals having no amplitude modulation component Operating Considerations If you change this field zero the power measurement using the
319. he 7 bit Digital Color Code of the Seizure Precursor The characters are right justified so the farthest bit to the left for the first hex character is always 0 The first word of the RECC message begins in the third hex character of the displayed data All bits of the RECC and RVC data streams received after the initial Word Sync are displayed including Parity and additional Dotting and Word Sync sequences The decoder does not check for any errors in the received data stream 284 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder NAMPS NTACS Reverse Voice Channel Measurements Three types of RVC information can be decoded selected using the Measure field DSAT displays the 6 digit DSAT Digital Supervisory Audio Tone or DST Digital Signaling Tone number depending on the type of signal being received If the received number is not one of the 14 standard combinations 7 DSAT or 7 DST the decoder displays a constantly changing number until one of the standard values is detected Data displays the 36 message bits and 12 parity bits of the RVC message The mea surement begins when the last sync word bit is received and ends after the last parity bit is received The measurement is re triggered when the next sync word is received there is no gate time function for this decoder mode DTMF displays Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone pair
320. he EDACS Trunked Radio Encoder Mode Screen Main Menu Status Idle Mode Standard edac en1 wmf EDACS Encoder 389 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 EDACS Encoder AFGen2 To This audio frequency generator control is used to specify where the encoder s data is sent e FMis used to frequency modulate the RF Generator This is the normally used setting Refer to the FM Coupling field description e AMis used to amplitude modulate the RF Generator not generally used for EDACS sig naling e Audio Out routes the data to the front panel AUDIO OUT connector The signal could then be used as an external modulation source Refer to the Audio Out field description Operating Considerations The encoder s digital signal level is adjusted using the Signaling Dev and Sub Audible Dev fields Changing the AFGen2 To setting automatically alters the unit of measure for both of these fields kHz or mV Audio Out The audio output coupling field selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO OUT connector Because the EDACS Encoder sends low speed data this field should be set to DC when the AUDIO OUT port is used The AFGen2 To field must be set to Audio Out to use this function Control Channel Number This field is used to specify the Control Channel number for the EDACS system typically 1 to 25 Control Channel RX Frequency This field is used to specify the Control Ch
321. he RMS value of a signal multiplied by the square root of 2 Pk displays the positive peak value Pk displays the negative peak value Pk 2 adds the positive and negative peak values and divides the sum by 2 Pk Max compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value po larity is not indicated Pk Hold displays and holds the positive peak value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Pk Hold displays and holds the negative peak value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Pk 2 Hold divides the sum of the positive and negative peak values by 2 and dis plays the value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Pk Mx Holdcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or re select the same detector Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 353 an wenu Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions Ext TX Key FM Coupling FM Deviation
322. he Select Procedure Filename field and select LVL_MTR Press the k3 key and enter the tune frequency in MHz then press the ENTER key Do not press a units MHz kHz Hz key MHz is the default unit and cannot be changed The ANT IN port is always the signal source 556 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS testscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 22 Tests Screen ROM Programs Securing a Test Procedure Clearing RAM The password option for securing a test procedure is accessed by loading and running the SECURE_IT ROM program This program is accessed by running the IB_UTIL program The password option for securing a test procedure is accessed by loading and running the SECURE_IT ROM program This program is accessed by directly selecting it from the Choices menu 1 Select the TESTS Main Menu screen 2 Select the Select Procedure Location field and choose ROM 3 Select the Select Procedure Filename field e Select SECURE_IT from the list of programs Press Run Test to run the proce dure follow the directions to secure the desired information e Select IB_UTIL from the list of programs Press Run Test to display a list of pro cedures select SECURE_IT and follow directions to secure the desired informa tion RAM can be cleared using the RAM_MNG program in the Test Set s ROM This program clears all RAM including any SAVE RECALL registers saved to Internal see Save Recall on page 449 in the I O CON
323. he message information can only be input in full seven digit lines Also message streams A and B must have the same number of lines in them 368 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Message FVC Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder The data you enter here FVC Message Ti T2 Information Parity ee 2 Bits 26 Bits 12 Bits 4 Contents of the Message or Field P Message Word ERREEELER is output in this sequence 101 Bits 11 Bits 40 Bits 37 Bits 11 Bits 40 Bits REPEAT 1 REPEAT 2 DOTTING W S OF DOTTING W S OF WORD WORD W S Word Sync 37 Bits _11 Bits 40 Bits 37 Bits 11 Bits 40 Bits 37 Bits _11 Bits 40 Bits REPEAT 9 REPEAT 10 REPEAT 11 DOTTING W S OF DOTTING W S OF DOTTING W S OF WORD WORD WORD AMPS TACS FVC Message Data Output Format This description applies to the AMPS TACS mode The 7 hexadecimal characters of the FVC Message field represent the 2 type bits and 26 information bits in the FVC message word The generation of dotting word sync parity and the 11 repetitions of these parameters in the FVC message stream is done automatically Operating Considerations The entire field must contain data no blank spaces are allowed SAT is turned off while the FVC message stream is being sent 369 ain Mo Chapter 10 Si
324. he mobile station Ensure that the Test Set is in the Connect state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel Select CALL DATA under the To Screen menu The CALL DATA screen will be displayed Select the Release field The Test Set will signal the mobile station with a release order The mobile station will respond to the release order and cease transmission The Test Set will terminate transmission on the forward voice channel and the Connect annunciator will turn off The Test Set will then reconfigure itself for transmission on the forward control channel begin to transmit system parameter overhead messages and the Active annunciator will light Selectthe Display Word field A list of reverse channel words which can be displayed will appear in a Choices menu Select the desired word from the list of choices The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel s message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 for a description of each of the available reverse channel words Step 7 and step 8 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desired word can be selected first then the mobile station can be released If the release is successful
325. hen entered Example May 5 1993 is entered as 050593 but is displayed as 50593 The internal clock still functions when the instrument is turned off This field is used to indicate losses or gains between the DUPLEX OUT port and the device under test e Enter a positive value to indicate a gain such as an amplifier gain The RF Generator s level is automatically set that amount below what is indicated in the RF Generator s Amplitude field Example if this value is 10 dB and the Amplitude field shows 0 dBm the actual level out this port is 10 dBm The value at the output of the external amplifier should then be at the level indicated in the Amplitude field e Enter a negative value to indicate a loss such as cable loss The RF Generator s level is automatically set that amount above what is indicated in the RF Generator s Ampli tude field to compensate The value at the opposite end of the cable loss should then be at the level indicated in the Amplitude field unless the resulting RF Generator setting exceeds the maximum output level then an error occurs Input value out of range In that case reduce the Amplitude setting or decrease the Duplex Out value This field is only used when the RF Level Offset field is set to On This field displays the current firmware revision for your Test Set The revision number is automatically changed when updated firmware is installed 265 ain Men Chapter 7 Configure Scre
326. hern Pacific Islands St Helena Sudan Tanzania Uganda United Arab Emirates United Kingdom Yeman Aden amp Sana 607 ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Plug Descriptions Agilent Part ee Plug Type cet en ae amp plug Cable Descriptions Straight Straight 8120 1369 79 inches gray Straight 90 8120 0696 80 inches gray Plug2 wm Used in the following locations Argentina Australia China People s Republic New Zealand Papua New Guinea Uruguay Western Samoa 608 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Agilent Technologies Support for Your Instrument Agilent Technologies Support for Your Instrument Parts and service for your Test Set can be ordered by contacting the nearest Agilent Technologies regional sales office listed in Table 21 Regional Sales and Service Offices on page 610 Customer Training Agilent Technologies offers customers a variety of training materials and classes that explain the theory and applications of many Agilent products Contact your Agilent regional sales office to arrange training for you or your group 609 ar wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Agilent Technologies Support for Your Instrument Table 21 United States of America Agilent Technologies
327. hock hazard that could result in personal injury FUSES Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specified type normal blow time delay etc should be used Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders To do so could cause a shock or fire hazard DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes DO NOT REMOVE THE INSTRUMENT COVER Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made only by qualified service personnel Instruments that appear damaged or defective should be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met ain wenu Safety Symbols Caution refer to accompanying documents AN Warning risk of electric shock Ear
328. hronous meaning that each block of data is transferred after a key is pressed on the Test Set s front panel or an GPIB command is sent Data transfer is also half duplex meaning that data input and output cannot occur simultaneously The parallel output data lines are implemented using 16 LM339M open collector voltage comparators with pull up resistors provided on the Radio Interface board The Radio Interface provides two methods for determining the logic level for data output 1 Use the default internal power supply and internal pull up resistors 2 Use an external supply voltage connected to the internal pull up resistors on the Radio Interface board These methods are described in Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level on page 473 The parallel input data lines are implemented using another 16 LM339M open collector voltage comparators An external supply voltage can be used to provide the reference voltage to the comparators if the default supply is not compatible with the external device under test This procedure is also described in Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level on page 473 Main Menu Audio Source Audio Analyzer Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Radio Interface Functional Description The Test Set has two audio sources AFGen 1 and AFGen 2 Either or both of these sources can be routed to the OPTION INTERFACE connector See Audio Out on page 584 The Test Set
329. ic memory within the current sensing element To recalibrate the current meter after negative current has been applied 1 Connect a 10 amp positive current 2 Disconnect the current 3 Access the AF ANALYZER screen 4 Select the DC Current Zero field to zero the meter See Also Displaying Measurements on page 60 575 ain wenu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions DC INPUT This female connector is used with a dc supply to provide power to the instrument The male counterpart to this connector is included in the Connector Kit accessory See Accessories Chapter The following Agilent Technologies parts can also be ordered to assemble the male counterpart to this connector Connector housing 1251 4782 1 required Connector contacts 1252 0385 2 required WARNING To prevent a potential shock hazard always connect the chassis ground terminal to earth ground when operating this instrument from a DC power source Digital Test Connections 576 Control I O CW RF OUT DET OUT IQ RF IN 114 3 MHz OUT The following connectors are only used when an Agilent cellular adapter such as an Agilent 83203B is connected to the Test Set to perform digital modulation tests These connectors are optional 1 Control I O provides control of the cellular adapter 2 CW RF OUT routes the RF carrier to the cellular adapter If a cellular adapter is not present a jumper must be
330. ich does not represent a valid phone number will convert to the following phone number 1111117111 This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station that is connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is the Active annunciator must be lit before you can attempt to register the mobile station When lit the Register annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the Test Set This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection with the mobile station When the Release field is selected a mobile station control message with a release order is sent to the mobile station on the forward voice channel A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator must be lit before you can attempt to send a release order to the mobile station Main Menu SAT SCM SID Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen SAT is divided into two fields he left hand field displays the SAT frequency assigned to the voice channel being used by the Test Set and the mobile station A numeric value would only be displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel The right hand field highlighted field is used to set the SAT Color Code
331. ield is used to set the output power of the Test Set s transmitter that is the output power of the Test Set s RF Generator This field displays the called phone number in decimal form received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel when the mobile station originates a call The Called Number field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message has been decoded when the mobile originates a call Main Menu CC Order Chan Ch Loc Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen The CC Order field is only visible when authentication is activated on the AUTHENTICATION screen This field is used to send an order on the forward control channel to the mobile station There are two orders available The SSD Update order ensures that the data contained in the mobile station and the base station is identical At the completion of the SSD Update process the mobile station and the Test Set will contain identical copies of shared secret data The Unique Challenge order challenges the mobile station s shared secret data through a series of algorithm data output comparisons A successful challenge confirms the validity of a mobile station s shared secret data Chan is divided into two fields The left hand field displays the voice channel number assignment being used by the Test Set and the mobile station A numeric value would only be displayed when th
332. in wenu 117 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem The Call Processing Subsystem which comprises six call processing screens allows the Test Set to simulate a cellular base station The Call Processing Subsystem provides through host firmware control the specific signals and protocol messages necessary to automatically establish and maintain a cellular link between the Test Set and a cellular phone mobile station Once the link is established the operator can exercise the call processing functions of the mobile station such as e the decoding of orders from the base station such as orders to retune the transceiver to a new channel to alert the mobile station user to an incoming call to adjust the transceiver output power level or to release the mobile station upon completion of a call e the encoding of signaling information for transmission to the base station such as dialed digits for call origination disconnect signal atthe completion ofa call or mobile identification number e the authentication signaling associated with AMPS IS 54 call processing such as shared secret data update unique challenge origination with authentication and page with authentication In addition when the link is established the Test Set performs the following functions automatically e measures some of the basic RF characteristics of the mobile sta
333. ing 433 Meas Ch 433 Meas Field Strength 434 Mgmt Maint 434 MSN 434 Password 435 Phi Signal 434 Pre Emp 435 SIS Challenge 435 SIS Response 435 Standard 436 TCI 436 Traffic Area Alt 436 Traffic Area Main 437 Traffic Channel Alt Number 437 Traffic Channel Alt Power 437 Traffic Channel Main Number 438 Traffic Channel Main Power 438 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode AFGen2 To 439 Audio Out 439 Bursts 440 FM Coupling 440 Pre Emp 440 Send 440 Send Mode 440 Standard 440 Stop 440 Symbol Definition 441 Symbol Sequence 441 signaling format AMPS 277 361 JTACS 277 361 NAMPS 277 361 NTACS 277 361 TACS 277 361 signaling standard narrowband 303 393 wideband 303 393 Simulated Calling Unit Signaling Encoder 1327mode 426 SINAD AF Analyzer screen 114 Duplex Test screen 349 measurement 63 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 measurement amplifier 112 measurement variable notch filter 112 RF Analyzer screen 488 RF Generator screen 500 RX Test screen 510 TX TEST screen 568 TX Test screen 106 563 Sine Units Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode 401 sine wave function generator 402 506 Single Cont Signaling Decoder TACS mode 281 MPT screen AMPS screen Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 289 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 294 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF mode 298 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 303 Signalin
334. ing RANSSSD_1 of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order RSVD Reserved for future use Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 234 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC SSD3 Message Fields Set Messase SSD3 Third SSD Update Order Word RANDSSD_3 Figure 57 FVC SSD3 Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message RANDSSD_3 The least significant 8 bits of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order RSVD Reserved for future use Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 235 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVCBSCon Message Fields Set Messase FYCBSCon Base Station Challenge Order Confirmation Figure 58 FVCBSCon Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message RSVD1 Reserved for future use AUTHBS Output response of the authentication algorithm initiated by the Base Station Challenge order RSVD2 Reserved for future use Parity Parity fiel
335. ing and recalling setups 79 setting a reference 73 setting limits 70 settling 113 speed ACP measurement 100 stopping analyzer 314 units 64 measurements ac level 62 105 347 483 495 506 ac level peak detector 112 ACP reference 96 adjacent channel power 94 95 AF power 63 AM depth 62 arming decoder 278 287 291 295 302 308 311 341 audio frequency 62 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 audio power 105 495 506 beat frequency 65 CDCSS code word 287 CDCSS data rate 287 CDCSS 23 bit sequence 287 current dc 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 dc level 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 decoded frequency 308 digital paging data rate 292 ain wenu Index distortion 63 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 DTMF decoder limits 300 EDACS transmitter 306 FM deviation 62 110 354 484 566 frequency error DTMF 296 frequency error transmitter 101 115 358 489 501 569 frequency DTMF 296 frequency transmitter 101 115 358 489 501 569 hum and noise 258 LTR data rate 312 mobile station receiver 399 NMT data rate 432 RECC AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 284 RF 61 RF power 101 116 358 490 501 569 RF sensitivity 257 rms potential 105 495 506 RVC AMPS TACS 284 RVC NAMPS NTACS 285 signal noise ratio 63 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 SINAD 63 106 114 349 409 488 500 510 563 SNR 63 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 stopping analyzer
336. ing is maintained after the instrument is turned off 449 iain Mo Chapter 12 I O Configure Screen Field Descriptions Serial In Stop Length Xmt Pace 450 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ioscrn f This field selects the destination of characters received by the Test Set on the serial port e Inst configures the serial port to connect to an external ASCII terminal or computer to enter IBASIC programs or to control the Test Set using an external keyboard e IBASIC is used to allow the IBASIC controller to read the serial port while a program is running Operating Considerations If a serial printer is connected the PRINT command causes the printer to take control of the serial port until printing is done This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off See Also Programmer s Guide This field specifies the number of stop bits used for serial communications when using the rear panel serial port Selecting this field displays a list of stop bit choices This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off The transmit pace field is used when transmitting serial data e Xon Xof f lets the receiving device talk to the Test Set to alter the rate of the data being sent e None disables the Xon Xoff function This setting is maintained after the instrument is turned off 13 Message Screen ain wenu 451 Chapter 13 Message Screen Field Desc
337. ing these values into the Encoder Connect the Mobile to the Test Set 1 Press the PRESET key on the Test Set 2 Connect the mobile s antenna port to the Test Set s RF IN OUT port 3 Connect the mobile s audio output to the AUDIO IN HI port of the Test Set The AU DIO IN LO port is typically only used when the mobile s antenna port shield is not at the same potential as the audio output shield See the AF ANALYZER screen Audio In Lo on page 107 4 Turn the mobile on 397 iain Mo Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the EDACS Encoder Get the Mobile Up on the Control Channel 1 n BP YS N 10 11 12 398 Turn AF Generator 1 Off to disable the default 3 kHz FM deviation To do this po sition the cursor in front of the 3 00 value in the AFGen1 To field on the RF GEN ERATOR or DUPLEX TEST screen and press the ON OFF key Select ENCODER from the To Screen menu Select the Mode field and choose EDACS from the Choices menu Select the standard used by the radio 4800 or 9600 bps Enter the Control Channel settings e The Number is the system control channel number programmed into your mobile e The RX Frequency is the control channel s receive frequency for your mobile e The TX Frequency is the control channel s transmit frequency for your mobile Enter the Working Channel settings e The Number is the working channel number programmed into your mobile that you
338. ing upon what the upper MS Td field is set to Select CALL DATA from the To Screen menu The CALL DATA screen will be displayed Select the Active field The Active annunciator will light when the control channel is turned on Select the Page field The Page annunciator will light while the Test Set pages the mobile on the forward control channel If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set sends the mobile station an alert order on the assigned voice channel The mobile station should ring Press the SEND key on the mobile station The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set when the SEND key is pressed The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel Select the Display Word field A list of reverse channel words which can be displayed will appear in a Choices menu Select the desired word from the list of choices The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display NOTE If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel s message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 fora description of each of the availab
339. inuous transmission field N is the number of paging channels in the system Read control filler field Combined paging access field CMAX is the number of access channels in the system End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates that this is the first word of the system overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 207 in Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions ACCESS Message Fields Access Type Parameters Global Action Messase ACT 1001 Figure 39 ACCESS Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code field ACT Global Action Field BIS Busy Idle status field 208 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu RSVD END OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the la
340. ion This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off Save Recall Serial Baud Chapter 12 I O Configure Screen Field Descriptions This field specifies which memory device the Test Set accesses when the save and recall functions are used Internal is a section of internal RAM RAM is also used for running IBASIC programs which may require you to delete the Save Recall registers if the program is very large Card is the front panel MEMORY CARD slot A Save Recall Device is not Present message is displayed if you try to save or recall an instrument setup when a write able memory card is not installed in the Test Set RAM refers to RAM disks that you can create on internal RAM Refer to the Programmer s Guide for information on creating RAM Disks This is part of the same memory used when internal is specified and may have to be erased when loading very large IBASIC programs A Save Recall Device is not initialized message is displayed if you try to save or recall an instrument setup when a RAM disk has not been created Disk is used with external disk drives The Mode field must be set to Control to access the drive Also the GPIB address of the drive must be entered in the External Disk Specification field of the TESTS External Devices screen This field selects the baud rate for serial communications when using the rear panel serial port Selecting this field displays a list of baud rate choices This sett
341. ion Figure 20 on page 132 shows the layout of the CALL CONTROL screen when Meas is selected For system type NAMPS with Ch Loc set to Lower Middle or Upper four characteristics of the RF carrier are measured TX Freq Error TX Power FM Deviation and DSAT DST When set to NMeas display the AF Analyzer s settings are 300 Hz HPF 15 kHz LPF De Emphasis 750 us PK detector The NMeas information is available only when the Test Set s Connect annunciator is lit connect state Refer to the individual field descriptions for further information Figure 21 on page 133 shows the layout of the NAMPS CALL CONTROL screen when NMeas is selected 131 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen CALL CONTROL Display RECO Error Return Data Msas Error Data Received from RECC Word 1 hex 7OD29BEDI fictive Word 2 hex i CELEFS963 CO Resister Word 3 hex SDDEE4FFA CO Page CO Access CO Connect Active System Type Yoice Channel Assignment To Screen AMPS Cntrl Chan Handoff 32 Chani Release Amplitude Pur Luli Order SATE Figure 19 CALL CONTROL Screen with Decoding Error Message Display CALL CONTROL Tonne T4 Frea Error FM Deviation kHz CO Active Resister TX Power AF Frea Fage CO Access 0 0780 5 970 Ji Connect EEL Type Yoice Channel Assianment To Screen T Chan Chan 212 HE Anplitude Pur Lyli 4 Order 50 0 5 C dEm SAT 5970 33r 0H
342. ion origination page release order 188 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Mobile Station Page There are two methods that can be used to view the decoded RVCC words from a mobile station page View the decoded RVCC words from a page for a mobile station that has registered with the Test Set View the decoded RVCC words from a page for a mobile station that has not registered with the Test Set Viewing the Decoded Reverse Channel Words from a Page to a Mobile Station that has Registered with the Test Set 1 2 10 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done ensure that the Test Set is properly configured See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station Ifthe CALL DATA screen is not displayed select CALL DATA under the To Screen menu The CALL DATA screen will be displayed Select the Active field The Active annunciator will light when the control channel is turned on Ensure that the mobile station has registered with the Test Set See Register a Mobile Station on page
343. ired for the mobile station to connect with the Test Set This field is used to select the type of detector used to measure the amplitude of the audio signal being measured Refer to Detector on page 109 for descriptions of the detectors available Input Att sets the amount of input attenuation for the RF IN OUT and ANT IN connectors The Input Att field displays the present attenuation value and it is used to set the desired attenuation level This field is used to select the Sat tolerance When set to Narrow the Sat limit is one of the three valid Sat tones 10Hz When set to Wide the Sat limit is defined at 0 to 7000 Hz When operating in noisey environments the narrow Sat limit may not allow for correct measurements and the ability to alter the limit to encompass a wider range provides for testing flexibility The TX Pwr Zero function establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring RF power at the RF IN OUT port See TX Pwr Zero on page 491 for further information RF power must not be applied while zeroing Set the RF GENERATOR screen s Amplitude field to off to prevent internal cross coupling into the power detector while zeroing Main Menu Configure Screen The CONFIGURE screen defines a number of general operating functions such as date and time screen intensity and beeper volume It is also used to define some RF signal parameters such as RF Generator Analyzer offset channel standards and characteristics
344. is displayed showing the various power levels which the mobile station can be set to Select the desired power level The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with an order to set its power level If the mobile responds properly the message REVC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Connect annunciator will light when signaling is complete Select the Display Word field A list of reverse channel words which can be displayed will be presented Position the cursor on the desired word and select it The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel s message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 fora description of each of the available reverse channel words Step 7 and Step 8 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desired word can be selected first then the mobile station can be sent an order to change transmit power level If the order is successful the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The ordered to change transmit power does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL CONTROL screen When the CALL DATA sc
345. is referred to in this document as the Test Set Chapter 1 Get Started This chapter describes the basic operation of the Test Set It also provides a quick check that verifies that the Test Set is operating properly Chapter 2 Configuring Your Test Set This chapter describes various instrument configuration settings that affect the general operation of the instrument Chapter 3 Operating Overview This chapter contains detailed operating instructions and examples for using several instrument features Chapters 4 through 23 Screen and Field Descriptions These chapters contains reference information for each screen and its fields Many of the descriptions contain signal flow diagrams that relate the screen s fields to the func tions they perform The screens are arranged in alphabetical order by title at the top of the screen Signaling Encoder and Signaling Decoder are alphabetized by the names Encoder and Decoder Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions This chapter describes the purpose and use of each connector and control Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support This chapter describes retrofit kits accessories manuals and customer support avail able for your Test Set Error Messages This section discusses error and operating messages ain wenu Contents 1 Get Started Before Connecting a Radio 40 Accessing the Test Set s Screens 41 Changing A Field s Setting 43 How do
346. is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile station This field displays the message type received from the mobile station e Set to 1 to identify the message as an origination or an order e Set to 0 to identify the message as an order response or page response 171 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RSVD SCM MINI Parity 172 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu This field displays whether the serial number word is received from the mobile station e Set to 1 if the serial number word is sent e Set to 0 if the serial number word is not sent This field displays the extended address word received from the mobile e Set to 1 if the extended address word is sent e Set to 0 if the extended address word is not sent This field is reserved for future use This field displays the mobile station s received station class mark This field displays the first part of the mobile identification number received from the mobile station This field displays the parity of the transmitted data Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW B Message Fields Figure 25 F NAWC LOCAL ORDQ ORDER RECCW B Message Fields This
347. ition 456 Controls Marker Marker To Fenk Position Marker To div oscscrn5 wmf Markers on the Oscilloscope How the Oscilloscope Displays Measurements The digital oscilloscope screen is 417 pixels wide Several measurement samples may be taken for each pixel as a signal is processed at 100 ns sample The number of samples depends on the sweep speed Time div and can vary from several thousand to one sample per pixel The level displayed for each pixel is the average level of the sample or samples taken for each pixel Peak causes the marker to move to the maximum value of the average level measured on the display Peak causes the marker to move to the minimum value of the average level measured on the display Because these functions look at the average value for each displayed pixel the marker may not appear directly on the displayed peak of a noisy signal This field indicates the number of scale divisions from the left side of the screen to the marker Use the DATA keys or cursor control knob to move the marker to any point on the displayed signal S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS oscscern fh Main Menu Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions Marker Measurements Figure 112 Marker Lvl Marker Time OSCILLOSCOPE Marker Tine EE 1 000 k IRERREE TES or Lul l 4 vi Ran i j z t E i To Screen 7 oscscrn2 wmf Reading Mea
348. key to access the REF SET func tion then press enter ENTER 2 Ref appears below the measurement The measurement displayed is now referenced to the measurement value present when the reference was set To Set a Specific Reference 1 Position the cursor in front of the unit of measure for the measurement you want to set the reference for 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the INCR 10 key to access the REF SET func tion 3 Enter a reference value 4 Ref appears below the measurement value to indicate a reference has been set The measurement displayed is now referenced to the value you entered 73 an wenu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Memory Cards Using Memory Cards OTP One Time Programmable cards provide removable read only storage File editing and erasure are not possible These cards cannot be programmed by the Test Set they require a special memory card programmer to save files SRAM cards provide removable read write memory for your files similar to a flexible disk Data can be stored re stored read or erased as needed SRAM memory cards require a battery to maintain stored information Table 6 Memory Card Pa Agilent Memory Type Technologies Part Number 64 kilobytes SRAM 83230A 1 Mbyte SRAM 83231A Figure 9 illustrates how to insert amemory card into the Test Set s front panel To remove a memory card simply pull it out The Test Set s
349. key to access the SAVE function A prompt appears at the top of the screen asking you to enter a name Using the DATA keys press 1 2 3 ENTER to assign a name to these changes Press PRESET and wait for the instrument to return to normal operation If not already displayed access the RX TEST screen Notice that the RF Gen Freq and Amplitude settings are reset to their preset values Press RECALL 123 ENTER The RF Gen Freq and Amplitude are changed to the settings you saved in register 123 500 MHz and 35 dBm To Remove Clear an Individual Save Register Specify where the register is stored using the Save Recall field on the I O CONFIG URE screen 1 2 80 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Press RECALL Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the register to be removed from the Re call menu at the bottom right of the screen The register name and percentage of memory occupied by that register are indicated at the top of the screen Press ON OFF A prompt appears asking if you want to delete the save register Press YES Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups To Clear All Save Registers Register Names POWERON Settings 1 Press RECALL 2 Use the knob to position the cursor in front of the Clr All entry in the Recall menu at the bottom right of the screen 3 Press the knob or press ENTER A prompt appears at the top of the screen t
350. l be converted to the following phone number 111111 111 Main Menu Order Pwr Lvl Page Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen This field is used to send an order on the forward voice channel to the Mobile Station A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator must be lit before you can send an order to a mobile station The Order field is a one of many selection field To send an order to the mobile station select the Order field A list of choices is displayed Select the desired order from the Choices menu The following orders are available e Change Power to Power Level 0 7 e Maintenance put the mobile station in maintenance mode e Alert alert the mobile station e MRI mobile reported interference request NAMPS system type only Once the selection is made a mobile station control message is sent to the mobile station The Access annunciator will light momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile station control message Pwr Lvl is divided into two fields e The left hand field displays the mobile station s output power level assigned to the voice channel being used by the Test Set and the mobile station A numeric value is displayed only when a mobile station is actively connected on a voice channel that is the Connect annunciator must be lit A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively conn
351. l is adjusted by changing the Input Level field setting S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the NMT Decoder Encoder Using the NMT Decoder Encoder General Encoder Operation The following are fields that are typically used for testing different types of NMT equipment Refer to the individual field descriptions for detailed information on each field s function and operating parameters Testing Mobile Stations These fields are typically used to test an MS e Calling Channel Number and Power Traffic Channel Main Number and Power e Traffic Channel Alt Number and Power e Traffic Area Main and Alt e DUT e TCI Tariff Class Information e MSN Mobile Subscriber Number e Data Rate e Access Channel Number and Power e Batt Save e Area e Add Info e SIS Challenge Testing A BS or MTX These fields are typically used to test a BS or MTX e Megmt Maint e Meas Ch e Phi Signal e Meas Field Strength e Password e BS Identity e Alarm Level High and Low e SIS Response Fields Used with Different Standards Fields in the upper part of the screen are used with all NMT standards Fields in the lower part of the screen are only used with the STD900 standard 327 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the NMT Decoder Encoder General Decoder Operation The NMT Decoder screen has several uses e Enterin
352. lable only in the Forward Control Channel menu have FOCC printed in the field title Fields available only in the Forward Voice Channel menu have FVC printed in the field title 361 iain Mo Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder SIGNALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 FOCC Status Stream A Stream 6 Ei eee Send Node Idle Single Filler Filler BEE Bursts Node ERDE Busy Idle AHFS TACH Message Message Idle 87I Delay Send Standard bits AFGen2 To ti Channel Audio Out intl voice ARO Data Rote FM Coupling HE D kbps Polarity Data Level ENYE En kHz amps en1 wmf Figure 84 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Mode Forward Control Channel FOCC HCODER AF GENERATOR 2 FYC AA w c gt gt 2 ae C7 m Status Idle Send Made Sinale Bursts Message Node ANPS TACS kHz SAT Level Send Stop AFGend To FH Audio Qut ALO 3 FM Coupling kbps Polarity fata Level TS kHz amps en3 wmf Figure 85 AMPS TACS Mode Forward Voice Channel FVC 362 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrp_th Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder SIGNALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 C Status send OSAT Send Mode Idle Message stop DSAT Bursts Mode NANF HTR ERSTEN Send Sta
353. lacing the Battery 1 Turn the Test Set on and insert the memory card An inserted memory card takes power from the Test Set preventing the card s contents from being lost 2 Hold the memory card in the slot with one hand and pull the battery holder out with your other hand See Figure 11 on page 78 The Test Set s SRAM cards have a Battery Holder Lock switch immediately above the Write Protect switch If the switch is in the locked position the battery cannot be removed Ensure that the Battery Holder Lock switch is in the unlocked position before trying to remove the battery 3 Install the battery with the side marked on the same side marked on the battery holder Avoid touching the flat sides of the battery finger oils may contaminate battery contacts in the memory card 4 Re insert the battery holder into the memory card The Test Set s SRAM cards have a Battery Holder Lock switch immediately above the Write Protect switch Ensure that the Battery Holder Lock switch is in the locked position after installing the new battery 5 Remove the memory card from the Test Set 77 an Men Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Memory Cards NY XS Figure 11 Replacing the Memory Card s Battery WARNING Do not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard unused batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Memo
354. larger number of instrument setups can be saved than if the contents of every field was saved When you recall an instrument setting every field is reset to the base settings The saved settings are then used to re establish the desired instrument setup Since each save recall register only contains the differences between the setup being saved and the present base register settings changing the base settings causes all other saved setups to be erased from memory including the POWERON setting if one has been saved Unless you consistently change the same fields to the same value each time you use the instrument you should avoid creating your own BASE settings Memory Considerations 82 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh When the Save Recall field of the I O CONFIGURE screen is set to Internal programs are saved to the same non volatile RAM used to create RAM Disk s and run IBASIC programs By saving a large number of instrument setups you reduce the amount of RAM available to run programs If you get a memory overflow message while trying to load a program you must clear one or more save recall registers to free RAM space Instrument Hardware Changes Recalling a saved register that uses a hardware option that has been removed such as an audio filter results in unspecified operation Re install the needed option before attempting to recall the associated register s Main Menu Chapter 3 Ope
355. lds Set Messase C FILMESS Control filler Messase TiT2 Dec Fi CMAC RSYpD F2 RSYD2 EM fF ex CIE CE EN Cm F3 WFOM F 4 OHO Parity ERY oo1000000011 Figure 42 C FILMESS Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code field F1 Control filler message field 1 All bits must be set as indicated CMAC Control mobile attenuation field Indicates the mobile station power level associated with reverse control channel RSVD1 Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated F2 Control filler message field 2 All bits must be set as indicated 214 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb in Menu RSVD2 F3 WFOM F4 OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated Control filler message field 3 All bits must be set as indicated Wait for overhead message field Control filler message field 4 All bits must be set as indicated This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity fiel
356. le reverse channel words Step 9 and step 11 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desired word can be selected first then the mobile station can be paged If the page is successful the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The page does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA screen When the CALL DATA screen is viewed the contents of the display words will be the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registration origination page release order 191 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen To View the Decoded Reverse Channel Words From a Mobile Station Handoff 1 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station Ensure that the Test Set is in the Connect state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed Select C
357. licable in any technical data Agilent Technologies Learning Products Department 24001 E Mission Liberty Lake WA 990 19 9599 U S A All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation dates are listed below Rev A October 1996 Rev B September 1997 Rev C December 1997 Rev D October 1999 Rev E April 2000 Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies Inc assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements GENERAL This product is a Safety Class 1 instrument provided with a protective earth terminal The protective features of this product may be impaired if it is used ina manner not specified in the operation instructions All Light Emitting Diodes LEDs used in this product are Class 1 LEDs as per IEC 60825 1 This product has been designed and tested in accordance with JEC Publication 1010 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition This instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITI
358. ll be interpreted The repeater function is not fully implemented at this time to provide base station decoding RX Test When Send is selected the Control Channel Site ID message is output atthe RX Frequency specified in the Control Channel settings on the EDACS Encoder screen Single Cont This field specifies how you want to arm the decoder e Single requires you to manually arm the decoder using the Arm Meas field before each measurement is made e Cont automatically arms the decoder to make a measurement and re arms the decoder after a measurement is made Operating Considerations To dis arm the decoder in single mode select the Stop Meas field The Stop Meas function is disabled when Cont is selected Standard The encoder s Data Rate field must be set to the data rate expected from the radio or the repeater being decoded This is best done by selecting the corresponding standard on the encoder s screen See Also Standard on page 393 Stop Meas This field is used to dis arm the decoder when making single measurements It is not used when making continuous Cont measurements 303 iain wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the EDACS Decoder Using the EDACS Decoder EDACS Transmitter Testing When the mobile is turned on it automatically tunes to its pre programmed control channel frequency The Test Set generates the control channel signal using the RF Generator and the Control Channel fields o
359. llel Data Strobe LM 339M Pin 13 Output Data Line sus Logic Voltage e E aa Data Output lofl6 Output Data 1 Pins 9 34 Fixed Ref erence External device should latch data on Strobe POL Level to allow Output Data time to settle Figure 118 The I O Config field will also output data to the output data line comparators The I O Config field however is primarily intended to configure parallel data lines as inputs or outputs See Input Data on page 470 477 ain wenu Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation Using Interrupts There are two interrupt lines that when armed allow monitoring of interrupt conditions An interrupt is tripped when a logic low determined by the same Logic Voltage as described in Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level on page 473 is detected When tripped the field directly below Arm Disable will change from Armed to Tripped To re arm the next interrupt you must first disable the interrupt then select Arm Besides displaying the word Tripped an interrupt condition will set a bit in one of the Test Set s status registers This makes it possible to generate SRQ interrupts or query a condition register to find out if an interrupt has occurred Refer to Using The Radio Interface Remote Operation on page 479 478 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 16 Radio I
360. lobal action message Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 225 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions RandChalB Message Fields Set Messase RandChalB Random Challenge B Global Action Message Figure 49 RandChalB Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code for new channel ACT Global action field RANDB The 16 least significant bits of the 32 bit RAND variable stored by a mobile for use in the authentication process END End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word 226 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 227 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Scree
361. log channel location which will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as ei ther an initial channel location assignment or as a handoff channel location assign ment The choices are Lower 10 kHz below standard wide analog channels Middle centered at the wide analog channel Upper 10 kHz above the standard analog channel or Wide Chan Pwr Lvl right hand field Enter the Voice Mobile Attenuation Code VMAC The VMAC determines the mobile station power level to be used on the voice chan nel See Chan on page 129 for more information about voice channel DSAT right hand field NAMPS system type only Select the DSAT Color Code DSCC to be used on the voice channel See Chan on page 129 for more infor mation about voice channel SAT right hand field Enter the SAT frequency to be used on the voice channel See Chan on page 129 for more information about the voice channel 3 Select CALL CNFG from the To Screen menu The CALL CONFIGURATION screen will be displayed 4 Verify that the Test Set s configuration information is appropriate for the mobile station to be tested Check the following fields a 144 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb CMAX Set the number of access channels in the system This will determine how many channels must be scanned by the mobile station when trying to access the Test Set The value of this field will affect the time requir
362. low this limit the test will fail Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen This field allows you to print the Test Set s screen image The Spec field lists the order of selected pass fail limits for the current procedure The Units column indicates the unit of measure used for the limits dBm kHz and so forth This field is used to set the upper limit to be compared with the measured results If the measured result is above this limit the test will fail 541 ain Men Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Save Delete Procedure TESTS Save Delete Procedure TESTS Soave Delete Frocedurel Save Proc SAVE DELETE TEST PROCEDURE Proc Select Procedure Location Enter Procedure Filename Enter Description for Hew Procedure SAVE PROCEDURE INFORMATION Procedure Library Current H0 LIE Code Location 5 Card ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT U Figure 137 The TESTS Save Delete Procedure Screen tstsvdel wmf After selecting a test sequence and defining the appropriate specifications parameters frequencies and system configuration you can save all that information as a procedure file for later use This screen is also used to delete procedures 542 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS testscrn fh Main Menu Code Location Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Save Delete Procedure This field is used to select where the program code file
363. ls at each port are printed on the front panel Only the RF IN OUT port can be used for measuring TX Power on this screen When the Input Port is set to Ant four dashes appear in place of digits for this measurement Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low level RF power lt 200 mW at the ANT IN port Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it See Also Input Port on page 355 Operating Considerations TX Power on page 490 TX Pwr Zero on page 491 1 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 ain wenu 359 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Field Descriptions for Encoder Modes Field Descriptions for Encoder Modes The Encoder AF Generator 2 uses several screens to generate various signaling formats These screens are accessed by selecting ENCODER from the To Screen menu and then selecting the Mode field The screen and field descriptions for each Encoder screen are listed in the following order e AMPS NAMPS TACS NTACS e CDCSS Continuous Digital Controlled Sq
364. m O C FENO DUPLEXOUT ANTIN wince VOLUME SQUELCH mumo out Au if eas FF es Myo Wee UEN x IEN NS S SF ZN N max POWER 200m Antenna Mic Key Mic Audio In Speaker or Audio Out Radio Under Test Connecting a Radio to the Test Set Main Menu Accessing the Test Set s Screens List of Screens Table 3 The following table lists all the screens that could be provided by the Test Set Chapter 1 Get Started Accessing the Test Set s Screens Analog Measurement Screens Instrument Configuration Screens Adjacent Channel Power Configure AF Analyzer VO Configure Decoder Print Configure Duplex User Assistance Screens Encoder Help Oscilloscope Message Radio Interface Service Assistance Screen RF Analyzer Service RF Generator Call Processing Screens RX Test Call Control Spectrum Analyzer Call Data TX Test Call Bit Software Control Screens Call Configure Tests Analog Measure Tests IBASIC Controller Authentication ain Mo 41 Chapter 1 Get Started Accessing the Test Set s Screens Accessing Screens Test Set s screens can be accessed through e Front panel keys e The front panel Cursor Control knob using the To Screen menu see item 5 in Fig ure 3 on page 43 e GPIB using th
365. m output current 20 mA peak Maximum reverse voltage 12 V peak AC DC coupling is selected using the Audio Out field This field is available in the DUPLEX TEST screen RF GENERATOR screen and various encoder modes 574 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIconnkeys fh Main Menu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions Chassis Ground The rear panel chassis ground terminal provides a general chassis connection as well as providing a safety ground when dc power is used WARNING To prevent a potential shock hazard always connect the chassis ground terminal to earth ground when operating this instrument from a dc power source CRT VIDEO OUTPUT This connector provides a signal for using an external video monitor The signal provides a duplicate of the Test Set s screen Operating Considerations A multi sync monitor must be used to match the video sync rate of 19 2 KHz Examples of this type of monitor include Mitsubishi Diamond Scan NEC 3D Leading Edge CMC 141M and Sony CPD 1302 DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT These connectors are used in series with a DC supply and load to provide a 0 to 10 amp DC current meter Operating Considerations The de current meter is designed to measure positive current the connector s polarity is marked on the rear panel Negative current of lt 10 amps will not damage the instrument but will cause inaccurate positive current measurements due to magnet
366. m the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed 155 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication 11 Select SSD Updinthe CC Order field The Access annunciator light will light while the SSD Update order is in progress If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel SSD Update Order Successful will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen The test set and the mobile station now share common secret data and further call processing functions with authentication can be tested If the order failed then SSD Update Order Failed will appear on the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Initializing Authentication without Registration 1 2 gt em u 10 11 12 13 156 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the upperMS ID field an
367. may be found in one of the following manuals e Agilent 8920A or 8920B User s Guides e Agilent 8920A or 8920B Programmer s Guide e Agilent 8920A or 8920B Assembly Level Repair Manual e Instrument BASIC User s Handbook e Agilent P N E2083 90005 The format of the displayed message determines which manual contains information about the error message There are four basic error message formats e Positive numbered error messages e IBASIC error messages e GpPIBerror messages e Text only error messages The following paragraphs give a brief description of each message format and direct you to the manual to look in for information about error messages displayed in that format 612 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm ain wenu Chapter Positive Numbered Error Messages Positive numbered error messages are generally associated with IBASIC Refer to the Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for information on IBASIC error messages Positive numbered error messages take the form ERROR XX For example e Error 54 Duplicate file name e or e Error 80 in 632 Medium changed or not in drive 613 iain Mo Chapter 614 Negative Numbered Error Messages Negative numbers preceding the error messages text correspond to the error conditions outlined in the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI For more information on SCPI order the following book A Beginner s Guide to SCP
368. measurement area is used to display transmitter frequency error or transmitter frequency See Also Tune Mode on page 568 Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN OUT port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Only the RF IN OUT port can be used for measuring TX Power on this screen When the Input Port is set to Ant four dashes appear in place of digits for this measurement Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low level RF power lt 200 mW at the ANT IN port Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it See Also Input Port on page 567 Operating Considerations TX Power on page 569 TX Power on page 490 TX Pwr Zero on page 491 1 Spectrum Analyzer is an option on some Test Set models 569 ain wenu Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions TX Pwr Meas TX Pwr Zero The transmitter power measurement field specifies how transmitter power measurements are made e Peak can be used to measure AM FM and unmodulated CW signals e Sample can be used to measur
369. mentarily in the upper right hand corner ofthe CALL CONTROL screen and the mobile station phone number ESN and decoded SCM will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen The information in the MS Id field will be updated The Active annunciator will light when the registration has successfully completed 145 ar wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Page a Mobile Station There are two methods that can be used to page a mobile station Page a mobile station that has registered with the Test Set Page a mobile station that has not registered with the Test Set Paging a Mobile Station that has Registered with the Test Set 1 2 p p 146 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fh Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel on page 145 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Ensure that the mobile station has registered with the Test Set See Register a Mobile Station on page 145 for information on
370. menu The AUTHENTICATION screen will be displayed Select the RANDSSD_1 field Enter a new valid RANDSSD_1 value 6 digit hexadecimal Select the RANDSSD_2 field Enter a new valid RANDSSD_2 value 6 digit hexadecimal Select the RANDSSD_3 field Enter a new valid RANDSSD_3 value 2 digit hexadecimal Select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select SSD Upd on the VC Order field The Access annunciator light will light while the SSD Update order is in progress If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel SSD Update Order Successful will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen If the order failed then SSD Update Order Failed will appear on the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Perform a Unique Challenge There are two methods that can be used to perform a Unique Challenge Response procedure Unique Challenge on the Control Channel Unique Challenge on the Voice Channel Performing a Unique Challenge on the Control Channel 1 2 gt pn a 10 Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17
371. minate any possible audio feedback which may occur if the mobile station s microphone is open This field is used to turn on the forward control channel of the Test Set or to force a return to the active state from any other state register page access connect If the forward control channel of the Test Set is already active selecting this field will deactivate and then reactivate the control channel 127 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen Active NOTE AF Freq Amplitude Called Number 128 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f When lit the Active annunciator indicates the control channel of the Test Set is turned on If this annunciator is lit the base station is transmitting system parameter overhead messages on the assigned control channel If the annunciator is not lit the base station is not active The Test Set may still be outputting a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set s firmware is not active and no communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set The AF Freq field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Meas This field displays the audio frequency of the demodulated FM signal being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicate that no audio frequency is present to measure A numeric value would only be displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state This f
372. mitter repeater or receiver used in your communications system has an odd number of inversions causing the received data to be inverted when decoded This is common when a signal is translated to a lower frequency using an LO whose frequency is higher than the signal s frequency or when inverting amplifiers are used Normal Operation When this field is set to Norm a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more positive A logical low 0 causes the level to become negative by the same amount Inverted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative A logical low 0 causes the level to become positive by the same amount Selecting this field causes the data stream to be output 377 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 CDCSS Encoder Send Mode Standard Stop TOC Time 378 This field selects the output format used when Send is selected to output a sequence e Single outputs the entire sequence once e Burst outputs the sequence the number of times specified in the Bursts field e Cont causes the sequence to be output continuously until Stop is selected This field selects the digitally coded squelch standard for your radio Selecting this field stops the data stream being output when the Send Mode is set to Cont or Burst After this field is selected the current repetition of the d
373. mode 278 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 341 arrow down key 591 arrow left key 593 arrow up key 591 ASCII terminal 89 configuring 450 ASSIGN 85 86 Atten Hold Duplex Test screen 351 RF Generator screen 498 RX Test screen 508 attenuation automatic control 98 485 525 input RF analyzer 98 485 input spectrum analyzer 525 manual control 98 485 525 attenuator decoder interference 111 485 input 98 485 525 oscilloscope interference 111 485 attenuator hold 351 498 508 Audio Analyzer Screen AM Depth 107 484 Audio Frequency Analyzer screen Distortion 108 audio frequency counter gate time 106 sampling 106 audio frequency generator 506 audio frequency measurements 62 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 AUDIO IN connector avoiding damage to 573 description 573 for ac level measurement 105 495 506 for ac level measurements 62 for call processing 124 for external load resistancemeasure ment 110 508 for SNR operation 106 114 349 500 510 563 AUDIO IN HI connector 573 Audio In Lo AF Analyzer screen 107 AUDIO IN LO connector 600 ohm impedance 107 573 floating 107 573 grounded 107 573 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT connector description 574 Audio Out Duplex Test screen 352 RF Generator screen 498 Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 363 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 376 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 381 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode
374. modulation depth if the upper field set to AM e amplitude of audio signal volts RMS at the AUDIO OUT connector if upper field is set to Audio Out For testing mobile stations the upper field is normally set to FM and the lower field set to the desired FM deviation in kHz Refer to AFGen1 Freq on page 496 for further information This field sets the output power of the Test Sets s transmitter that is the output power of the Test Set s RF Generator Refer to Amplitude on page 497 for further information Main Menu De Emphasis Detector Filter 1 Filter 2 FM Deviation TX Freq Error TX Power Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem ANALOG MEAS Screen This field is used to select or bypass the 750 us de emphasis filter network used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer Refer to De Emphasis on page 108 for further information This field is used to select the type of detector used to measure the amplitude of the audio signal being measured Refer to Detector on page 109 for descriptions of the detectors available This field selects one of several standard or optional audio frequency filters which can be used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer Refer to Filter 1 and Filter 2 on page 110 for further information This field selects one of several standard or optional audio frequency filters whic
375. n 04 kHz 984 To Screen is 7 This screen is used to make RF and audio measurements on the mobile station connected to the Test Set while on an active voice channel The Test Set does not monitor the mobile station s transmitted carrier power while the ANALOG MEAS screen is displayed If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts no error message is displayed nor will the Test Set terminate the call while on the ANALOG MEAS screen 253 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem ANALOG MEAS Screen AF Anl In AF Freq AFGen1 Freq AFGen1 To Amplitude 254 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb This field selects the input for the Audio Frequency analyzer Refer to AF Anl In on page 105 for further information This field is a one of many field used to select the type of measurement to be made by the Audio Frequency Analyzer on the audio signal being measured Refer to SINAD on page 114 for descriptions of the measurements available This field sets the output frequency of Audio Frequency Generator 1 Refer to AFGen1 Freq on page 496 for further information This field has two fields e the upper field sets the destination port for Audio Frequency Generator 1 e FM RF Generator FM modulator e AM RF Generator AM modulator e Audio Out AUDIO OUT connector on front panel of Test Set e the lower field sets the e FM modulation deviation if the upper field set to FM e AM
376. n Message Field Descriptions RAND SSD1 Message Fields Set Messase RAND sSsDl First SSD Update Order Word RAND_SSDi 010011010001100011101110 Figure 50 RAND SSD1 Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel RAND _SSD1 The most significant 24 bits of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 228 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions RAND SSD2 Message Fields Set Messase Second SSD Update Order Word RAND_SSD2 Figure 51 RAND SSD2 Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel RAND_SSD2 The subsequent 24 bits following RANSSSD_1 of the random number issued by the base station in the SSD Update Order Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 229 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions RAND SSD3 Message Fields Set Messase RAND 55D3 Third SSD Update Order Word
377. n Samoa Bahamas Barbados Belize Bermuda Brazil Caicos Cambodia Canada Cayman Islands Columbia Costa Rica Cuba Dominican Republic Ecuador El Salvador French West Indies Guam Guatemala Guyana Haiti Honduras Jamaica Korea Laos Leeward and Windward Is Liberia Mexico Midway Islands Nicaragua Other Pacific Islands Panama Philippines Puerto Rico Saudi Arabia 115V 127V Surname Taiwan Tobago Trinidad Trust Territories of Pacific Islands Turks Island United States Venezuela Vietnam Virgin Islands of the US Wake Island 604 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Plug Descriptions Agilent Part ugs Plug Type male female cable amp plug Cable Descriptions JIS C 8303 100 V Straight Straight 8120 4753 90 inches dark gray Straight 90 8120 4754 90 inches dark gray M er se Line _ J Used in the following locations Japan Plug Plug Type Descriptions Agilent Parie Cable Descriptions cable amp plug male female 90 Straight 8120 2956 79 inches gray 79 inches gray 79 90 90 8120 2957 inches gray Straight Straight 8120 3997 u plug7 wm Used in the following locations Denmark Greenland 605 Chapter 25 Modificati
378. n arrow or the up arrow keys to increment or decrement the present value Decimal Values Decimal values are used for most numeric entry fields such as the RF Gen Freq setting The acceptable entries for decimal values are 0 through 9 and EEX The key is used for entering negative numbers For example when entering the RF Generator Amplitude you can enter this sequence to set the value to 47 dBm 47 dBm The EEX key can be used when entering exponential notation For example to enter 1 25 x 10 kHz you could use the sequence 1 2 5 EEX 3 kHz Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Entering and Changing Numbers Hexadecimal Values Hexadecimal Hex values are used for entering some signaling parameters in the ENCODER such as AMPS Filler data field and for specifying remote communications parameters such as the RADIO INTERFACE Output Data field The acceptable entries for decimal values are 0 through 9 and A through F No unit of measure is associated with these values Hexadecimal values are either entered from the keypad A through F are shifted functions or by using the Choices menu displayed when certain fields are selected such as the AMPS Filler field To Enter and Change the Unit of Measure Entering the Unit of Measure for Settings When a number is entered the unit of measure is either specified or implied When the unit is implied the current unit is used For example if the present RF
379. n the Data Spec field and select Bits Select the Set Message field and select FVC V Msg Select the VMAC field in the FVC V Msg and set it to 101 this corresponds to a mobile station power level of 5 reference EIA TIA 553 Mobile Station Land Station Compatibility Specification September 1989 page 2 2 Table 2 1 2 1 Select the Handoff field The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with the handoff information If the mobile responds properly it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel and start transmitting on the same channel with a power level of 5 note that the channel assignment and SAT assignment were not modified in this example the mobile station simply switched to the same channel with the same SAT assignment When the Test Set detects that this has happened the Connect annunciator is lit indicating that the handoff was successful The mobile station power level after the handoff should be power level 5 Position the cursor on the Data Spec field and select Std Main Menu ANALOG MEAS Screen Figure 65 ANALOG MEAS TX Frea Error kHz 0 176 TX Power OH 0 084 Amplitude AFGenl Frea dEn kHz AFGenl To FH kHz The ANALOG MEAS Screen FH Deviation 23 5 96 AF Anl In FM Demod Filter 1 300Hz HPF Filter 2 15kHz LPF De Emrhas fod us Oft Detector Pkt Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem ANALOG MEAS Scree
380. n your mobile to about half of full scale You may or may not hear the 1 kHz tone from your radio s speaker depending on how the external speaker connection affects the speaker 4 Turn up the VOLUME of the Test Set You should be able to hear the 1 kHz tone Your mobile s SINAD is displayed as well as the AC Level of the audio output You can now change the RF Generator s Amplitude setting to check sensitivity or select the SINAD measurement to list and access other available audio measurements 399 iain Mo Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Function Generator Encoder Function Generator Encoder The Function Generator provides single tone audio frequency signals of various waveforms amplitudes and frequencies Its signal can be used to modulate the RF Generator or it can be output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector SIGNALING ENCODER AF GENERATOR 2 Arten Frea i kHz Hovefora Gen Func AFGenz To Screen func ec wmf Figure 96 The Function Generator Encoder Screen 400 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrn_th Main Menu AFGen2 Freq AFGen2 To Audio Out FM Coupling Sine Units Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Function Generator Encoder This field sets the tone frequency for the Function Generator This audio frequency generator control contains two fields e The upper field determines whether the F
381. naling Encoder AF Generator 2 LTR Encoder This Encoder mode is used to test trunked mobile radios that use the EF Johnson LTR Logic Trunked Radio format Two different trunking messages can be used Messagel and Message 2 to allow you to change radio operation while the encoder is running Data Rate 297 6 LTR message sggel Messages SIGNALING ENCODER CAF GENERATOR 2 Send Mode AFGen2 To FM off Audio Out CDC FM Coupling ACDC Folarity Figure 97 The LTR Trunked Radio Encoder Mode Screen Main Menu Status Idle Mode Standard LTR Itr en1 wmf 403 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 LTR Encoder AFGen2 To Area 1 Area 2 Audio Out Bursts Data Rate FM Coupling 404 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This audio frequency generator control contains two fields e The upper field determines whether the LTR Encoder s signal modulates the RF Gen erator or is output through AUDIO OUT normally set to FM for LTR signaling e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off typically set to 1 kHz for LTR sig naling Enter the trunked system Area Number 0 or 1 programmed into your radio Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the LTR Encoder to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out This field defines the number of times Message 1 or Message 2 is output
382. ndard HANES Store AFGen2 To Fil Audio Out CntlYoice BRE OL Data Rate FM Coupling BLOG bes Polarity Data Level RADIO INT kHz nmps eni wmf Figure 86 NAMPS NTACS Mode Forward Voice Channel FVC AFGen2 To This field determines whether the data stream modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector Audio Out Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the AF Generator to the AUDIO OUT connector when AFGen2 To is setto Audio Out 363 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Busy Idle FOCC B I Delay FOCC Bursts Channel Data Level 364 This field selects the busy idle status information to be included in the signaling sequence e Idle sets the busy idle bits of the forward control channel information to indicate an idle state e Busy sets the busy idle bits of the forward control channel information to indicate a busy state e WS Delay word sync delay prevents a busy idle change until the word sync information has been received and a defined number of delay bits has been counted The delay bit value is set in the B I Delay field e 1stBitDly first bit delay causes the busy idle bit to be set after a bit has been received and a defined number of delay bits has been counted The delay bit value is set inthe B I Delay field Busy idle delay determines the number of bits that are counted before a busy idle bit change
383. nditions Screen The TESTS Execution Conditions screen determines how tests are run 545 Main Menu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Execution Conditions Autostart Test Procedure on Power Up Continue When set to On this field automatically loads and runs the specified procedure whenever the Test Set is turned on If this field is set to O or the specified procedure cannot be loaded for any reason such as memory card not inserted disk drive not connected the Test Set will default to its normal power on state This field is used to restart a paused test If Unit Under Test Fails Main Menu Output Heading Output Results To 546 This field selects what happens if the measured results do not meet criteria for passing the current test The underlined entry is the active choice e Continue continues with testing even though a test in the test sequence fails to meet its test specification limits When this occurs an error is listed on the test results print out is displayed on the CRT or both e Stop stops the test when a failure occurs and requires operator intervention before test ing proceeds Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen This field allow you to enter a heading for the test results printout or CRT display This field selects where test results are output The underlined entry is the active choice e CRT displays test results on the Test Set s CRT
384. ne Seq mode 343 Stop Test Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 326 Strobe Pol Radio Interface screen 472 Sub Audible Dev Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 394 subscriber identity security challenge 435 subscriber identity security response 435 subscriber number 434 support 609 sweep frequency range tracking generator 518 oscilloscope 455 rate spectrum analyzer 528 time per division 455 tracking generator 522 Sym Signaling Decoder mode 299 DTMF screen Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 343 symbol for tone sequence 299 343 441 frequency 299 342 343 frequency error 342 hexadecimal number 441 Symbol Definition Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 441 Symbol Frequencies Signaling Encoder mode 387 Symbol Sequence Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 441 sync delay word 364 synchronization sequence decoder MPT 1327 319 syntax NMT programming 337 system identification number 139 System Identity Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 425 system parameter overhead word 2 mes sage 206 System Type Call Control screen 140 DTMF screen T TAI main traffic area 331 TA2 alternate traffic area 331 talk amp listen 448 tariff class information 436 TC1 main traffic channel 331 TC2 alternate traffic channel 331 TCI Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 436 terminal ASCII 89 Test Mode Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 413 Test Name Tests Orde
385. nel Main Number Signaling Encoder screen NMTmode 438 Traffic Channel Main Power Signaling Encoder screen NMTmode 438 training 609 transmit pace 450 transmitter keying 98 354 484 566 transmitter frequency 61 measurement 101 115 358 489 501 569 transmitter frequency error 61 measurement 101 115 358 489 501 569 transmitter power 61 fast Agilent 8920B 101 490 570 measurement 101 116 358 490 501 569 mobile station 149 modulation quality 131 zero reference 102 491 570 transmitter testing EDACS 304 triangle wave function generator 402 Trig Level Signaling Decoder TACS mode 281 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 289 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 294 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 309 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 314 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 281 Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 326 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 343 Trig Delay Oscilloscope screen 460 Trigger Pattern bin Signaling Decoder TACSmode 281 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACSmode 281 triggering automatic 458 AMPS screen AMPS screen bit position 281 continuous 459 decoder AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 278 281 decoder CDCSS 287 289 decoder digital paging 291 294 decoder DTMF 295 298 decoder EDACS 302 303 decoder function generator 308 309 decoder LTR 311 314 decoder MPT 1327 318 decoder NMT 326 decoder
386. nel and then automatically re configures its transceiver to the voice channel assigned to the mobile station Once the voice channel link is terminated the Test Set automatically re configures its transceiver back to being a control channel Handoffs are accomplished in a similar manner When a handoff is initiated while on a voice channel the Test Set sends the necessary information to the mobile station on the current voice channel At the proper time the Test Set automatically re configures its transceiver to the new voice channel Figure 16 Call Processing State Diagram on page 120 illustrates the primary call processing functions available in the Call Processing Subsystem Each box represents a call processing state and includes the measurement information available while in that state Each box also includes the name of the annunciator on the call processing screen that will be lit while in that call processing state Events which trigger transitions between the various states are shown on the diagram Events which are initiated from the Test Set are shown in solid lines and events which are initiated from the mobile station are shown in dashed lines 119 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem State Idle State Register Annunciator None Annunciator Register Meas None Meas RECCW A RECCW B RECCW C Phone Number ESN hexadecimal SCM Active
387. nformation about the voice channel 3 Select CALL CNFG under the To Screen menu The CALL CONFIGURATION screen will be displayed 4 Verify that the Test Set s configuration information is appropriate for the mobile station to be tested Check the following field a 154 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f CMAX Set the number of access channels in the system This will determine how many channels must be scanned by the mobile station when trying to access the Test Set The value of this field will affect the time required for the mobile station to con nect with the Test Set Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel 1 If not already done condition the Test Set See Condition the Test Set for Call Pro cessing on page 153 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 154 for further information If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select Active field The Active annunciator will light when the control channel is turned on Initialize Call Processing with Authentication There are two methods to initialize Call Processing with authentication Initializing Call Processing with Authentication through registration with the Test
388. ng Channel Number on page 432 Traffic Channel Alt Power This field specifies the power of the alternate traffic channel Each power setting represents one of the four available levels allowed by the NMT standards Valid Entry Range 0 through 3 NMT Frames Affected 3a2 3bTC2 3c 437 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Traffic Channel Main Number This field specifies the main traffic channel used for conversation after communications have been established Valid Entry Range 1 through 2023 NMT Frames Affected 1bTAl 1bTA2 2b 2b 2b 3al 3a2 3b 3bTA2 3d 3dTA2 4 4TA2 5a 5b 7 10b 10c 11 11a 12 13a 13b 14a 14b 16 20 21b 21C 22 25 26 27 28 30 Operating Considerations This setting affects the RF generator and analyzer frequencies used when the TCHAN TC1 and RCHAN TC1 or TCHAN TCM and RCHAN TCM programming commands is used See Also Calling Channel Number on page 432 Traffic Channel Main Power This field specifies the power of the main traffic channel Each power setting represents one of the four available levels allowed by the NMT standards Valid Entry Range 0 through 3 NMT Frames Affected 1bTAl 1bTA2 2b 2b 2b 3al 3a2 3b 3bTA2 3d 3dTA2 4 4TA2 5a 5b 7 10b 10c 11 11a 12 13a 13b 14a 14b 16 20 21b 21c 22 25 26 27 28 30 438 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr
389. ng Considerations The symbol assigned is based on the closest symbol frequencies to that tone pair 299 ar wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the DTMF Decoder Using the DTMF Decoder Measurement Limits Lo Tone 680 960 Hz Hi Tone 1190 1660 Hz Actual limits are typically slightly wider than this However the crossover point between Hi and Lo tone decoding is approximately 1 1 KHz If incoming tones approach this point unreliable measurements may be displayed frequency measurement errors and spurious off times 300 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen EDACS Decoder EDACS Decoder This screen decodes the digital signaling data from an Ericsson GE EDACS Enhanced Digital Access Communications System transmitter This function is provided to test mobile radios but it is not designed to test EDACS base stations Before transmitter measurements can be made the EDACS Encoder must be set up to provide the necessary system information Refer to Using the EDACS Encoder on page 395 for information on setting up the EDACS Encoder Four types of calls can be decoded group individual emergency and voice guard SIGNALING DECODER Statusi Idle Hode Standard 9600 Input Level 1 0 y Tria Level ENCODER 383 nY Mala RADIO INT Polarity edac de1 wmf Figure 76 The EDACS Trunked Radio Dec
390. ng Decoder Screen Using the EDACS Decoder Define the Control Channel Settings 1 weeny 7 8 9 Turn AF Generator 1 off by positioning the cursor in front of the 3 00 value of the AFGen1 To field and pressing the ON OFF key Select ENCODER from the To Screen menu Select the EDACS Mode to display the EDACS Encoder Select the Data Rate using the Standard field 4800 or 9600 bps Enter the Control Channel settings e The Number is your system s control channel number e The RX Frequency is the control channel s receive frequency for your mobile e The TX Frequency is the control channel s transmit frequency for your mobile Enter the Working Channel settings e The Number is the working channel number you want the mobile to be sent to e The RX Frequency is the mobile s receive frequency for the selected working channel e The TX Frequency is the mobile s transmit frequency for the selected working channel Enter the Logical ID number Enter the Group ID number Enter the Site ID number Prepare the Decoder for Transmitter Measurements 1 5 6 Turn the SQUELCH control on the Test Set fully clockwise 2 Select DECODER from the To Screen menu to access the EDACS Decoder 3 4 Setthe Input Level field to about one third of the expected deviation For example Setthe AF Anl In field to FM Demod to demodulate the signal from your transmitter if your transmitter s deviation is 3 kHz set the
391. ng Decoder screen LTR mode 313 Signaling Decoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 280 Signaling Encoder TACS mode 371 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 377 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 383 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 392 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 AMPS AMPS screen Index Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 371 polarity radio interface strobe 472 Port Sweep Tracking Gen Spectrum Analyzer screen 522 Position Oscilloscope screen 456 Spectrum Analyzer screen 523 positive edge triggering 459 power access channel NMT encoder 428 AF 63 mobile station output 137 transmitter 61 zero reference 102 491 570 power cables 602 POWER key 593 power meter zeroing 102 491 570 power source ac 593 dc 593 power switch 593 power on settings changing 81 Pre Emp Signaling Encoder mode 387 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 435 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 pre emphasis automatic control 498 bypassing 387 440 498 manual control 498 microphone 498 NMT encoder 435 tone sequence encoder 387 440 PRESET key 592 preset state changing 82 default 82 Pre Trig Oscilloscope screen 459 PREV key 592 DTMF screen Main Menu 649 print screens 69 592 Print All Tests Channel Information screen 536 537 Tests External Devices screen 550 Tests Order of Tests screen 539 Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 541 Pri
392. ng NMT Tests Programming Using an External Computer Writing programs on an external computer using BASIC allows you to write and edit the NMT program and then store it on mass media memory card RAM disk external disk Since some NMT syntax used are not valid BASIC language commands a special program structure is required Program Structure The following rules must be followed when writing NMT programs to be stored on mass media e All statements in the program must appear as BASIC comments beginning with an ex clamation point following the line number REM statements cannot be substituted for the symbol e All statements desired as comments in the NMT program are indicated by a double ex clamation point as the first entry following the line number e The first line of all NMT programs must have NMT following the line number e When storing NMT programs file names must begin with the letter n either lower or upper case The n is removed before the filename is shown in the menu for the Load Test field For example a file saved as nNMT1 appears as NMT1 Program Exam ple The following example can be saved on mass storage and then retrieved and run using the decoder s Load Test field 10 I I NMT 20 BEGIN 30 ISET 1 5 40 110 SEND 1A 50 ISEND 2A 60 REPEAT 1 10 70 EXIT 0 80 END 335 ain Men Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests Downloa
393. ng of ACP level measurement 95 meaning of squelch 487 meaning of TX power measurement 61 95 101 116 358 490 501 569 Data Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 302 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 311 Data bin Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 287 Data hex Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS mode 279 data buffer capacity 280 Data Display Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 292 DATA FUNCTIONS keys 591 DATA keys uses for 590 Data Length T O Configure screen 447 Data Level Signaling Encoder TACS mode 364 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 364 Data Rate Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 287 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 292 Signaling Decoder screen LTR mode 312 Signaling Decoder screen MPT 1327 mode 320 Signaling Encoder TACS mode 365 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS AMPS screen AMPS screen ain wenu 633 mode 376 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 381 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 391 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 365 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 432 data rate encoder 374 Data Spec Call Bit screen 201 data stream CDCSS 379 outputting 377 outputting digital paging 384 rate 376 data type pager 292 Date Configure screen 52 265 date and time 52 dBm displaying results in 64 de power grounding for safety 575 power source 593 supply c
394. nge Failed will appear on the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem AUTHENTICATION Screen AUTHENTICATION Screen AUTHENTICATION furhent ESN To Screen A_KEY Figure 22 The AUTHENTICATION Screen The AUTHENTICATION screen allows you to enter parameters for authentication into the Test Set These parameters are used by the Cave algorithm during Call Processing functions such as registration page and originate to verify a valid call 163 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem AUTHENTICATION Screen A_Key The A_key is a 26 digit decimal number stored in the mobile station s permanent security and identification memory and is not accessible to the user The user must obtain a valid A_Key from the mobile station s manufacturer or from the HLR AC to test Authentication procedures otherwise the authentication process will fail The Test Set reads the first 20 digits and using them during the authentication process The Test Set does not write data back to the A_key field during manual operation NOTE A_key generation is not available through the manual user interface A_key generation is only supported through the remote user interface Authent ESN RAND_A RAND_B 164 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh This field is used to activate the authentication process within the Test Set With
395. nl In Audio frequency analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer When selected this field displays a list of choices Signals can be analyzed from three different types of inputs e the output of the AM FM or SSB demodulators e the AUDIO IN RADIO INTERFACE MODULATION INPUT MIC ACC and AU DIO OUT connectors e the signal present at the AM or FM modulators for the RF Generator Operating Considerations Changing this field causes the upper AF measurement to change This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also FM Deviation on page 354 Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 348 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS dxtsern Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions AF Freq This is the default measurement for this field Selecting this field displays the following measurement choices SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation e Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement e The RF Generator and AF Generator 1 must be set up to provide the radio s carrier AFGenl is automatically turned on and off repeatedly durin
396. ns BSChalOrd Message Fields Figure 30 F NAWC RANDBS Parity 180 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb in Menu BSChalOrd Message Fields This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the random number used in the SSD update procedure This field displays the parity of the received data Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions AuthWORD Message Fields Figure 31 F NAWC COUNT RANDC AUTHR Parity Display Word AuthWORD Authentication Word RANDC 10001101 AuthWORD Message Fields This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the modulo 64 count maintained by the mobile station and used for authentication and anti fraud purposes This field displays the 8 bit number used to confirm the last RAND received by the mobile station Output of the authentication algorithm when responding to a Unique Challenge Order This field displays the parity of the received da
397. nstrument setup and then decide not to recall a setting pressing CANCEL exits the recall procedure Left arrow key backspace is used to move the cursor to the left when entering num bers in a field such as RF Gen Freq Each press of this key moves the cursor one place to the left erasing the previous character The rear panel AC DC button setting selects the instrument s power source The power source must be changed with the Test Set turned off POWER turns the instrument power on and off Several CONFIGURE screen set tings and all SAVE RECALL registers are retained by battery back up when power is disconnected These keys are used to instantly access fields without using the cursor control knob or changing screens See Also Using USER Keys on page 83 593 iain Mo Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Knob Descriptions Knob Descriptions CURSOR CONTROL has three functions 1 Moving the cursor 2 Selecting fields screens and settings from a list of choices 3 Changing numeric field values VOLUME controls the speaker volume for monitoring the AF Analyzer s selected in put The volume is also affected by the Speaker Vol and Speaker ALC fields in the AF ANALYZER screen SQUELCH adjusts the squelch level when demodulating AM FM or SSB signals The squelch level is affected by the Squelch field in the RFANALYZER screen See Also Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Ch
398. nt Configure screen Abort Print 464 FF at End 464 FF at Start 464 Lines Page 465 Model 69 465 Print Data Destination 465 Print Title 69 465 Printer Address 69 465 Printer Port 69 465 settings 69 view of 464 Print Data Destination Print Configure screen 465 PRINT key 592 Print Printer Setup Tests Main Menu screen 533 Print Title Print Configure screen 69 465 printer connecting 465 553 model 465 552 Printer Address Print Configure screen 69 465 Tests Printer Setup screen 553 Printer Port Print Configure screen 69 465 Tests Printer Setup screen 553 printing aborting 464 form feed 464 551 lines per page 465 552 printer address 465 553 printer model 465 552 screens 463 selecting printer port 465 title 465 552 priority fields 57 96 105 106 114 278 295 307 341 348 349 350 351 650 352 353 488 496 497 500 507 508 510 519 562 563 564 565 Proc Save Delete Procedure Tests Main Menu screen 533 Procedure Library Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 543 Program Tests Main Menu screen 533 Programmer s Guide 88 programming downloading 336 NMT tests 332 programming example NMT test external controller 335 NMT test internal controller 334 programs language 530 running from memory card 88 PTT Configure screen 273 push to talk 273 Pwr Lvl Call Control screen 137 Index R radio connecting 40 LTR trunking data
399. nterface Screen Using The Radio Interface Remote Operation Using The Radio Interface Remote Operation CAUTION Do not connect a voltage source in excess of 0 3 V for example 0 4 V to any Parallel Data pin Also do not connect a voltage source that exceeds 5 7 V unless the logic voltage has been set to a level other than the default If the logic voltage has been set to some value other than the default of 5 1 V the maximum voltage that can be applied is the logic voltage plus 0 6 V Refer to Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level on page 473 GPIB Command Summary The GPIB command mnemonics can be found in the Programmer s Guide under Radio Interface Inputting Data over GPIB Use the following commands to configure the eight least significant parallel data bus lines as inputs by writing logic 1 s to them DISP RINT RINTerface PARallel CONFigure HFF hex or DISP RINT RINTerface PARallel CONFigure 255 decimal Use the following command to read the data on the parallel bus to the Test Set s internal CPU DISP RINT RINTerface PARallel INPut READ Use the following command to query the data read by the READ command DISP RINT RINTerface PARallel NPut DATA If the output data lines are zero and none of the input data lines are pulled low the value returned by the previous command will be 255 decimal Remember that data lines not configured as inputs will still be displayed and
400. nternal pull up resistor design See Also Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen 577 iain wenu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions HP IB This connector allows communication between the Test Set and other instruments or computers using the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB See Also Chapter 12 I O Configure Screen Agilent 8920 Programmer s Guide MEMORY CARD Slot This front panel opening is where memory cards are inserted See Also Agilent 8920 Programmer s Guide MIC ACC This 8 pin DIN connector see Figure 145 on page 580 is used for several functions e Mic In is used to modulate the RF Generator when the KEY IN line is grounded This signal is summed with the external MODULATION INPUT signal The Mod In To field of the RF GENERATOR screen sets the type of modulation AM or FM and sen sitivity AM Vpk or kHz Vpk for this connection e Key In provides control of the RF Generator s output state on or off and automatic switching between the TX TEST and RX TEST screens if the CONFIGURE screen s RX TX Cnt1 functions are set to Auto and PTT Screen switching occurs when this line is grounded e Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 provide a switch path to control external equipment such as keying a transmitter Key Out 1 and Key Out 2 are connected when the Ext TX key field is set to On CAUTION Do not exceed 50 Vdc open circuit or 250 mA dc closed circuit betwe
401. nu 643 M Main Menu Tests Channel Information screen 336 337 Tests Execution Conditions screen 546 Tests External Devices screen 550 Tests IBASIC Controller screen 555 Tests Order of Tests screen 539 Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 541 Tests Printer Setup screen 552 Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 543 main traffic area 437 main traffic channel number 438 power 438 manual tuning 100 357 489 568 manuals 600 marker spectrum analyzer position 523 Marker To Oscilloscope screen 456 Spectrum Analyzer screen 523 markers frequency 524 level 457 524 oscilloscope 456 oscilloscope peak 456 spectrum analyzer 523 spectrum analyzer center frequency 523 spectrum analyzer peak 523 spectrum analyzer reference level 523 time 457 triggering 457 mass storage loading NMT test from 325 Mass Storage Devices EPSON cards 74 initializing media for 78 OTP card 74 PCMCIA cards 74 ROM card 74 SRAM card 74 write protecting 76 Meas Ch Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 644 433 Meas Field Strength Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 434 MEAS RESET key 592 Measure Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 280 measurement accuracy gain control for 111 accuracy zeroing for 107 accuracy zeroing power for 102 491 570 arming analyzer 281 289 294 298 303 309 314 326 343 averaging 72 disarming analyzer 303 limit indicators 70 removing limits 71 sav
402. number of beeps and the type of message displayed by the pager The Message Length field specifies the number of characters output from the Pager Numeric Alpha Numeric field This field is only displayed when the Pager Type is set to Numeric or Alpha Num Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Digital Paging Encoder Pager Alpha Numeric Message Pager Code This field specifies the message you are sending to an alpha numeric format pager This field is only displayed when the Pager Type is set to Numeric or Alpha Num This field is used to identify the individual code number address of the pager you are testing Pager Numeric Message Pager Type Polarity This field specifies the message you are sending to a numeric format pager This field is only displayed when the Pager Type is set to Numeric or Alpha Num This field specifies the way your pager responds to a received signal Tone Only beeps Numeric displays numbers or Alpha Numeric displays numbers and other characters This setting determines the relationship between the data stream s logic levels and the effect on the modulated signal Normal Operation When this field is set to Norm a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more positive causing a positive frequency deviation when FM is used A logical low 0 causes the level to become negative by the same amount resulting in negative FM deviation Inve
403. o bring a mobile station up on a voice channel If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the Chan field Enter a new valid voice channel number Select the Ch Loc field NAMPS system type only Enter a new valid channel location from the Choices menu Select the Pwr Lv1 field Enter a new valid mobile station power level Select the DSAT field NAMPS system type only Enter a new valid DSAT from the Choices menu Select the SAT field Enter a new valid SAT frequency Select the Handoff field The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with the handoff information If the mobile responds properly it will stop transmitting on the current voice channel switch to the new voice channel and transpond the newly assigned SAT frequency When the Test Set detects this has happened the Connect annunciator is lit indicating that the handoff was successful The Voice Channel Assignment section will be updated that is any in the left hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information Release A Mobile Station 1 1 2 148 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station
404. o change to other receive channels when commanded requires rapid RF Generator frequency changes After the idle message on the home channel has been established using Message 1 a message is sent to change channels Message 2 The mobile must see the LTR encoded carrier at the new channel frequency within a few seconds to establish the new channel You can change the RF Generator s frequency using a global USER key after entering an increment value equal to the required channel offset This procedure must be done very quickly to work The best way to perform a channel change is to use an GPIB or IBASIC program to change the RF Generator s frequency to the new channel frequency immediately after the appropriate message has been output Automated Test Software 410 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu Agilent Technologies offers software packages to test your LTR format trunked radio in a fraction of the time normally required for manual testing You can choose any combination of tests from full transmitter and receiver testing to a single test The software is shipped on a memory card that inserts directly into your Test Set and it comes with complete documentation and a blank SRAM memory card for storing your test procedures and test data Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder MPT 1327 Encoder This encoder is used to test trunked mobile radios that use the MPT 1327
405. o verify that you want to clear all registers 4 Press YES You can use any number letter or combination of numbers and letters as a name for storing instrument settings For instance if you want to save a setup for testing a Vulcan7 radio you can save the setting as WULCAN7 Two register names are reserved for special purposes POWERON and BASE When the Test Set is turned on it uses a set of instrument setup parameters specified at the time of manufacture You can have the instrument power up in a different state by making the desired changes to the original settings and then saving them using the name POWERON The next time the instrument is turned on the instrument returns to the state present when you saved the POWERON setting For instance if the OSCILLOSCOPE screen was displayed when POWERON was saved it is the screen that is displayed when you turn the instrument on 81 ain Men Chapter 3 Operating Overview Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups BASE Settings CAUTION The BASE register contains any field settings the user has saved that are different from the instrument preset state It establishes a reference point for all future saves If a base is not saved the preset state is used as the reference When you save an instrument setup the new setup is compared to the base settings and any differences are stored under the register name you supply Because only differences are stored a much
406. oad wmf Operating Considerations Directly entering a command into the NMT Test Entry field automatically removes from memory any NMT test previously loaded using the Load Test field See Using Direct Command Entry on page 334 325 ain Mon Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen NMT Decoder Run Test Single Cont Stop Test Standard Trig Level 326 Selecting this function executes runs the NMT test specified inthe Load Test field or entered directly into the NMT Test Entry field This field specifies how you want the test to be run e Single executes the NMT program and displays the decoded information once each time Run Test is selected e Cont continually re runs the program and displays the decoded information until Single is selected Selecting this field interrupts the NMT test while running If Cont is selected the program automatically re runs from the beginning This field specifies the NMT standard for the signal being decoded Operating Considerations This setting alters the decoder s function by specifying the expected frame structure and channel range for the incoming signal Trying to run a test with the wrong standard selected will result in incorrect decoded data or will display an operating error message See Also Trig Level on page 281 Standard Equivalents on page 329 Trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement This leve
407. octal code for radio 376 subscriber identity security challenge 435 subscriber identity security response 435 idle state 364 status 394 IF Filter Duplex Test screen 355 RF Analyzer screen 485 TX Test screen 566 IF filter bandwidth selecting 355 485 566 If Unit Under Test Fails Tests Execution Conditions screen 546 impedance input 573 input for call processing 124 output for call processing 124 INCR SET key 591 increment changing setting 68 indicators oscilloscope input 461 status 378 individual call 301 information bits 367 369 input AF analyzer 278 286 291 295 301 307 311 323 341 analyzer 518 audio 600 ohm impedance 107 audio floating 107 audio grounded 107 configuring radio interface 472 coupling 354 367 377 382 386 391 401 404 433 440 498 gain 111 oscilloscope 461 RF 99 355 486 567 spectrum analyzer 518 types of 105 348 562 Input Atten Adjacent Channel Power screen 98 RF Analyzer screen 485 Spectrum Analyzer screen 525 input attenuation 525 automatic control 98 485 525 manual control 98 485 525 setting 98 485 Input Attenuator Call configure screen 260 input attenuator decoder interference 111 485 oscilloscope interference 111 485 Input Data Radio Interface screen 470 Input Gain AF Analyzer screen 111 input impedance selecting 573 Input Level Signaling Decoder screen TACS mode 279 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS
408. octave difference between the high and low tones For example if sending a 1 which has a low tone of 697 Hz and a high tone of 1209 Hz the high tone has a deviation of 1209 697 1 735 times the low tone s deviation The high tone s deviation is then 20 x log 1209 967 4 78 dB higher than the low tone Since their sum must equal 3 kHz the low tone s deviation is 1097 Hz and the high tone s deviation is 1903 Hz Example 4 3 kHz deviation Twist 2 5 dB Pre emphasis on If sending a 1 697 Hz low tone and 1209 Hz high tone the high tone s deviation is 1 334 see example 2 x 1 735 see example 3 approximately 2 314 times the low tone s deviation Since the peak deviation of their sum is 3 kHz the low tone s deviation is 905 5 Hz and the high tone s deviation is 2094 5 Hz EDACS Encoder This encoder simulates an Ericsson GE EDACS Enhanced Digital Access Communications System repeater site to test trunked mobile radios using that format SIGNALING Dato Rate Control Channel Humber Re FreauencyY MHz Working Channel Hunber Re Freauency MHz Losical ID Grour ID Sisnalinsa Dey kHz Figure 95 TA Freauencr MHz Ta Freauency MHz Site ID Sub Audible Dey Hz Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 ENCODER AF GENERATOR 21 Ra Test Send Handshake E AFGeng To FH Audio Out Ac OC FM Courlina AED Polority Harn Invert T
409. od LLN From MIC ACCO i _ From AM FM e Modulators AMMod From AUDIO Out Audio Out De Emphasis Measurements Display Area 750 us Off Detector Tune Mode AF Anl In Pk Max Auto Manual FM Demod FM Deviation AM Depth RMS RMS SQRT2 RK PK TX Freq Error TX Frequency TX Power PK 2 Pk Max Voltmeter Pk Hold Pk Hold Pk 2Hd Pk MxHd SNR DC Level Current FM Freq AF Gen1 Freq 1 0000 AUDIO OUT MIG ACG Ext TX Key ON Off AF Gen1 Lvi 50 0 Figure 143 TX TEST Functional Block Diagram 560 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItxtsern fh Main Menu Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions Ta Freayency MHz FM Deviation kHz 150 084243 132 2 TR Power 00002 T 27240 Input Fort AF Anl In Arten Frea Screen i Auto Manuo li Ant Fi Demod 4 F G kHz IF Filter Filter 1 AFGeni Lvl 50Hz HPF 5 MHz Filter 2 my TR Fur Zero Ext TK Key De Enphosis 0 off fod usOff Ti Pur nass Detector Sa Pk Max txsern wmf Figure 144 The TX Test Screen 561 Main Menu Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions AF AnlIn Audio Frequency Analyzer input selects the input for the analyzer When selected this field displays a list of choices Signals can be analyzed from three different types of inputs e The output of the AM FM or SSB demodulators e The AUDIO IN RADIO INTERFACE
410. oder s Data Rate field to the expected incoming data rate for accurate measurements See Also Data Rate on page 381 Display Page This field is used to select a specific page of decoded data More than one page of decoded data may be available when a batch of messages is received during the specified gate time The Number of Pages field indicates how many pages were decoded 292 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn th Main Menu Gate Time Input Level Number of Pages Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Digital Paging Decoder This field specifies how long the decoder analyzes a signal after it has been triggered Up to 65 seconds of gate time can be specified The minimum gate time should be set long enough to allow the preamble and all necessary data bits to be captured If too much data is decoded during the gate time the decoder buffer will overflow an error message is displayed when this happens Decrease the gate time if this error is displayed Enter the expected data signal level in this field The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to allow triggering for valid signals typically about 3 kHz De emphasis should not be used with this signaling format Access th
411. oder Screen AF Anl In This field selects the source of the signal to be decoded FM Demod is normally used since the data being decoded is usually the demodulated signaling data from an EDACS transceiver 301 ain Mo Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen EDACS Decoder Arm Meas Data Input Level Polarity 302 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu Select this field to prepare the decoder to be triggered by transmitted signaling data When selected the Status field indicates Armed This area displays the decoded call request signaling data from your transmitter The type of data displayed depends on the Radio Repeater setting and the type of message decoded This field is used to set the trigger level for the decoder The displayed Trig Level changes as the Input Level is adjusted This field is normally set to 1 kHz for EDACS decoding assuming the AF An1 In field is set to FM Demod Operating Considerations The units displayed kHz V depends on the AF An1 In setting This field is used to match the polarity of the data to be decoded This field is usually set to Norm See Also Polarity on page 392 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen EDACS Decoder Radio Repeater This field specifies whether the decoder will trigger on the received sync word of a mobile signal Radio or on the sync word from a repeater Repeater It also specifies how the received data wi
412. of 121 state diagram 120 Called Number Call Control screen 128 Calling Channel Number Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 432 Calling Name Tests External Devices screen 549 CALLP AuthWORD 167 BSChalOrd 167 NRVC Ord 167 RECCW A 167 RECCW B 167 Index RECCW C 167 RECCW D 167 RECCW E 167 RVCBSChal 167 RVCOrd 167 RVCOrdCon 167 UniqChCon 167 CANCEL key 593 card procedure location 534 543 544 Carrier Configure screen 273 carrier effect on RX TX screen 273 Carrier Ref Adjacent Channel Power screen 96 CC calling channel 331 CCIR1 radio standard 440 CCIR2 radio standard 440 CCITT radio standard 440 CDCSS decoder mode AF analyzer settings 290 AF Anl In 286 Arm Meas 287 Code oct 287 Data bin 287 Data Rate 287 Input Level 288 Polarity 288 Single Cont 289 Stop Meas 289 Trig Level 289 view of 286 CDCSS encoder mode AFGen2 To 376 Audio Out 376 Bursts 376 Code 376 Data Rate 376 FM Coupling 377 Polarity 377 Send 377 Send Mode 378 Standard 378 Stop 378 ain Mon 631 TOC Time 378 view of 375 cellular adapter connectors 576 cellular telephone 374 Center Freq Spectrum Analyzer screen 517 center frequency for notch filter 112 for spectrum analyzer 517 RF signal 100 357 489 568 spectrum analyzer marker 523 Ch Loc Call Control Screen 129 Ch Offset Adjacent Channel Power screen 98 Chan Call Control sc
413. of instrument functions After this screen is accessed push the cursor control knob to display the help Index The knob is then used to select the desired topic Once you have accessed the desired information you can return to the Help Index by pushing the cursor control knob To exit the HELP screen and return to the previous screen press the PREV key 444 Tr 12 VO Configure Screen ain wenu 445 Chapter 12 I O Configure Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions 170 CONFIGURE HP IB Adrs Serial In Serial Baud Pority Hone Dota Lenath 8 bits Stomp Lensth Saye Recall Rew Pace Konf ntf Ant Pace To Screen RF GEN RF ANL AF ANL Aone aot tf SPEC ANL ENCODER DECODER RADIO INT ioconfig wmf Figure 108 The I O Configure Screen The I O CONFIGURE screen s fields are used to specify GPIB and serial communications settings This screen is accessed by selecting the More field directly below the To Screen menu and selecting IO CONFIG 446 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ioscrn f Data Length HP IB Adrs IBASIC Echo Inst Echo Chapter 12 I O Configure Screen Field Descriptions This field specifies the number of bits used for each word of serial data when using the rear panel serial port This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off This field is used to display and change the GPIB address of the Tes
414. oftware interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by Agilent Technologies c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance 7 TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTYOR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND AGILENT TECHNOL OGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDI TIONS OR MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ain wenu 8 Agilent Technologies will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of 300 000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim and for damages for bodily injury or death to the extent that all such dam ages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective Agilent Technologies product 9 TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS
415. ol Message is sent to the mobile station The Access annunciator will light momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile station control message A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator lit before you can attempt to send an order to a mobile station When Authent is set to ON the Order field is not displayed This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is Active annunciator must be lit and the MS Id information field on the CALL CONTROL screen must be correct before you can attempt to page a mobile station When lit the Page annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is currently being paged on the forward control channel This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is the Active annunciator must be lit before you can attempt to register a mobile station When lit the Register annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the base station Main Menu Release Set Message Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection to the mobile station When the Release field is selected a mobile station cont
416. ol channel 216 reverse control channel 171 Abort Print Print Configure screen 464 abort printing 69 ac power source 593 ac coupling input 354 367 377 382 386 391 401 404 433 440 498 output 352 363 376 381 386 390 401 404 431 439 498 AC Level AF Analyzer screen 105 Duplex Test screen 347 Radio Frequency Analyzer screen 484 RF Analyzer screen 483 RF Generator screen 495 RX Test screen 506 ac level measurement 62 peak detector 112 AC access channel 331 AC DC button 593 Access annunciator Call Bit screen 200 Call Control screen 127 Call Data screen 168 access channel channel number call processing 260 channel number NMT 432 Access Channel Number Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 428 Access Channel Power Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 428 access message 208 accessing screens 42 accessories 599 ACP 95 AM transmitter 94 input port 95 level 95 measurement 94 measurement speed 100 626 output port 94 ratio 95 ACP Meas Adjacent Channel Power screen 95 Active Call Bit screen 200 Call Control screen 127 Call Data screen 168 Active annunciator Call Bit screen 200 Call Control screen 128 Call Data screen 168 Add Info Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 428 add options 596 Addr Tests External Devices screen 549 address digital paging 383 HP IB external devices 549 HP IB printer 465 553 HP IB test set 447 592 key 592 pager 292 Address
417. ologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or like new 2 Agilent Technologies warrants that Agilent Technologies software will not fail to exe cute its programming instructions for the period specified above due to defects in ma terial and workmanship when properly installed and used If Agilent Technologies receives notice of such defects during the warranty period Agilent Technologies will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects 3 Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of Agilent Technologies products will be uninterrupted or error free If Agilent Technologies is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product 4 Agilent Technologies products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use 5 The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by Agilent Technologies If customer schedules or delays Agilent Technologies installation more than 30 days after delivery warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery 6 Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate mainte nance or calibration b s
418. oltage will be about 250 mV 474 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fb Main Menu Inputting Data NOTE Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation Data can only be input through parallel data bus lines that are configured as inputs Data bus lines are configured as inputs by setting the output comparators to their logic high states positive output level This is best accomplished by entering a hex value in the I O Config field that will set the corresponding bit s to a 1 For example if you want to use lines 0 7 for input and lines 8 15 for output enter OOFF which would be 0000000011111111 in binary in the 1 0 Config field To read data to the Test Set s internal CPU select the Read Data field on the RADIO INTERFACE screen A 16 bit binary value will be displayed under the Parallel Data In field near the top of the screen Important When data is read the Parallel Data In field will display the value for all 16 parallel data bus lines not just the lines designated as inputs See the I O Config on page 472 The need for configuring pins as inputs is a result of the half duplex hardware architecture of the bus The 16 I O pins on the parallel data bus are connected to both the input data comparators and the output data comparators Because the output comparators are open collector a logic low makes it impossible to input
419. on the other screens Setting the Input Atten field updates all other Input Atten fields but does not change the setting of the Input Att field Accessing the CALL CONFIGURE screen changes the input attenuator to the current value of the Input Att field and updates all Input Atten fields 59 iain Mo Chapter 3 Operating Overview Displaying Measurements Displaying Measurements TX TEST TX Freauency 149 978076 TX Power FM Deviation H Tune Mode Input Port AF Anl In Hutco Moaruml A J Ant FM Qerod Filter 1 Filter 2 1S5kHz LPF Tune Frea AFGeni Lvl mV TX Pur Zero Ext TX key arn AEE De Emphasis ort Detector Fk HNa RX TEST STHAC RF Gen Frea MHz Amplitude Atten Hold n Dft Output Port EE Qut Durel Figure 8 60 S agilent i8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh AFGeni To FH kHz AFGen2 Frea kHz AFGen2 To FM oft Where To Access Measurements DEC an FADIO Main Menu scntxrx wmf Chapter 3 Operating Overview Displaying Measurements Displaying RF Measurements CAUTION Transmitter Frequency TX Frequency is displayed when Tune Mode is set to Auto Refer to item 1 in Figure 8 on page 60 Transmitter Frequency Error TX Freq Error is displayed when Tune Mode is set to Manual Refer to item 1 in Figure 8 on page 60 Transmitter Power TX
420. onnector 575 dc bias offsetting 498 dc coupling 461 input 354 367 377 382 386 391 401 404 433 440 498 offsetting bias 498 output 352 363 376 381 386 390 401 404 431 439 498 DC Current AF Analyzer screen 107 de current zeroing measurement offset 107 DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT con nector description 575 DC FM zero 498 DC INPUT connector 634 description 576 DC Level AF Analyzer screen 108 114 Duplex Test screen 349 RF Analyzer screen 488 RF Generator screen 500 RX Test screen 510 TX TEST screen 564 TX Test screen 106 563 dc level measurement 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 dc wave function generator 402 DCFM 354 367 377 382 386 401 404 433 440 498 decimal format 66 decoder AMPS TACS 277 CDCSS 286 digital paging 291 DTMF 295 EDACS 301 function generator 307 input attenuator 111 485 LTR 311 MPT 1327 317 NAMPS NTACS 277 narrowband 303 NMT 322 selecting 276 set up for 276 squelch effects 487 tone sequence 341 wideband 303 decrement changing setting 68 De Emp Gain AF Analyzer screen 108 De Emphasis AF Analyzer screen 108 Duplex Test screen 352 TX Test screen 564 De emphasis Analog Meas screen 255 de emphasis bypassing 108 352 564 effect on DTMF frequency 297 ain wenu Index filter description 297 gain 108 input level 279 288 297 308 342 off for digital paging 293 off for NMT decoder 325 selecting 108 352 564
421. ons Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Plug Descriptions Agilent Part Cable Descriptions male female cable amp plug Straight Straight 8120 4211 79 inches mint gray Straight 90 8120 4600 79 inches mint gray Used in the following locations Botswana India Lesotho Malawi South West Africa Namibia Swaziland Zambia Zimbabwe Plug Descriptions Agilent Part a Plug Type male female cable amp plug Cable Descriptions Straight Straight 8120 1860 60 inches jade gray Straight Straight 8120 1575 30 inches jade gray Straight 90 8120 2191 60 inches jade gray Straight 90 8120 4379 15 5 inches jade gray Used in the following locations System Cabinets 606 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS accessor fm ain wenu Chapter 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Accessories Plug Type Male en a Cable Descriptions 90 Straight 90 7 8120 1351 90 inches mint gray 90 90 8120 1703 inches mint gray pluat wmf Used in the following locations Bahrain British Indian Ocean Territories Brunei Canton Cyprus Enderbury Island Equatorial Guinea Falkland Islands French Pacific Islands Gambia Ghana Gibraltar Guinea Hong Kong Ireland Kenya Kuwait Macao Malaysia Mauritius Nigeria Qatar Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore Southern Asia Sout
422. ont of various fields See Figure 12 2 Press the different local user keys k1 to k5 and notice how the cursor immediately moves to the corresponding field 3 To stop using the default local user keys press and release the SHIFT key then the k5 key to access the RELEASE function then press the ENTER key RX TEST 8 0 RF Gen Frea AFGeni Frea AFGen2 Frea gt EE ET z kHz kHz Amplitude AFGeni To AFGenZ To 2 FM Fit 3 00 DFF Atten Hold Ext Load R Output Port 3 RE Qut Durel scnusr wmf Figure 12 An Example of Pre Assigned Local User Keys 84 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using USER Keys To Assign Local USER Keys 1 Move the cursor to the field you want to assign a local user key to 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function Then press alocal USER key k1 k5 The user key number appears in front of the field you assigned it to Example of Assigning a Local USER Key Use this example to assign local USER key k1 to the Filter 1 field in the RX TEST screen 1 Access the RX TEST screen and position the cursor in front of the Filter 1 field 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function then press kl A small 1 appears next to the field indicating that USER key k1 has been as signed to it 3 Move the cursor to any other field on the screen and
423. ontroller screen 555 Tests Main Menu screen 532 Tests Printer Setup screen 551 continuous digital controlled squelch sys tem decoder 286 encoder 375 control characters 89 filler 367 filler message 214 message 367 remote 88 status 394 Control Channel Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 413 control channel decoder AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS 277 number call processing 130 turning on 145 155 Control Channel Number Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 390 Control Channel RX Frequency Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 390 Control Channel TX Frequency Signaling Encoder screen EDACS mode 390 Control I O connector description 576 Controls Oscilloscope screen 454 Spectrum Analyzer screen 515 counter AF 106 RF 486 Counter Connection Service screen 512 coupling ac 352 354 363 367 376 377 381 382 386 390 391 401 404 431 433 439 440 498 dc 352 354 363 367 376 377 381 382 386 390 391 401 404 431 433 439 440 461 498 notch frequency 267 CRT VIDEO OUTPUT connector description 575 Current AF Analyzer screen 107 114 Duplex Test screen 349 RF Analyzer screen 488 RF Generator screen 500 RX Test screen 510 TX TEST screen 564 TX Test screen 106 563 current measurement dc 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 cursor control 594 CW RF OUT connector description 576 Index D D direction Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 324 dashes meani
424. operation the control channel message buffer can be de activated by the following GPIB command ENCoder STOP The ENC STOP ENC SEND command sequence is also an UPDATE command New timeslot contents written using ENC MPT1327 MESS CONT DATA are buffered until the STOP SEND sequence causes the control message buffer to be updated NOTE The encoder s sending status can be monitored to establish when a message has been sent by looking at the bit 8 Encoder sending Aux Information in the Hardware Status Register 1 For further information on the Hardware Status Register refer to the Programmer s Guide When the Test Mode field is in Control mode and the control message buffer is activated by ENC SEND the signaling firmware hardware cycles through the defined part of the filler buffer It transmits each 128 bit filler buffer timeslot in turn This happens except where there is a message defined in the corresponding timeslot of the control message buffer In this case the contents of the control message buffer are transmitted as shown in Figure 102 on page 420 419 in Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder TIMESLOT 1 7721B4C0 5439AB12 666430CB 449DDESDO 67230CB2 0980700D oO NO a FF OMD 31 32 FILLER BUFFER CC MESSAGE BUFFER Figure 102 Forward Control Channel in Control Mode and Sending Figure 102 shows that messages defined in contiguous timeslots following
425. opriate for the mobile station to be tested Check the following fields a System Type Select AMPS At this time only AMPS is supported for authen tication NOTE Ifthe System Type field was modified in step 2a the control channel will become active since modifying this field automatically activates the control channel Refer to the System Type on page 140 b Cntl Channel Set the control channel number to be used by the Test Set NOTE If the Cnt1 Channel field was modified in step 2b the control channel will become active since modifying this field automatically activates the control channel Refer to Cntl Channel on page 130 c d e Amplitude Set the output power of the Test Sets s transmitter that is the output power of the Test Set s RF Generator SID Enter the system identification number of the Test Set as a decimal number Chan right hand field Enter the voice channel number which will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial voice channel assignment or as a handoff voice channel assignment Pwr Lvl right hand field Enter the Voice Mobile Attenuation Code VMAC The VMAC determines the mobile station power level to be used on the voice chan nel See Chan on page 129 for more information about the voice channel SAT right hand field Enter the SAT frequency to be used on the designated voice channel See Chan on page 129 for more i
426. or screen 501 TX Test screen 569 TX key 592 TX Power Adjacent Channel Power screen 101 AF Analyzer screen 116 Analog Meas screen 255 Call Control screen 140 Duplex Test screen 358 RF Analyzer screen 490 RF Generator screen 501 TX Test screen 569 TX Pwr Meas Agilent 8920B Adjacent Channel Power screen 101 RF Analyzer screen 490 TX Pwr Meas HP 8920B TX Test screen 570 TX Pwr Zero Adjacent Channel Power screen 102 ain Mon 661 Call Configuration screen 260 RF Analyzer screen 491 TX Test screen 570 TX TEST screen Current 564 DC Level 564 Distortion 566 SINAD 568 TX Test Screen view of 561 TX Test screen AF Anl In 562 AF Freq 106 563 AFGen1 Freq 564 AFGenl Lvl 564 Current 106 563 DC Level 106 563 De emphasis 564 Detector 565 Distn 106 563 Ext TX key 566 Filter 1 and Filter 2 566 FM Deviation 566 functional block diagram 561 IF Filter 566 Input Port 567 priority settings 56 SINAD 106 563 SNR 106 563 Tune Freq 568 Tune Mode 568 TX Freq Error 569 TX Frequency 569 TX Power 569 TX Pwr Meas Agilent 8920B 570 TX Pwr Zero 570 Type Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 324 type bits 367 369 662 U undisplayed controls Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode 414 UniqChCon CALLP 167 unit of measure changing 64 67 converting 64 67 keys 590 Units Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 541 units peak 401 rms 401 universal noise function gen
427. os It has the range 0 through 127 and its default value is 000 The ident is a four digit decimal integer with leading zeros It has the range 0 through 8191 and its default value is 0002 426 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder The NMT Encoder screen is used to create the different signals used to communicate between the Mobile Station MS Base Station BS and Mobile Telephone Exchange MTX The signal is output under program control from the NMT Decoder screen The operation of the NMT Encoder is strongly dependent on functions used in the NMT Decoder screen For information about using the NMT Encoder and Decoder see Using the NMT Decoder Encoder on page 327 and Creating NMT Tests on page 332 SIGNALING EREDDER ae GENERATOR 2 Hint er Power Calling Channel Traffic ChanneliMain Traffic ChanneliAlt Mode Traffic Area oc Em z NT Statusi Idle Nant Maint DUT Standard lt Meas Field STO450 TEI Meas Ch Strensth Phi Sianal Off uF GEN ee a i 2 A H L i assword Access Humber Power Hudig Out 000 Channel i BS Identity I Bott Save 515 g Response I lt Alarm Level i Hish Low Challense PIERRE epee era EE nee NEE lesen ER nmt eni wmf Figure 106 The NMT
428. oscrr_th Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder Forward Control Channel Message and Filler Buffers This control is only available using IBASIC commands it is not displayed on the MPT 1327 Encoder screen The encoder screen Test Mode field selects the type of signal being transmitted by the signaling hardware as explained in Test Mode on page 413 The most important modes are the Control and Traffic modes In the Control mode the Test Set continuously generates a slotted aloha forward control channel as defined and controlled from IBASIC In Traffic mode the Test Set generates individual messages as defined and controlled from IBASIC These modes are central to testing MPT 1327 RUs An RU must acquire and validate a control channel It must also be instructed by control channel signaling to proceed to a traffic channel before any RF or audio measurements can be performed During testing it is necessary to generate the forward control channel continuously initially for the RU to acquire and validate the control channel for exchanging the necessary call setup signaling thereafter for the RU to remain locked onto the control channel awaiting exchange of further signaling This also prevents the RU from re entering control channel acquisition procedures The exception to this is when the RU under test is participating in a test callon a traffic channel It is not necessary to maintain
429. ows you to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzer s circuitry when making ac level measurements See Also Figure 15 AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram on page 104 112 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS afasern fb Main Menu Scope To Settling Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Oscilloscope To selects the signal source for the Oscilloscope This allows you to bypass certain sections of the AF analyzer s circuitry when viewing and measuring a signal It also allows you to select measurement paths that include additional gain stages improving the oscilloscope s resolution when measuring low level signals See Also Figure 15 AF ANALYZER Functional Block Diagram on page 104 This field selects the settling time for making AF measurements Lower frequency signals require additional settling time Slow Higher frequency measurements require less settling time Fast Operating Considerations Use Slow for lt 200 Hz signals Use Fast for gt 200 Hz signals If the signal being measured is a composite of different frequencies above and below 200 Hz select the appropriate filtering to analyze the desired signal component 113 iain Mo Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram SINAD This measurement field is used to select and display any one of the following measurements SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Ope
430. pager address 292 alpha numeric format 383 code address 292 data type 292 numeric format 383 signal type 292 testing 291 380 tone only format 383 Pager Alpha Numeric Message Signaling Encoder screen DigiPage mode 383 Pager Code Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 383 Pager Numeric Message Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 383 Pager Type Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 383 paging mobile station 146 157 Parallel Data In Radio Interface screen 472 Parallel Port connector description 581 Parity T O Configure screen 448 parity bits 367 369 370 Parm Test Parameters Tests Main Menu screen 533 Pass Word Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 543 pass fail limits 70 Password Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 435 password 557 PCMCIA card see Memory card 74 peak hold spectrum analyzer 527 spectrum analyzer marker 523 units 401 497 507 peak detector 109 112 353 565 signal source 112 peak oscilloscope marker 456 Phi Signal Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 434 Phone Num Call Control screen 138 phone number called by mobile 128 MS Id 136 156 164 Pk Det To AF Analyzer screen 112 Pk Hold Spectrum Analyzer screen 527 POCSAG data rates 381 radio standard 384 Polarity Signaling Decoder screen TACS mode 280 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 288 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 294 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS mode 302 Signali
431. pan setting in the Spectrum Analyzer s Main Menu Operating Considerations When using the Tracking Generator if the output port is set RF Out or the main menu Input Port is set to RF In internal instrument coupling can occur For the best isolation between the Tracking Generator and the Spectrum Analyzer use Dupl for the output and Ant for the input For measurements on high power devices such as amplifiers use the RF IN OUT port for the input Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Spectrum Analyzer Marker Menu Fields a Marker sascrn5 wmf Figure 129 Setting Markers on the Spectrum Analyzer Marker To e Peak moves the marker to the highest peak and enters the location in the Position field e Next Peak moves the marker to the next peak to the right and enters the location in the Position field e Center Freq changes the center frequency value to match the current position of the marker e Ref Level changes the reference level setting to match the current position of the marker Position This field sets the marker position referenced to the left side of the screen 523 Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Marker Measurements SPECTRUM ANALYZER BW 3 kHz Marker req 150 00000 Lv EM i 56 93 EEIE AETR T Eee To Screen sascrni wmf Figure 130 Reading Measurement Results at the Spectrum Analyzer s Markers Marker
432. parameter overhead parameter message e lt A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 211 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions REG ID Message Fields Set Message REG ID Registration ID Message Figure 41 REG ID Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code field REGID Registration ID field END End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word 212 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 213 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions C FILMESS Message Fie
433. ped The interrupt can only be cleared when the line returns to the high state and the interrupt is armed again The status of the interrupt lines can be read from the RADIO INTERFACE screen or by a GPIB or IBASIC program Also one of the interrupts can be designated as the GPIB service request SRQ indicator Logic is active low Input impedance is internally pulled up to the logic voltage through 100 kQ Logic threshold is the same as the parallel data pins 13 Interrupt Input 2 See pin 14 14 No Connection 585 ain Men Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions RF IN OUT CAUTION 586 15 Parallel Data In Out e You can designate these pins as outputs or inputs with the I O CONFIG field of the RADIO INTERFACE screen Pins designated as inputs are pulled high by the Test Set Output level and input logic thresholds are set by the logic voltage pin 9 e Pin 19 is LSB Pin 34 is MSB e High level output is Logic Voltage through a 3 16 KQ pull up resistor Output current sink TTL low voltage lt 1 5 V is 6 mA minimum 16 mA typical Input data logic threshold is Logic Voltage 0 7 V x 0 34 The default Logic Voltage is 5 1 V e Read back on the data bus is accomplished by setting all data lines to the high state and then having the user pull appropriate data lines low according to the data to be read back 16 No Connection See Also Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen
434. peration 55 Batt Save Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 431 Battery memory card 77 part numbers 77 replacing 77 battery 53 saving 431 baud rate 449 beat frequency 65 Beeper Configure screen 53 264 beeper error alert 264 volume control 53 264 Bell radio standard 387 bias dc offsetting 498 billing information 436 bit error 381 bits CDCSS data rate 287 CDCSS data stream 379 CDCSS sequence 287 digitial paging data rate 292 dotting 367 369 630 information 367 369 LTR data rate 312 message 285 NMT data rate 432 parity 285 367 369 370 serial data word 447 specifying patter to display 281 sync word 285 triggering 281 type 367 369 word sync 367 369 block diagram AF Analyzer 105 Duplex Test screen 347 RF Analyzer 483 RF Generator 495 RX Test 505 TX Test 561 brightness setting 52 266 BS definition 322 BS Identity Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 431 BSChalOrd CALLP 167 buffer overflow error 293 Bursts Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 364 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 376 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page mode 381 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF mode 386 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 404 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 364 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq mode 440 busy state 364 Busy Idle Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 364 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP ain wenu NTAC mode 364 Index
435. played in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen If page with authentication failed then Page w Auth failed will be displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CAll CONTROL Screen 157 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Originate a Call with Authentication 1 2 pi 158 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel on page 145 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Ensure that the mobile station has registered with the Test Set See Initialize Call Processing with Authentication on page 155 for information on how to register the mobile station Dial the desired phone number on the mobile station and press the SEND key on the mobile station s handset The mobile station signals the Test Set on the reverse control channel with an origination message which includes the dialed phone number the mobile station s MIN number and the mobile station s ESN
436. press k1 The cursor immediately returns to the Filter 1 field The field is also highlighted to change the entry using the CURSOR CONTROL knob or arrow keys To Release Local USER Keys 1 Display the screen containing the user key assignment to be removed 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k5 key to access the RELEASE function then press the USER key k1 k5 85 iain Mo Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using USER Keys To Assign Global USER Keys 1 Move the cursor to the field you want to assign a global user key to 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function Then press SHIFT and a global USER key k1 k3 Unlike a local user key the user key number does not appear at this field instead a prompt appears at the top of the screen confirming the key assignment Example of Assigning a Global USER Key Use this example to assign global USER key k1 to the AF Anl In field and then access this field from the OSCILLOSCOPE screen 1 Access the AF ANALYZER screen and position the cursor in front of the AF Anl In field 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function 3 Press SHIFT k1 Notice the prompt Global User key 1 assigned at the top of the screen 4 Access the OSCILLOSCOPE screen 5 Press SHIFT k1 AF Anl Input FM Demod is displayed at the top of the screen assuming the present input is set to FM Demod To
437. print 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 465 an wenu Chapter 15 Print Configure Screen Field Descriptions 466 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIprinscrn fh Main Menu 16 Radio Interface Screen The RADIO INTERFACE screen controls the digital functions of the rear panel RADIO INTERFACE parallel connector A functional description of the radio interface followed by field descriptions and operating instructions is included in this chapter For more information see Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions and the Programmer s Guide 467 ain wenu Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Radio Interface Functional Description Radio Interface Functional Description Data I O 468 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fh The rear panel connector labeled OPTION INTERFACE is present on Test Sets with a Radio Interface board This connector has 16 pins that are used for parallel data transfer between an external device and the Test Set s internal CPU The Radio Interface board includes 32 voltage comparators used for data input output Sixteen of the comparators have their outputs connected to the Radio Interface s 16 parallel data pins and 16 comparators have their inputs connected to the Radio Interface s 16 parallel data pins Data transfer is async
438. ps to 2 3 of the field level setting The subscriber identity security challenge field is used to confirm a subscriber s MS identity Valid Entry Range 0000000 through FFFFFFF hex NMT Frame Affected 7 Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard The subscriber identity security response field is used to respond to the SIS challenge to confirm a subscriber s MS identity Valid Entry Range 0000 through FFFF hex NMT Frame Affected 16 Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard 435 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Standard TCI Traffic Area Alt 436 This NMT system standard for equipment you are testing When a standard is chosen the Test Set automatically alters several corresponding parameters Operating Considerations Each standard affects the following conditions e The types of frames that can be sent e The range of valid channel numbers e The encoding of the frame data e The frequencies tuned to for the various channel settings when CHAN programming commands are executed in an NMT program e The interpretation of received frames The following standards are available STD450 Transmit and receive frequencies are in the 453 to 467 5 MHz range STD900 Transmit and receive frequencies are in the 890 to 960 MHz range See Also Calling Channel Number on pa
439. ption 576 Main Menu 641 J JTACS radio standard 373 simulated system 140 642 K k1 through k5 83 k1 through k3 83 key sequences for front panel controls 89 90 keyboard external 450 keying effect on amplitude 351 497 508 519 521 external transmitter 98 354 484 566 keys Leftarrow 593 ADRS 592 backspace 593 CANCEL 593 CONFIG 592 DATA 590 DATA FUNCTIONS 591 DUPLEX 592 EEX 590 ENTER 590 front panel 590 HELP 592 HI LIMIT 591 HOLD 592 INCR SET 591 LO LIMIT 591 LOCAL 592 MEAS RESET 592 MSSG 592 NO 590 ON OFF 590 POWER 593 PRESET 592 PREV 592 PRINT 592 RECALL 592 REF SET 591 RX 592 SAVE 592 SCREEN CONTROL 592 SHIFT TESTS 593 592 TX 592 unit of measure 590 YES 590 knob ain wenu Index CURSOR CONTROL 594 SQUELCH 594 VOLUME 594 L LAST CALIB Configure screen 267 Latch Service screen 512 leakage ACP measurement 100 left arrow key 593 level ac 62 ACP 95 AF analyzer 279 288 293 297 302 308 312 325 342 AF generator 1 564 data 364 oscilloscope 457 reference for spectrum analyzer 517 spectrum analyzer 524 supervisory audio tone 372 triggering 281 289 294 309 314 326 343 Level div Oscilloscope screen 459 Library Tests Main Menu screen 533 limits example 71 indicators 70 pass fail 70 removing 71 setting 70 Lines
440. quired Hardware for Additional Test Set Functions Chapter Function Required Hardware AD CH PWR Adjacent Channel Power Option 102 Spectrum Analyzer SPEC ANL Spectrum Analyzer Option 102 SpectrumAnalyzer LVL_MTR signal strength meter A16 Receiver Assembly ROM Program TDMA TEST Agilent 83201A B Cellular Adapter PDC TEST PHP TEST Agilent 83201B Cellular Adapter CDMA TEST Agilent 83203A B Cellular Adapters TDMA Agilent 83204 Cellular Adapter TDMA DCCH DAMPS Agilent 83206A Cellular Adapter PCS Agilent 83236B Interface RADIO INT Option 020 Radio Interface Port Encoder Decoder Option 004 Tone Digital Signaling 621 Chapter 622 Turn off either AM or FM settings You tried to create simultaneous AM and FM using any combination of AFGenl AFGen2 and the Mod In To field The Test Set does not provide simultaneous AM and FM Squelch interrupt overflow Press MEAS RESET The Test Set temporarily interrupts audio measurements when squelch is first broken to prevent internal switching transients from influencing measurements except when using the OSCILLOSCOPE SPECTRUM ANALYZER DECODER or SERVICE screens If squelch is repetitively broken in a period of a few seconds the duration of measurement interruption becomes too great and the Test Set stops interrupting the signal Following measurements may be influenced by t
441. r 394 Working Channel RXFrequency 394 Working Channel TXFrequency 394 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen mode AFGen2 Freq 401 AFGen2 To 401 Audio Out 401 FM Coupling 401 Sine Units 401 Waveform 402 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode AFGen2 To 404 Area 1 404 Area 2 404 Audio Out 404 Bursts 404 Data Rate 404 FM Coupling 404 Free 1 405 Free 2 405 Goto 1 405 Goto 2 405 Home 1 405 Home 2 405 ID 1 405 ID 2 405 LTR message 405 Polarity 405 Send 405 Send Mode 406 Standard 406 Stop 406 Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 mode Address Qualifier 411 Aloha Number 412 Control Channel 413 Radio Unit Under Test 425 Simulated CallingUnit 426 System Identity 425 Test Mode 413 Traffic Channel 414 undisplayed controls 414 Signaling Encoder screen NTAC mode AFGen2 To 363 366 Audio Out 363 NAMP ain wenu Index B I Delay FOCC 364 Bursts 364 Busy Idle 364 Channel 364 Data Level 364 Data Rate 365 DSAT 365 FM Coupling 367 Message 368 370 Message DST 371 Polarity 371 Send 372 Send DSAT 372 Send Filler 372 Send Mode 373 Standard 373 Stop 373 Stop DSAT 373 Stop Filler 373 Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode Access Channel Number 428 Access Channel Power 428 Add Info 428 AFGen2 To 429 Alarm Level High 430 Alarm Level Low 430 Area 430 Audio Out 431 Batt Save 431 BS Identity 431 Calling Channel Number 432 Data Rate 432 DUT 433 FM Coupl
442. r Sending a logic 1 causes passive pull up through a pull up resistor Variations in the Logic Voltage can be used to provide logic levels compatible with the radio under test See Setting the Radio Interface s Logic Level on page 473 The data transfer rate for data output is primarily determined by the speed of the IBASIC or external program not the ability of the Test Set s internal CPU to access and output the data on the parallel lines or the output loading capacitance If loading capacitance is below 158 pF the Test Set s CPU can send data at about 200 Kb s The time for a program line to execute is typically greater than this The Parallel Strobe Out pin 13 can be used to signal when output data has been clocked onto the parallel data bus The front panel RADIO INTERFACE screen allows the choice of strobe polarity through the Strobe Pol field As with the parallel data outputs the Parallel Strobe Out logic threshold is determined by the Logic Voltage Although the edges of Parallel Strobe Out and data output occur at approximately the same time an external device should latch on the Strobe Pol trailing edge or better yet the Strobe Pol level This will allow sufficient time for output data to settle Refer to Figure 118 on page 477 Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using the Radio Interface Manual Operation Parallel Data Strobe Logic Voltage Strobe POL High Low Para
443. r 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions SINAD Tune Freq Tune Mode 568 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItxtscrn fh Main Menu This field is only visible when SINAD is selected from the AF Freq field on the display area of the TX TEST screen This field displays the measured SINAD of the input signal RF Analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations If the Tune Mode is set to Auto the frequency is set by the Test Set by finding the strongest RF signal above 36 dBm within the full bandwidth of the RF Analyzer If the Tune Mode is set to Manual the operator must enter the desired frequency See Also Tune Mode on page 568 This field selects automatic or manual tuning of the RF Analyzer Auto causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude gt 36 dBm and set the tune frequency for that signal Manual requires the operator to set the tune frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations Changing the Tune Mode also changes the RF frequency display Automatic tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement Manual tuning enables the TX Freq Error measurement After autotuning to the desired signal select Manual to prevent the Tune Freq from changing when the signal is no longer applied TX Freq Error TX Frequency TX Power CAUTION Chapter 23 TX Test Screen Field Descriptions This
444. r Type 383 Polarity 383 Send 384 Send Mode 384 Standard 384 Stop 384 view of 380 digital signaling tone 280 285 digital supervisory audio tone 133 280 285 digital test connections 576 disarm measurment 303 radio interface interrupt 471 disk procedure location 534 543 544 Display Call Control screen 131 Display Page Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page mode 292 Display Word Call Data screen 168 Distn AF Analyzer screen 114 Duplex Test screen 349 RF Analyzer screen 488 RF Generator screen 500 RX Test screen 510 TX Test screen 106 563 Distortion Audio Frequency Analyzer screen 108 RF Analyzer screen 484 TX TEST screen 566 distortion 63 measurement 106 114 349 488 500 510 563 measurement amplifier 112 measurement variable notch filter 112 dotting bits 367 369 down arrow key 591 downloading programs 336 DSAT 280 285 Call Control Screen 134 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 365 DSAT hex Call Control Screen 133 DST 280 285 DTMF 280 285 DTMF decoder mode AF Anl In 295 Arm Meas 295 Gate Time 296 Hi Tone 296 Input Level 297 Lo Tone 298 Off Time 298 On Time 298 Single Cont 298 Stop Meas 299 Sym 299 view of 295 DTMF sequence Index outputting 387 DTMF Sequence encoder mode AFGen 2 To 385 Audio Out 386 Bursts 386 FM Coupling 386 Off Time 386 On Time 386 Pre Emp 387 Send 387 Send Mode 387 Standard 387 Stop 387
445. r a failure is detected External Devices is used to specify what types of external equipment are con nected to the Test Set and their addresses It is also used to specify where to store test result data Printer Setup is used to control which test results are output and where the results are printed This screen is also used for basic formatting of the printout lines per page and form feeds Printer port and printer model number are also chosen on this screen IBASIC Cntrl is used to run IBASIC programs This screen is also used as a stand alone IBASIC computer See the Instrument BASIC Programmer s Handbook for in formation about writing your own tests for the Test Set 531 Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Main Menu TESTS Main Menu TESTS Main Menu Please select a procedure to load PEE AContinue LOAD TEST PROCEQURE Select Procedure Location EICHE Select Procedure Filename Library Program Description CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE SET UP TEST SET SCOPE SPEC ANL BEE Channel Information Execution Cond ENCODER ee Test Farometers Mite External Devices DECODER Beg Order of Tests mee Printer Setur RADIO IHT Poss Foil Limits IBASIC Cntrl wens Sove Delete Procedure More tstmain wmf Figure 132 The TESTS Main Menu Screen Cnfg External Devices Selecting this field displays the TESTS External Devices screen Continue This field is used to restart a paused test
446. r after a control message has been sent using Send The control message is stopped whenever Stop Filler Filler Channel Data Rate Polarity or AFGen2 To is selected Both filler fields must be full seven digits for the forward control channel information to be structured correctly Do not leave any blank spaces This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector 367 ar wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Message FOCC The data you enter here FOCC Stream A Stream B Filler Filler ME HEN Message Message E LT i Y uT Information ra 2 Bits 26 Bits 12 Bits u lt Contents of the Message or Filler Field u WORD B WORDA er is output in this sequence 10 Bits 11 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits WORD REPEAT 1 REPEAT 1 REPEAT 2 DOTTING OF OF OF SYNC WORDA WORD B WORDA Busy Idle Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 10 Bits REPEAT 4 REPEAT 5 REPEAT 5 OF OF OF DOTTING WORD B WORDA WORD B Figure 88 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS FOCC Message and Filler Data Format Message streams A and B specify various forward control channel parameters Operating Considerations Like the filler information t
447. r of Tests screen 539 Test Procedure Run Mode Tests Execution Conditions screen 547 test set configuring 51 test subsystem 531 Tests Channel Information screen 531 Delete Ch 536 Insert Ch 536 Main Menu 536 537 Print All 536 537 view of 535 Tests Execution Conditions screen 531 Autostart Test Procedureon Power Up 546 Continue 546 If Unit Under Test Fails 546 Main Menu 546 Output Heading 546 Output Results For 547 Output Results To 546 Run Test 547 Test Procedure Run Mode 547 view of 545 Tests External Devices screen 531 Addr 549 Calling Name 549 Delet Ins 549 External Disk Specification 549 Insrt Ins 549 Inst 550 Main Menu 550 Index Model 550 Options 550 Output Heading 550 view of 548 Tests IBASIC Controller screen 531 Clr Scr 555 Continue 555 Main Menu 555 Sngl Step 555 view of 554 Tests Main Menu screen 531 Cnfg External Devices 532 Continue 532 Description 532 Exec Execution Cond 532 Freq Channel Information 533 IBASIC IBASIC Cntrl 533 Library 533 Parm Test Parameters 533 Pass Fail Limits 534 Print Printer Setup 533 Proc Save Delete Procedure 533 Program 533 Run Test 533 Select Procedure Filename 533 Select Procedure Location 534 Seqn Order of Tests 534 view of 532 Tests Order of Tests screen 531 All Chans 538 Delet Stp 539 Insrt Stp 539 Main Menu 539 Output Heading 539 Spec 541 Step 539 Test Name 539 view of 5
448. r the traffic channel number The traffic channel is a four digit decimal integer without leading zeros It has the range 0 through 1023 and its default value is 1 Undisplayed Controls Some MPT 1327 controls are not displayed on the encoder screen they are only accessed using IBASIC commands over GPIB These controls include the delay parameter the SYNC and SYNT synchronization codewords and the message and filler buffers The controls listed in the remainder of this section are not displayed on the MPT 1327 Encoder screen Delay Parameter for Repeat Transmissions This control is only available using IBASIC commands it is not displayed on the MPT 1327 Encoder screen In the aloha message there is a bit field which indicates to the radio unit RU how long it should wait for a response from the TSC If the RU does not receive a response within this period it should re issue the request This is generally set to a fixed value determined by the protocol speed and the responsiveness of IBASIC In some circumstances it may be useful to change this value Table 11 Delay Parameter to Actual Response Delay Delay Parameter Response delay 0 0 SD MY BY WwW MR m Mn Bl WwW N The delay parameter has a range 0 through 7 with a default value of 7 This control is listed as RDELay in the GPIB Syntax Diagrams in the Programmer s Guide 414 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS enc
449. r used when measuring and displaying AF signal levels Detector Types e RMS displays the RMS value of signals e RMS SQRT2 displays the RMS value of a signal multiplied by 2 e Pk displays the positive peak value e Pk displays the negative peak value e Pk 2 adds the positive and negative peak values and divides the sum by 2 e Pk Max compares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value polarity is not indicated e Pk Hold displays and holds the positive peak value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key or select a different detector or reselect the same detector e Pk Hold displays and holds the negative peak value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or reselect the same detector e Pk 2 Hold divides the sum of the positive and negative peak values by 2 and displays the value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or reselect the same detector e Pk Mx Holdcompares the positive and negative peaks and displays the greater value until the measurement is reset To reset press the MEAS RESET key select a different detector or reselect the same detector Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on pa
450. ransient signals Pressing MEAS RESET clears the data buffer used to generate interrupts resetting the normal squelch operation to eliminate transients This condition may occur when monitoring low level off the air signals Cal file checksum incorrect initializing file This error usually occurs after changing the Test Set s firmware ROM s It is not a prob lem in that instance but should not re appear during subsequent operation of the Test Set Decoder buffer full Decrease gate time Too many decoder samples were sent to the decoder s buffer during a measurement gate time causing a data overflow Reducing the gate time decreases the amount of data sent during each measurement S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm ain wenu Chapter One or more self tests failed Error code XXXX An instrument failure was detected when the Test Set was turned on For example having a stuck front panel key during turn on The numbered error message corresponds to a binary weighted group of errors listed in the TST Common Command description in the Programmer s Guide Change Ref Level Input Port or Attenuator if using Hold The RF signal level is either too great or too small for the current input port attenuator set ting or both This error often occurs when trying to make a low level measurement using the RF IN OUT port with the Spectrum Analyzer Make the indicated changes until this m
451. rating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation e Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement e The RF Generator and AFGen must be set up to provide the radio s carrier AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement e AFGen2 must be turned off e The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port set the AF Anl Infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 SNR The SNR field is found by selecting the SINAD field on the Test Set display of the AF ANALYZER screen This field displays the signal to noise ratio of the input audio signal 1 Agilent 8920Brequires Current Measurement option 114 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS afascrn fb Main Menu Speaker ALC Speaker Vol Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Speaker Automatic Level Control enables disables the ALC function for the instrument s internal speaker When On is selected the speaker volume is independent of the signal level being measured When Off is selected the speaker volume is dependent on the signal level being measured Speaker Volume enables disables the instrument s internal speaker When Pot is selected the VOLUME control knob operates normally When Off is selected the speaker is disconnected TX Freq Error TX Freq
452. rating Overview Using USER Keys Using USER Keys User keys instantly access instrument settings without using the knob You can use user keys to move quickly between fields on the same screen and to access field settings that are not normally available on the screen you are using Local user keys are used to move between settings on the screen that is displayed When the user key is pressed the cursor instantly moves to and selects the assigned field eliminating the need to turn and push the knob Five local user keys are available for each screen k1 k2 k3 k4 and K5 Five factory assigned local user keys are available in each screen however using these keys removes any other local user keys you may have already set up Global user keys are used to access settings that are not available on the current screen Three global user keys are available k1 k2 and k3 These are shifted functions of the local user keys When defining user keys the ASSIGN function is used to create key definitions the RELEASE function removes the definitions Re assigning a user key to a different field setting automatically releases it from the setting it was previously associated with 83 iain Mo Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using USER Keys To Use the Pre Assigned Local USER Keys 1 Press and release the SHIFT key then the k4 key to access the ASSIGN function then press the ENTER key The numbers 1 through 5 appear in fr
453. rd control channel and no communication will be possible Radio Unit Under Test The Radio Unit Under Test function uses two input fields a 7 bit Prefix field and a 13 bit Ident field This allows you to enter the prefix and identity of your radio unit RU Each RU has a unique prefix ident value that is used to address messages to that RU only An RU can also have a number of group prefix ident values that it and several other RUs respond to The prefix is a three digit decimal integer with leading zeros It has the range 0 through 127 and its default is 000 The ident is a four digit decimal integer with leading zeros It has the range 0 through 8191 and its default is 0001 425 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the MPT 1327 Encoder Simulated Calling Unit The Simulated Calling Unit function uses two input fields a 7 bit Prefix field and a 13 bit Ident field This allows you to enter the prefix and identity of the calling unit To test an RU the Test Set simulates a Trunking System Controller TSC In some tests the Test Set simulates calls from a third party For this purpose it is necessary to specify the simulated calling unit s number The simulated calling party could be any radio or line unit It could also be one of the special idents indicating for example a system wide call or a call from a PABX or PSTN gateway The prefix is a three digit decimal integer with leading zer
454. rder field and select it A Choices menu is displayed showing the var ious power levels which the mobile station can be set to Select the desired power level from the Choices menu The Test Set will then signal the mobile station with an or der to set its power level If the mobile responds properly the measured value in the TX Power field will change Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Select the Order field Select the desired power level from the Choices menu The Access annunciator will light while the Test Set signals the mobile station with an or der to set its power level If the mobile responds properly the message REVC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen and then the decoded order confirmation message received from the mobile station will be displayed The left hand Pwr Lv1 field will be updated with the new power level information The Connect annunciator will light when signaling is complete 149 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Originate a Call from a Mobile Station 1 1 D a 150 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fh Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn On The Test Set s Control Channel on page 145 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Fig
455. reen 129 Chan Space Configure screen 264 Channel Signaling Decoder TACS mode 278 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 278 Signaling Encoder screen AMPS TACS mode 364 Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 364 channel access NMT 432 assignments NMT 432 bandwidth ACP measurement 96 calling NMT 432 changing 410 number control channel 130 number NMT encoder 432 offset ACP measurement 98 spacing user defined 264 traffic NMT 432 trunked home receiver 408 trunked home transmitter 409 tuning 270 Channel BW Adjacent Channel Power screen 96 channel power level 95 measurement 94 AMPS screen 632 measuring 95 ratio 95 channel standard AMPS MS LS 269 ETACS MS LS 269 JTACS MS LS 269 LTR800 900 MS LS 269 NAMPS MSL MSM MSU LSL LSM LSU 269 NTACS MS LS 269 TACS MS LS 269 USER DEF 269 chassis ground 575 Check Tests Pass Fail Limits screen 541 clear global user key assignment 86 local user key assignment 85 RAM 557 register contents 80 557 clock time of day 274 Clr Scr Tests IBASIC Controller screen 555 CMAX Call Configuration screen 260 Cnfg External Devices Tests Main Menu screen 532 Cntl Channel Call Control screen 130 co channel interference 430 Code Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS mode 376 Code oct Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS mode 287 Code Location Tests Save Delete Procedure screen 543 code word CDCS
456. reen is viewed the contents of the display words will be the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registration origination page release order 195 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL DATA Screen To View The Reverse Channel Words From a Mobile Station Origination 1 2 If not already done condition the Test Set See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for further information If not already done configure the Test Set See Configure the Test Set on page 144 for further information Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station Ensure that the Test Set is in the Connect state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel Select the Active field The Active annunciator will light when the control channel is turned on Dial the desired phone number on the mobile station and press the SEND key on the mobile station s handset The mobile station signals the Test Set on the reverse control channel with an origination message which includes the dialed phone number the mobile station s MIN number and the mobile station s ESN If the mobile station transmitted properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the
457. rength measurement s alarm for the Phi signal Valid Entry Range 0 through F hex NMT Frames Affected 20 25 Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard This field sets the upper trigger level for the signal strength measurement s alarm for the Phi signal Valid Entry Range 0 through F hex NMT Frames Affected 20 25 Operating Considerations This field is only used with the STD900 standard The area number field identifies which MTX is used to call an MS This identification prevents MS to BS calling problems caused by co channel interference Valid Entry Range through 4 NMT Frames Affected 1b 1bS 1bTA1 1bTA2 2a 2a 2a 2e 3bTA2 3b 3bTC2 4 4TA2 4b 4bTA2 10a 10aAC 10b 10c 10d 11a 11b 12 30 Operating Considerations This information is used to encode the information in the last three digits of the Add Info field rather than taking the information directly from that field This field is only used with the STD900 standard Audio Out BS Identity Batt Save Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Nordic Mobile Telephone NMT Encoder Audio out coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the encoder to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out The base station identity field provides the 3 digit hex code that identifies which BS an MTX is communicating with Valid Entry Range 000 through FFF hex NMT Fr
458. requency being measured 310 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu LTR Decoder Figure 78 AF Anl In Arm Meas Data Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen LTR Decoder This decoder mode displays trunked signaling data for mobile radios and repeaters using the EF Johnson LTR Logic Trunked Radio format Data Rate Data LTR display Rodio Rereater SIGNALING DECODER mStor Meas Gate Time 1 0000 5 AF Anl In Input Level 1 0 Tria Level 383 nY Polarity The LTR Trunked Radio Decoder Screen Status Idle Hode i Standard Itr de1 wmf Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed almost always FM Demod for LTR decoding Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal when set to make a single measurement This field displays decoded LTR data The LTR display setting determines what type of data is decoded an wenu 311 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen LTR Decoder Data Rate Gate Time Input Level 312 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu This display field lists the data rate of the received signal Operating Considerations This measurement relies on the LTR Encoder screen s data rate setting Set the encoder s Data Rate field to the expected incoming data rate for accurate measurements typically 297
459. requency is always 10 MHz independent of the selected input reference frequency Electrostatic discharges to the 10 MHz REF INPUT port of 0 5 kV or above may cause degradation of performance requiring operator intervention 10 MHz REF OUTPUT This connector furnishes a 10 MHz reference for external instruments Operating Considerations Waveform sinewave Output frequency 10 MHz Output level gt 0 5 V rms Output impedance approximately 50Q NOTE The reference output frequency is always 10 MHz independent of the selected input reference frequency 589 ain wenu Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Key Descriptions Key Descriptions DATA Keys The DATA keys have four main uses The 0 to 9 and A to F keys are for entering and changing values ENTER is used to select a field or screen and to enter numbers when the unit of mea sure is not specified This function is identical to pressing the cursor control knob ON OFF is used to enable and disable measurements and to turn numeric fields such as Amplitude on and off YES and NO are used to confirm selected operations before they are executed EEX SHIFT is used for entering numbers using scientific notation The remaining keys in this area are for entering and changing the unit of measure for measurements or field entries See Also Entering and Changing Numbers on page 66 590 S agilent 89
460. right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen The Test Set and the mobile station are now linked and further call processing functions with authentication can be tested If the order failed then SSD Update Order Failed will appear on the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen 159 ain Men Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to test AMPS Authentication Performing an SSD Update on the Voice Channel 1 2 p pi 10 11 12 13 160 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fh Ensure that the Test Set is in the active state See Turn on the Test Set s Control Channel on page 155 for information on how to activate the Test Set Connect the mobile station to the Test Set as shown in Figure 17 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Ensure that the Test Set has Initialized Call Processing with Authentication See Initialize Call Processing with Authentication on page 155 for information on how to register the mobile station and activate Authentication Ensure that the mobile station is on a voice channel See Page a Mobile Station with Authentication on page 157 Select AUTHEN from the To Screen
461. riptions Field Descriptions The MESSAGE screen lists any error or operation messages that have occurred since the instrument was turned on The type of error and the time it occurred are listed If one error occurs more than once before a different error is encountered the number of times it occurred and when it occurred are displayed All messages are shown until the entire display is filled If enough errors occur the MESSAGE screen will scroll the first messages past the top of the screen These messages cannot be retrieved 452 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS mssgsern fh Main Menu 14 Oscilloscope Screen ain wenu 453 Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions Field Descriptions OSCILLOSCOPE Marker Tine MEN 1 000 Lul 0 06941 Choices Main E Trigger Marker Audio Dut Controls Vert div Vert Offset Time div M gt EEE diy DECODER Controls Marker To Marker To RADIO INT Marker k oscsern tif ODER Id IHT RAD Controls a Trigger Internal Trigger Menu Figure 109 The Oscilloscope Screen and Menus The OSCILLOSCOPE screen s controls are arranged by menu The menus are accessed using the Controls field The field descriptions are grouped by menu names Assigning global USER keys to the most used functions on the menus allows you to access
462. rmation refer to How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power ACP on page 94 ain Mon 95 Chapter 4 Adjacent Channel Power Screen Field Descriptions AFGen1 Freq AFGen1 To Carrier Ref Channel BW 96 This field sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator This field sets two values e The upper field determines whether the AFGenl signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the depth of modulation for FM and AM in kilohertz and amplitude including Off for audio out The AUDIO OUT level is always in volts rms Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Use the carrier reference field to indicate whether the carrier Tune Freq being measured should be unmodulated or modulated when making the ACP reference measurement For more information refer to How the Test Set Measures Adjacent Channel Power ACP on page 94 Operating Considerations e FM transmitters can be measured with the carrier modulated or unmodulated e For AM transmitters the carrier must be measured while unmodulated AFGen1 and the AUDIO OUT port must be used as the modulation source whenever Unmod is selected Use the channel bandwidth field to specify the bandwidth of
463. rol message with a release order is sent to the mobile station on the forward voice channel A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator must be lit before you can attempt to send a release order to the mobile station This field is used to select the desired forward control channel or forward voice channel message to be modified 203 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This section describes the individual data fields contained in each of the forward control channel and forward voice channel messages SPC WORDI Message Fields Figure 37 SPC WORD1 Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC This field sets the digital color code SID1 First part of the system identification field The field contains the decimal equivalent of the 14 most significant bits of the system identification number RSVD Reserved for future use 204 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu NAWC OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the number of additional words coming This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 in
464. rt set the AF Anl Infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 Main Menu Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram AM Depth This field displays the percent depth of modulation of the AM signal The field is only visible when the AF ANL In field is set to AM MOD or AM DEMOD Audio In Lo This field sets the AUDIO IN LO connector s state e Gnd causes the center pin of the connector to be connected directly to chassis ground e Float isolates the center pin of the connector from ground providing a floating input to the AF Analyzer e 600 To Hi establishes a 600 ohm impedance between the center pins of the AUDIO IN LO and AUDIO IN HI connectors Also the Ext Load R field is removed since the load is now fixed to 600 ohms Current The Current field is found by selecting the SINAD field on the Test Set display of the AF ANALYZER screen This field only displays the DC current measured at the DC input port on the back of the Test Set Any offset can be removed by selecting Zero from the DC Current field DC Current DC current measurement zero removes any measurement offset present before making a dc current measurement The measurement is zeroed by selecting Zero and pressing the ENTER key or the Cursor Control knob NOTE The current source must be disconnected before zeroing for accurate operation See Also DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT on
465. rted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative causing a negative FM deviation A logical low 0 causes the level to become positive by the same amount resulting in positive FM deviation 383 an wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Digital Paging Encoder Send Send Mode Standard Stop 384 Selecting this field causes the entire data stream to be output including the preamble address and message This field selects the output format used when Send is selected to output a sequence e Single outputs the entire sequence once e Burst outputs the sequence the number of times specified in the Bursts field e Cont causes the sequence to be output continuously until Stop is selected This field selects the digital paging standard for the pager being tested POCSAG or GSC Golay Sequential Code Selecting this field stops the data stream being output S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 DTMF Sequence Encoder DTMF Sequence Encoder Figure 94 AFGen2 To 1 BERTEESTIEEIZTEN The DTMF Sequence Generator creates Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone sequences of variable frequency amplitude and duration It s signal can be used to modulate the RF Generator or it can be output through the front panel AUDIO OUT connector
466. ry Card Initialization All new SRAM cards must be initialized before they can be used to store information The RAM_MANAGER procedure stored on the internal ROM Disk can be used to quickly initialize any SRAM memory card SRAM Memory Cards can also be initialized from the TESTS screen by inserting the memory card into the front panel slot and selecting the Save Delete field then selecting Init Card or pressing the k3 USER key to initialize a card Follow the on screen instructions to complete the process If the error message ERROR 85 Medium uninitialized appears on the screen the memory card has not been properly initialized Check the SRAM battery to ensure that it s charged and inserted correctly in the battery holder 78 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups Saving and Recalling Instrument Setups The SAVE and RECALL functions allow you to store different instrument setups and retrieve them later eliminating the task of re configuring the Test Set The number of available save registers depends on how many changes were made to the base instrument setup for each save See BASE Settings on page 82 The smaller the number of changes the greater the number of save registers that can be used typically over 200 Save Recall register settings can be saved to several types of mass storage This allows you to back up th
467. s When this function is set to On the RF output level is restricted to a range of 15 dB around the present Amplitude setting Attempting to set an amplitude outside the allowed range results in an error message and beep if the beeper is on RF output level accuracy is uncalibrated outside the allowed range External load resistance is used to calculate and display AF power dissipated in an external load resistance Power is calculated using the voltage measured at the AUDIO IN connections and the resistance value you enter into this field See Also AC Level on page 506 Chapter 19 RX Test Screen Field Descriptions Filter 1 and Filter 2 Filters 1 and 2 select a variety of standard and optional filters Selecting either field lists the choices available for that field See Also Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Output Port Output port selects the desired RF Generator output port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel CAUTION Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument A message is displayed when an over power conditions occurs Whenever possible when testing transceivers use the RF IN OUT connector to prevent damage from accidental transmitter keying CAUTION If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit remove the reverse power signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and
468. s 197 turning on 127 168 200 forward voice channel 374 AMPS TACS 361 message data format AMPS TACS 361 message data format NAMPS NTACS 361 modifying messages 197 NAMPS NTACS 361 four dashes meaning of ACP level measurement 25 meaning of AF frequency 128 meaning of FM deviation 134 meaning of squelch 487 meaning of TX frequency error 140 meaning of TX power measurement 61 95 101 116 358 490 501 569 Frame Digits Signaling Decoder screen NMT mode 324 frames definition for NMT 322 NMT information 324 suffixes 331 Free 1 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 405 Free 2 Signaling Encoder screen LTR mode 638 405 Freq Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 342 Freq marker Spectrum Analyzer screen 524 Freq Channel Information Tests Main Menu screen 533 Freq Error Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq mode 342 Frequency Service screen 512 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen mode 308 frequency AFGenl 96 350 496 506 564 AFGen 2 401 496 506 carrier ACP measurement 96 center for notch filter 112 center for spectrum analyzer 517 center RF signal 100 357 489 568 decoded signal 308 effects of RF offset 272 for DTMF sequence 387 for tonesequence 441 measurement 101 115 358 489 501 569 offset receiver transmitter 266 offset RF generator analyzer 266 range for DTMF decoder 300 RF generator 509 RF generator reference 263 setting 270 356 499 sp
469. s field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message SCC SAT color code for new channel PSCC Present SAT color code Indicates the ST color code associated with the present channel CTYP Channel type indicator DSCC DSAT color code for the new channel Also represents SCC for handoff to a wide analog channel RSVD Reserved for future use 244 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu C13 C12 VMAC CHAN Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Channel number bit 13 set 10 kHz above channel number in CHAN Field Channel number bit 12 set 10 kHz below channel number in CHAN Field This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station power level associated with the designated voice channel Channel number field Indicates the designated RF channel Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 245 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions NHO MES Message Fields Set Message NHO MES Narrow Handoff Message Tite oscc POSCC CTYP OE RSYD C1i3 Ci2 w mE om o am oo 00011010100 Figure 64 NHO MES Message Fields TIT2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address messag
470. s from the Idle state to the busy state This function is used with the Ws Delay and 1stBitDly settings in the Busy Idle field This field defines the number of times the message data is output when Send is selected This function only works when the Send Mode field is set to Burst This field selects the forward control channel FOCC or forward voice control FVC menus This setting determines the signal level change that occurs when a logical high 1 or low 0 is output The unit of measure used depends on the AFGen2 To setting The direction of the output level change depends on the Polarity setting S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrn_th Main Menu Data Rate DSAT FVC Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder This setting determines the rate that the FOCC and FVC information are output Operating Considerations This field specifies the data rate for the signal being decoded and must be set before using the AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Decoder This field is available only in NAMP NTAC mode This field is used to specify the 24 bit digital supervisory audio tone DSAT sequence The seven standard sequences are 2556CB 255B2B 256A9B 25AD4D 26AB2B 26B2AD and 2969 AB These codes are the inverse of the seven DST codes DSAT is output continuously when Send DSAT is selected and is only stopped when Stop DSAT is selected If message or DST information is sent u
471. sages Method 2 uses the bit patterns which the user defines on the CALL BIT screen to build the contents of the signaling messages The Data Spec field on the CALL BIT screen determines which method will be used to build the contents of the signaling messages Std The Test Set will use the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard to build the forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages The Test Set will use the contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen to obtain information necessary to build the messages Whenever a signaling message is used the Test Set will update the contents of all fields in that message on the CALL BIT screen Bits Use the bit patterns as set on the CALL BIT screen to build all forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages For any call processing function that is setting the message stream on the active control channel registering the mobile station paging the mobile station handing off the mobile station or releasing the mobile station the user is responsible for setting the contents of all signaling messages used in that function The Call Processing Subsystem uses the messaging protocol as defined in the applicable industry standard NOTE The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while in the Bits mod
472. sed The higher the level of signal expected by the analyzer the higher the trigger level is set Operating Considerations The unit of measure is determined by the AF Anl In setting The input level should be set high enough to prevent false triggering but low enough to detect all valid zero crossings of the incoming signal When using de emphasis the Input Level setting may need to be reduced significantly to properly decode the incoming signal De emphasis is enabled disabled using the De Emphasis field on the AF ANALYZER screen See Also Trig Level on page 289 This field is used to match the polarity of the encoded signal being analyzed Normal Operation When this field is set to Norm a logical high 1 is displayed when a positive peak in the received signal is detected A negative peak displays a logical low 0 Inverted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical low 0 is displayed when a positive peak in the received signal is detected A negative peak displays a logical high 1 Operating Considerations Inverting amplifiers used in transmitters receivers and repeaters can cause an inversion of the modulating digital data If the decoded signal does not display the expected results change this field s setting to see if the signal may be getting inverted before being decoded Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Continuous Digital Controlled Squelch System Decoder Single Cont This field
473. sh a receiver or transmitter trunked channel on the home channel To Test Your Receiver To establish a trunked receiver channel on the home channel 1 Connect the RF IN OUT port of the Test Set to your radio s antenna port 2 If you want to make audio measurements connect your radio s speaker output to the Test Set s AUDIO IN port s and turn the Test Set s VOLUME up about half way Turn your radio s volume up about half way Turn your radio on and select the channel to test Press the PRESET key to establish a known instrument state for this procedure Access the DUPLEX TEST screen Set the Tune Mode field to Manual Set the RF Gen Freq field to the receive frequency for the selected channel Note that the preset function caused the Amplitude to be set to 80 dBm and AFGenl is set to kHz FM with 3 kHz deviation These settings should work with your radio to produce the audio tone 9 Access the ENCODER screen and select the LTR mode 10 Enter your Area Number 0 or 1 in the Area 1 field 11 Enter the home channel number in these fields Goto 1 Home 1 and Free 1 For example if your radio s home channel is 2 enter 2 in all three fields 12 Enter the Receive ID number for your radio in the ID 1 field 13 Set the Send Mode field to Cont 14 Set the AFGen2 To field to FM 1 kHz 15 Set the FM Coupling field to DC 16 Select Send to continuously output the encoded signal PANN PR amp You
474. signment Immediately after the message is sent the RF Generator s and RF Analyzer s frequencies are automatically changed to match the same working channel settings See Also Handshake on page 391 Signaling Dev Site ID Standard Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 EDACS Encoder This field is used to specify the high speed data level The unit of measure used depends on the AFGen2 To setting e When AFGen2 To is set to FM the displayed units are kHz or Hz This is the normal ly used setting for testing EDACS radios e When AFGen2 To is set to AM the displayed unit is e When AFGen2 To is set to Audio Out the displayed units are LV mV or V See Also AFGen2 To on page 390 This field is used to specify the identification number of the repeater site being simulated by the encoder This field specifies the signaling standard used by the radio 4800 bps narrowband or 9600 bps wideband In addition to telling the encoder and decoder which system is being used this field presets the values of certain fields as shown in the following table Standard Field 9600 4800 Data Rate 9600 0 4800 0 Signaling Dev 3 00 1 80 Sub Audible Dev 750 350 Encoder Polarity Norm Invert 393 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 EDACS Encoder Status This field indicates what the encoder is doing Idle is displayed when no data is being sen
475. sing Send the DSAT signal is temporarily interrupted until that information has been sent The Status field in the upper right corner of the screen indicates what type of data is being sent 365 ar wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Filler FOCC The data you enter here FOCC Stream A Stream B Filler Filler ME IE Message Message B L T T4 T2 Information Parity 2 Bits 26 Bits 12 Bits m 4 Contents of the Message or Filler Field p U WORDB WORDA rer is output in this sequence 10 Bits 11 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits WORD REPEAT 1 REPEAT 1 REPEAT 2 DOTTING OF OF OF SYNC WORD A WORD B WORD A Busy Idle Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 40 Bits 10 Bits REPEAT 1 REPEAT 1 REPEAT 1 OF OF OF DOTTING WORD B WORD A WORD B Figure 87 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS FOCC Message and Filler Data Format 366 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscr Main Menu Pr FM Coupling Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder Each Filler field contains 7 hexadecimal characters representing the 2 type bits and 26 information bits of the control filler message word The dotting word sync and parity bits are generated automatically Operating Considerations The control filler is sent continuously when Send Filler is selected o
476. sired This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off LAST CALIB Low Battery Notch Coupl Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions This is a user programmable 11 character string field intended to store information such as the date of last calibration The calibration date is not automatically updated when a calibration is performed The user must enter information using the CONF CALD lt string gt command Contents of this field can be queried using the CONF CALD query This setting is used during battery dc operation to alert you when no front panel controls are used within the specified amount of time The setting is changed by selecting this field then choosing the setting from a list of choices This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off This field selects if the Notch Freq setting of the AF ANALYZER screen is coupled to the AF Gen1 Freq setting When set to None the notch filter and AF Generator 1 do not interact When set to AFGen1 coupled the settings track each other unless the AF Generator s frequency is set outside the 300 Hz to 10 kHz limits of the notch filter 267 iain Mo Chapter 7 Configure Screen Field Descriptions Range Hold 268 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIconfscr These fields enable disable several autoranging and autotuning routines Auto All enables these routines providing automatic adjustment when making AF or RF me
477. slots MAINT 0 1 283 3 0 MAINT 0 1 283 3 0 MAINT 0 1 283 3 0 e SAMIS response to AHYC giving PSTN digits for call SAMIS 14391 83782 DCW H080000000000 H000000000000 There are two other measurements available on the decoder screen e The Signaling Data Rate The signaling data rate measurement is the measured baud rate of the received message It is most accurately measured on a dotting pattern e The Received Message Timing This measures the timing of the received message rel ative to the timeslots in the forward control channel It has two modes of operation Slot timing mode This works in the Control test mode only it is disabled in all other modes This is the default mode The timing counter is reset at the end of every control channel timeslot If a mes sage is received the time from the most recent slot end to the start of the received message s preamble is reported as the timing measurement result 320 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decosernth Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen MPT 1327 Decoder eIn the slot timing mode it is not possible to determine whether the message was returned in the correct timeslot For example if it is a response that should re turn in the timeslot immediately following the requesting forward message Itis possible to check that the timing offset from the forward channel slot boundaries is within specification This mode is selected wit
478. sly output after the message data has been sent Stop Filler is used to stop the output Selecting this field causes the contents of the Filler fields for Stream A and Stream B to be output The fillers continue to be output until Stop Filler is selected This field is available only in NAMP NTAC mode Selecting this field causes the contents 24 bits of the DSAT field to be continuously output until Stop DSAT is selected If a message or DST is sent by selecting Send the DSAT data is output continuously after the message is output Send Mode Standard Stop Stop DSAT FVC Stop Filler FOCC Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder This field selects the mode used when Send is selected to output the message Single outputs the entire message once Burst outputs the Message the number of times specified in the Bursts field Cont causes the message to be output continuously until Stop is selected Step is not used in the AMPS TACS mode This field selects the signaling standard used for your radio The standard values used for each signaling format are automatically filled in when the standard is selected Selecting this field stops the message being output This field is available only in NAMP NTAC mode Selecting this field stops the digital supervisory audio tone being output Selecting this field stops the Filler information from being output after Send Filler or Send is us
479. specifies how you want the analyzer to be armed e Single is used to analyze and display the decoded information once each time Arm Meas is selected e Cont is used to automatically re arm the analyzer and display the measurements on a continual basis until Single is selected Stop Meas Selecting this field stops the analyzer when making a single measurement Trig Level The trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement that has been armed The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field s setting 289 iain Mo Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Using the CDCSS Decoder Using the CDCSS Decoder AF Analyzer Settings For proper CDCSS decoder operation make the following AFANALYZER screen settings e Filter 1to lt 20Hz HPF Required e Filter 2to3kHz LPF Recommended e Settling to Slow Recommended Interpreting Decoded Data Because CDCSS uses a continuously repeating data stream and there is no framing information to tell the receiver when the code word is going to be sent the decoded data can result in several possible code combinations This is why more than one code word may be listed in the Codes oct column after decoding 290 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrr_th Main Menu Chapter 8 S Digital Paging Decoder Figure 74 AF Anl In Arm Meas ignaling Decoder Screen Digital Paging Decoder The is used to test paging s
480. sponds to the Tone Sequence Encoder s symbols assigned for each tone As each tone is analyzed the symbol that represents each tone is listed in this column Operating Considerations The symbol assigned to a received tone is based on the closest symbol frequency to that tone If the frequency of the received tone is exactly half way between two symbol frequencies the symbol associated with the higher of the two frequencies is displayed Trigger level indicates the minimum signal level required to begin a measurement that has been armed The level is adjusted by changing the Input Level field setting 343 an wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Tone Sequence Decoder 344 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn fh Main Menu Duplex Test Screen ain wenu 345 Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Block Diagram Block Diagram Input Port RF IN Art ANT IN RF IN High Power Attenuator Tune Mode Tune Freq Auto Manual 150 000000 MHz AF Anl In FM Demod TX Power TX Pwr Zero D Measurement Zero Reference V From AUDIO IN From Radio Interface Rear Panel Mod IN From MIC ACCG From AM FM Modulators From AUDIO Out Q De Empasls 750 us Off AF Gen 1 Freq 1 0000 AF Gen 1 To FM J mae ll Figure 82 346 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS dxtsern FM Denod AM Demod SSBDemod Audio In Radio Int Ext Mod Mic Mod FM
481. ss storage e Using a connected terminal or cursor control knob to directly enter commands into the decoder s NMT Test Entry field e Using an IBASIC program that outputs commands to the NMT Test Entry field The most efficient method is to use a connected computer to write the program store the program on a memory card and then select the test from the memory card using the decoder s Load Test field 333 iain Mo Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creating NMT Tests Using Direct Command Entry NOTE 334 The decoder s NMT Test Entry field allows you to directly enter program commands into the decoder s RAM Program line numbers are not used and no LIST or EDIT function is available for programs entered this way This capability is provided to allow direct entry of small programs without the need of external equipment or the need to store the program for future use Program Example This example program can be entered line by line into the NMT Test Entry field and then run by selecting Run Test begin set 15 10 send la send 2a repeat 1 10 exit 0 end Entering commands directly into the NMT Test Entry field causes any existing programs you have loaded to be removed from the decoder s memory Also programs entered into the NMT Test Entry field cannot be saved on mass storage S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS decoscrn_th Main Menu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Creati
482. st Fields and Their Functions 504 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIrxtscrn fh Main Menu Field Descriptions Ra TEST 8 0 11 RF Gen Frea AFGeni Frea AFGen2 Frea 1 0000 0000 MHz kHz kHz Anplitude AFGeni To AFGeng To A i FM dEn 3 00 off Atten Hold METE Qutrut Port EF Out Quel Figure 124 The RX Test Screen SINAD E AC Level rn Filter 1 30Hz HPF Chapter 19 RX Test Screen rxscrn wmf Field Descriptions NOTE Since most of the measurements displayed are dependent on different field settings the settings and values shown in the diagrams use the Test Set s preset conditions Main Menu 505 Chapter 19 RX Test Screen Field Descriptions AC Level AFGen1 Freq AFGen2 Freq 506 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIrktsern fh in Menu This measurement displays either rms potential voltage or audio power Watts or dBm Operating Considerations When the unit of measure is changed to measure AF power the external load resistance must be specified Refer to Ext Load R on page 508 The input for the ac level measurement on this screen is always the AUDIO IN connectors See Also Entering and Changing Numbers on page 66 This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the first audio frequency sinewave generator This Audio Frequency Generator control sets the frequency for the second audio
483. st is to be run on all channels Yes or only on prime channels No Prime channels are specified on the TESTS Channel Information screen The underlined entry is the active choice S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSItestsern fh Main Menu Delet Stp Insrt Stp Main Menu Print All Step Test Name Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Order of Tests This field allows you to delete a step from the test list at the bottom of the screen This field allows you to enter a step in the test list at the bottom of the screen Operating Considerations When inserting a new test you must select the Step where you want to insert a new test When inserted the new test forces the current test at that step down one step and a duplicate of the current test is inserted This duplicate is overwritten when the new test is selected See Also Programmer s Guide Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen This field allows you to print the Test Set s screen image The Step field lists the order of selected tests for the current procedure Operating Considerations Use the knob up arrow or down arrow key to select the step where you want to delete replace or insert a test This field displays the names of the tests available from the software package or program currently selected As you turn the knob the Test Name for the corresponding step appears above the test s Description
484. st word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 209 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions REG INC Message Fields Set Message REG INC Resistration Increment Global Action Message ACT REGINCR Figure 40 REG INC Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message DCC Digital color code field ACT Global Action Field REGINCR Registration increment field RSVD Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 210 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb in Menu END OHD Parity Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system
485. ster field The Register annunciator will light while the registration is in process If the mobile station responds properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Active annunciator will light when the registration has successfully completed Select the Display Word field A list of reverse channel words which can be displayed will appear in a Choices menu Select the desired word from the list of choices The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 fora description of each of the available reverse channel words Step 7 and Step 8 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desired word can be selected first then the mobile station can be registered If the registration is successful the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The registration does not have to happen while you are viewing the CALL DATA screen When the CALL DATA screen is viewed the contents of the display words will be the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registrat
486. surement Results at the Oscilloscope s Markers This measurement field displays the signal level of the current marker position Operating Considerations The unit of measure for this field is dependent on the source of the signal being measured For instance when measuring a signal from the AUDIO IN connector the amplitude is measured in Volts When looking at a signal from the FM demodulator the amplitude is given in units of kHz When the Vert Offset field is 0 00 the displayed marker level is referenced to the center line generated by the vertical offset feature not the center line of the screen The REF SET function can be used with this measurement to display levels relative to a specific value See Setting A Measurement Reference on page 73 This measurement displays the time elapsed from the trigger point to the current marker position The REF SET function can be used with this measurement to display time relative to a specific position See Setting A Measurement Reference on page 73 457 Sman wenu Chapter 14 Oscilloscope Screen Field Descriptions Oscilloscope Trigger Menu Fields DECODER Controls A i Level divl Pre Tria RAGIG INT T i i n 00 div oscscrn4 wmf Figure 113 Oscilloscope Triggering Internal This field selects the trigger source e Internal uses the signal being displayed for triggering e External uses the rear panel EXT SCOPE TRIGGER INPUT for trigg
487. t Control is displayed when control channel data is being output Working is displayed when a handshake has been performed and working channel data is being sent Sub Audible Dev This field is used to specify the low speed data level The unit of measure used depends on the AFGen2 To setting e When AFGen2 To is set to FM the displayed units are kHz or Hz This is the normal ly used setting for testing EDACS radios e When AFGen2 To is set to AM the displayed unit is e When AFGen2 To is set to Audio Out the displayed units are 4V mV or V See Also AFGen2 To on page 390 Stop This field is used to stop the control channel or working channel data from being output The carrier continues to be output but without the digital modulation Working Channel Number This field is used to specify the working channel number for the EDACS system typically 1 to 25 Working Channel RX Frequency This field is used to specify the working s channel receive frequency for the mobile Working Channel TX Frequency This field is used to specify the working channel s transmit frequency for the mobile 394 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the EDACS Encoder Using the EDACS Encoder Automated Test Software Agilent Technologies offers software packages to fully test your EDACS radio in a fraction of the time normall
488. t s Control Channel on page 145 e Register a Mobile Station on page 145 e Page a Mobile Station on page 146 e Handoff a Mobile Station to a New Voice Channel on page 148 e Release A Mobile Station on page 148 e Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station on page 149 e Send an Alert Order to a Mobile Station on page 151 142 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIcallscrn fh in Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing Perform the following steps when first entering the Call Processing Subsystem that is the first time the CALL CONTROL screen is selected during a measurement session 1 Zero the RF Power Meter oP mmoas Select the RF GEN fromthe To Screen menu Set the Amplitude field to off use the ON OFF key This prevent cross cou pling into the power detector while zeroing the power meter Select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu Select CALL CNFG from the To Screen menu Disconnect any cables from the RF IN OUT port on the front panel of the Test Set Select the TX Pwr Zero field Select the RF Gen from the To Screen menu h Set the Amplitude field to On There are two reasons for zeroing the RF power meter When any Call Processing Subsystem screen is displayed except the ANALOG MEAS screen and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the
489. t Set Operating Considerations The address can be set from 0 to 30 by using the DATA keys or by pushing and then turning the cursor control knob This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off This field enables disables screen and error message echoing from IBASIC This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off This field enables disables character and screen echoing when using an external ASCII RS 232 terminal or computer to enter or edit IBASIC programs This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 447 an wenu Chapter 12 I O Configure Screen Field Descriptions Mode Parity Rev Pace 448 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ioscrn f This field sets the GPIB operating mode Talk amp Lstn is used for normal GPIB operation Control is used to control external instruments using the Test Set This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off This field specifies the serial communication parity setting when using the rear panel serial port This setting is retained when the instrument is turned off The receive pace field is used when receiving serial data e Xon Xoff lets the Test Set talk to the transmitting device to alter the rate of the data being sent e None disables the Xon Xoff funct
490. t the bottom of the screen Use the knob up arrow or down arrow key to select the step where you want to insert an instrument See Also Programmer s Guide 549 ain wenu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS External Devices Inst The Inst field lists the number of external devices that are configured for the tests in the current procedure Main Menu Selecting this field returns you to the TESTS Main Menu screen Model This field is used to enter the instrument s model number There is no specific syntax for entering model numbers into this field Options This field is used to enter the instrument s option number or numbers if any Operating Considerations This field may be left blank or otherwise may include other calling name options for example Printer options LN START END Where is the number of lines on each page Where START causes a form feed at the start of each printout Where END causes a form feed at the end of each printout Data collection options NN Where NN is the number of records file size for the mass storage location where data will be collected on disk or memory card The default record size is 80 Print All This field allows you to print the Test Set s screen image 550 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS testsern fh Main Menu Chapter 22 Tests Screen TESTS Printer Setup TESTS Printer Setup TESTS Printer Setup i WOM
491. t up to provide the radio s carrier AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement AFGen2 must be turned off The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port set the AF Anl infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 488 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS rfanscrn fh Main Menu Tune Freq Tune Mode Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions RF Analyzer tune frequency sets the center frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed See Also Tune Mode on page 489 This field selects automatic or manual tuning of the RF Analyzer Auto causes the RF Analyzer to find the signal with the greatest amplitude gt 36 dBm and set the tune frequency for that signal Manual requires the operator to set the tune frequency for the RF signal to be analyzed Operating Considerations Changing the Tune Mode also changes the RF frequency display Automatic tuning enables the TX Frequency measurement Manual tuning enables the Tx Freq Error measurement After autotuning to the desired signal select Manual to prevent the Tune Freq from changing when the signal is no longer applied TX Freq Error TX Frequency This measurement area is used to display transmitter frequency error or transmitter frequency See Also Tune Mode on page 489 489 iain wenu C
492. ta 181 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions UnigChCon Message Fields Figure 32 F NAWC RSVD AUTHR Parity 182 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Display Word UniaChCon Uniaue Challenge Order Confirmation Word F NAWC RSYD o 000 00000000000000 AUTHU 011001000000100000 UnigChCon Message Fields This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A 1 indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile Reserved for future use This field displays the output of the authentication algorithm when responding to a unique challenge order This field displays the parity of the received data Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RVCOrd Message Fields Figure 33 NAWC Local Display Word R YCOrd Reverse Voice Channel Generic F NAWC T Local ORDG 1 0i 1 00000 000 RSYD 0000000000000000000 RVCOrd Message Fields RVCOrd is a generic order word It is utilized to receive an order associated with the specific mobile station under test This order could be unique to the particular mobile station model or manufacturer This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A
493. tate Active annunciator is lit Main Menu NOTE VC Order Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen In order to ensure that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the Call Processing Subsystem Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for information on manually zeroing the RF Power meter This field is used to send an order on the forward voice channel to the Mobile Station with authentication active The VC Order field is only visible when authentication is activated and the mobile is assigned a voice channel The orders available are e Change Power to Power Level 0 7 e Maintenance put the mobile station in maintenance mode e Alert alert the mobile station e SSD Update shared secret data update e Uniq Ch unique challenge 141 iain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions The CALL CONTROL screen provides multiple functions for testing a mobile station The following sections describe how to e Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 e Configure the Test Set on page 144 e Turn On The Test Se
494. tation s microphone is open Active This field is used to turn on the forward control channel of the Test Set or to force a return to the active state from any other state register page access connect If the forward control channel of the Test Set is already active selecting this field will deactivate and then reactivate the control channel Active When lit the Active annunciator indicates that the control channel of the Test Set is turned on If this annunciator is lit the base station is transmitting system parameter overhead messages on the assigned control channel If the annunciator is not lit the base station is not active note that the Test Set may still be outputting a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set s firmware is not active and no communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set Connect When lit the Connect annunciator indicates that the mobile station is connected to the Test Set on a voice channel 200 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Data Spec Handoff Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen This field is used to determine how the contents of the signaling messages are built e Std Use the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard to build the forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages Use the contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CO
495. tation The MS Id has two fields The upper field is a one of many selection field and is used to select the format for entering the identification number The lower field is a numeric entry field and is used to enter the identification number in the format selected using the upper field The contents of the lower field are automatically updated upon successful completion of a mobile station registration There are two formats which can be used to enter the identification number The identification number can be entered as either the 10 digit phone number in decimal for example 5095551212 or as the mobile identification number MIN in hexadecimal for example AAABBBBBB The first 3 characters AAA in the field represent MIN2 and the last 6 characters BBBBBB represent MINI To enter the identification number select upper field and select the desired format Phone Num or MIN2 MINI Then select the lower field and enter the information in the selected format If the desired format is already selected then simply select the lower field and enter the information in the selected format The formats are coupled that is if the Phone Num format is selected and the 10 digit phone number is entered the MIN2 MIN1 information is automatically updated and vice versa The preset values for the MS Id fields are e Phone Num 1111111111 e MIN2 MINI 000000400 An all zero MIN number 000000000 which does not represent a valid phone number wil
496. ted This function works only when the Send Mode field is set to Burst This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector This field determines whether the encoder signal passes through or bypasses 750 ms pre emphasis Selecting this field causes the tone sequence to be output This field selects the output format used when Send is selected to output a sequence e Single outputs the entire sequence once e Burst outputs the sequence the number of times specified in the Bursts field e Cont causes the sequence to be output continuously until Stop is selected e Step allows you to output the sequence one tone at a time by pressing Send for each tone This field selects the Tone Sequence standard for your radio Selecting this field stops the sequence being output S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrn_th Main Menu Symbol Definition Symbol Sequence Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Tone Sequence Encoder This table specifies three types of information Sym symbol numbers indicate the hexadecimal number that represents each tone when creating a tone sequence These numbers cannot be changed Freq Hz lists the tone frequency associated with each symbol number The frequency values are preset for the Standar
497. ted to the Test Set s AUDIO IN and the mobile station s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO OUT in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen 4 5 6 Turn on the mobile station Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel If the ANALOG MEAS screen is not displayed select the ANLG MEAS field from the To Screen menu The ANALOG MEAS screen will be displayed The following example illustrates how to make a 12 dB SINAD Receiver Sensitivity measurement Select the AFGen1 Freq field and set it to 1 kHz Select the upper AFGen1 To field and set it to FM Select the lower AFGen1 To field and set it to 8 kHz Select the AF Anl In field and select Audio In Select the Filter 1 field and select C MESSAGE Select the Filter 2 field and select gt 99kHz LP Position the cursor on the De Emphasis field and select Off Select the Detector field and select RMS Select the AF Freq measurement field and select SINAD Select the Amplitude field and begin to lower the transmitted base station voice channel power until 12 dB SINAD is reached The mobile station might mute or drop off the air before a 12 dB SINAD is reached The performance of the mobile station at low RF levels is dependent upon the char acteristics of the mobile station that is what type of system it is designed for Un like a real
498. ter the active state If the Test Set is in the connected state Connect annunciator is lit and a change is made to the System Type field the connected state will be lost The Option 800 Agilent 83206A TDMA Cellular Adapter is required for system types DCCH and DAMPS Attempting to access these choices without Option 800 installed will generate an Option not installed error This field displays the frequency error frequency error assigned carrier frequency measured carrier frequency of the RF carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicate that no RF carrier is present to measure A numeric value would only be displayed in the connected state that is the Connect annunciator is lit The TX Freq Error field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Meas The TX Power field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Meas This field displays the measured RF power of the RF carrier being transmitted by the mobile station A non zero value would only be displayed when the Test Set s Connect annunciator is lit When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed and the Test Set is in the connected state Connect annunciator is lit the mobile station s transmitted carrier power is constantly monitored If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active s
499. termines the relationship between the signaling logic levels and the effect on the modulated signal Normal Operation When this field is set to Norm a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more positive The peak level is listed in the Data Level field A logical low 0 causes the level to become negative by the same amount Inverted Operation When this field is set to Invert a logical high 1 causes the output level of the AF Generator to be more negative The peak level is listed in the Data Level field A logical low 0 causes the level to become positive by the same amount 371 Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder SAT Freq FVC This field is available only in AMPS TACS mode This field sets the supervisory audio tone s frequency This signal is sent continuously whenever the FVC is selected except while the Message is being sent SAT Level FVC AMPS TACS Send Send Filler FOCC Send DSAT FVC 372 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu This field sets the supervisory audio tone s level The unit of measure depends on the AFGen2 To setting Operating Considerations SAT is turned off while the FVC message stream is being sent Selecting this field causes the FVC or FOCC message to be output Operating Considerations When sending an FOCC message stream the contents of the Filler are continuou
500. th ground terminal Alternating current Frame or chassis terminal O Product Markings CERTIFICATION Standby supply Units with this symbol are not completely disconnected from ac mains when this switch is off To completely disconnect the unit from ac mains either disconnect the power cord or have a qualified electrician install an external switch CE the CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community A CE mark accompanied by a year indicated the year the design was proven CSA the CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members ain wenu Agilent Technologies Warranty Statement for Commercial Products Agilent Technologies 8920B RF Communications Test Set Duration of 1 Agilent Technologies warrants Agilent Technologies hardware accessories and Warranty 1 year supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above If Agilent Technologies receives notice of such defects during the warranty period Agilent Techn
501. the CALL DATA screen When the CALL DATA screen is viewed the contents of the display words will contain the decoded data from the last successful call processing function registration origination page release order 196 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen CALL BIT Screen CALL BIT Active Active O Register CO Fage Handoff U Access Release CO Connect Data Spec Order Std Bits Set Message To Screen System Farameter Overhead Message Word 1 Figure 36 Pority 101001101010 The CALL BIT Screen The CALL BIT screen is designed to give an advanced user the capability to modify the contents of the forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages that are used in all processing messaging protocol A messaging protocol is defined as the sequence of messages sent from the Test Set to the mobile station to perform a desired action such as registering a mobile station Modifying the contents of one or more messages may be required for testing the robustness of a mobile station s call processing algorithms or for new product development Using the CALL BIT screen requires expert knowledge of the call processing messaging protocols used in the system selected inthe System Type field on the CALL CONTROL screen 197 Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen NOTE 198
502. the Hardware 1 status register 471 ain wenu Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Field Descriptions VO Config Output Data Parallel Data In Send Data Strobe Pol 472 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fb Main Menu This field designates which of the 16 parallel data pins will be used as inputs Pins designated as inputs are pulled high internally They can be left high for a logic 1 or pulled low for a logic 0 Operating Considerations A hexadecimal number that can range from 0000 to FFFF is entered in this field Hex 0000 designates no pins as inputs while hex FFFF designates all 16 pins as inputs To determine the number convert the input pin s binary weight to hexadecimal then add Pin 19 DO is the least significant bit For example if DO through D7 are to be inputs and D8 through D15 are outputs the number to enter would be OOFF This field sets the data to be output on the parallel data lines Operating Considerations The data is entered as a hexadecimal number that can range from 0000 to FFFF To determine the number convert the binary weight of the pins that you want to set high to hexadecimal then add Pin 19 DO is the least significant bit For example 0008 would set pin 22 D3 high and the rest of the pins low The field will show the entered value but the pins don t change until the Send Data field is selected This field displays the value on the parallel data
503. the RF Gen Freq field and rotate the Cursor Control knob to vary the RF Gen erator s frequency Notice that the Tune Freq value changes to maintain the 10 MHz difference between the generator and the analyzer Manual tuning is used in this example to prevent possible unexpected Tune Frequency changes during the procedure an wenu 87 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Remote Control Using Remote Control The Test Set can be remotely controlled several ways e Using GPIB control from a computer controller e Using IBASIC programs on memory cards e Using an ASCII terminal connected to the serial port Using GPIB Control The Programmer s Guide contains information on writing GPIB control programs for the Test Set Programming examples and a syntax listing provide general GPIB operation guidelines Running IBASIC Programs from Memory Cards The documentation shipped with Agilent Technologies 11807 software packages explains how to run those programs from memory cards Refer to the Programmer s Guide for detailed information on using memory cards with your own IBASIC programs 88 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS opoverv fh Main Menu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Remote Control Using an ASCH Terminal Connecting an ASCII terminal to the serial port allows you to remotely operate the Test Set by entering characters that represent each front panel control Before you can use this feat
504. the control channel signaling during test calls as there is only one RU in the test environment and it is on a traffic channel As there is only one RU the control channel signaling comprises a fixed slotted aloha sequence with occasional variations to send specific messages such as requests for registration RQR broadcast messages BCAST ahoy messages AHY The filler buffer contains the repeating pattern of the forward control channel It also contains a message buffer from which selected timeslots in the filler buffer can be replaced on a one off or repeating basis 415 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder NOTE 416 The control channel filler buffer comprises 32 individual timeslots It is accessed only through the GPIB with the following command ENCoder MPT1327 FILLer DATA n string Where e nis the location selector and has the range 1 through 32 e string is a string containing a signaling language command defining the content of one timeslot Some signaling language commands also define data codewords and therefore translate to data for two or three timeslots The signaling language commands take the form of an assembly language In MPT 1327 an address codeword can be followed by up to four data codewords A data codeword occupies half of one timeslot The signaling language definition restricts the firmware to accept only two or four data codewords An odd number of data
505. the last timeslot defined in the filler message are transmitted between each repeat of the filler pattern This can be used for example to insert a registration frame ALHR between the normal filler frames The individual timeslot locations of the message buffer can be cleared by the following command ENCoder MPT1327 MESSage CONTrol CLEAR n where n is the timeslot to be cleared and has the range 1 through 32 In addition the whole message buffer can be cleared by the following command ENCoder MPT1327 MESSage CONTrol RESET Traffic Channel Message Buffer This control is only available using IBASIC commands it is not displayed on the MPT 1327 Encoder screen When the RU under test moves to a traffic channel the IBASIC test program needs to stop the transmission of the control channel signaling temporarily but still be able to send individual messages for example to send a CLEAR message 420 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 MPT 1327 Encoder When Test Mode is set to Traffic the control channel filler and message buffers are disabled and a traffic channel message buffer is enabled A message is sent from the traffic channel message buffer on demand by use of ENC SEND Only messages in message buffer timeslot 1 and any contiguous timeslots are sent Refer to Figure 103 201759BC A8 666430CB AD TO MESSAGE BUFFER Figure
506. the value returned will be the previous query will include all 16 data lines some of which may be configured as outputs 479 Chapter 16 Radio Interface Screen Using The Radio Interface Remote Operation Outputting Data over GPIB Use one of the following commands to output 1 s to the 8 most significant bits on the parallel data bus DISP RINT RINTerface PARallel OUTPut 65280 SEND decimal or DISP RINT RINTerface PARallel OUTPut HFF00 SEND hex Using Interrupts over GPIB Use the following command to arm Interrupt 1 DISP RINT RINTerface INTerrupt ARM Use the following command to disarm Interrupt 1 DISP RINT RINTerface INTerrupt DISARM Interrupt 1 and Interrupt 2 when armed will set bits in the Hardware Status Register 1 Group An SRQ interrupt can be generated when either of these interrupts is tripped or the Condition register can simply be read to see if a bit was set Refer to the Programmer s Guide for details and an example program showing how to set up an SRQ interrupt 480 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS radscrn fh Main Menu 17 RF Analyzer Screen ain wenu 481 Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram Block Diagram TX Pwr Zero Zero Input Port RF In Ant RF IN High Power Attenuator ANT IN gt Sensitivity Normal High Figure 119 482 Tune Mode Auto Manual Measurement Display Area
507. this field Selecting this field displays the following measurement choices SINAD Distortion SNR Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level Current DC only Operating Considerations This is a priority control field Accessing the RX TEST or TX TEST screen overrides any changes made to this field in other screens SNR Operation Selecting SNR turns off the other audio measurement The RF Generator and AFGen1 must be set up to provide the radio s carrier AFGen1 is automatically turned on and off repeatedly during this measurement AFGen2 must be turned off The radio s receiver s audio output must be connected to the AUDIO IN port set the AF Anl Infield to Audio In See Also Interaction Between Screens on page 56 Displaying Measurements on page 60 500 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSTrfgsern fh Main Menu TX Freq Error TX Frequency TX Power CAUTION Chapter 18 RF Generator Screen Field Descriptions This measurement displays transmitter frequency error or absolute transmitter frequency See Also Tune Mode on page 357 Displaying Measurements on page 60 Transmitter power measures RF power at the RF IN OUT port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Only the RF IN OUT port can be used for measuring TX power on this screen When the Input Port lis set to Ant four dashes appear in place
508. tion s transmitted carrier such as transmitter power frequency accuracy and modulation deviation e decodes and displays various reverse control channel and reverse voice channel signaling messages When sending forward control channel and forward voice channel messages you can set the bit pattern to an industry standard or to a pattern of your choice The ability to set the bit patterns gives the operator the opportunity to interject errors into the signaling message and test the mobile station s ability to find these errors 118 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS caliscrn fi Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem Operational Overview The Test Set simulates a cellular base station by using its hardware and firmware resources to initiate and maintain a link with a mobile station Unlike a real base station the Test Set has only one transceiver its signal generator and RF AF analyzer and can support only one mobile station at a time This means that the Test Set s transceiver can be configured as either a control channel or a voice channel but not both simultaneously To establish a link with a mobile station the Test Set s transceiver is configured as a control channel Once a link has been established and the user wishes to test the mobile station on a voice channel the Test Set sends the appropriate information to the mobile station on the control chan
509. tion 620 output FOCC 372 output FVC 372 query 320 RECCW A 171 RECCW B 173 RECCW C 175 RECCW D 176 RECCW E 177 REG ID 212 REG INC 210 registration identification message 212 registration increment global action 210 reverse control channel 171 reverse voice channel 171 RVCOrdCon 178 180 181 182 183 185 186 SPC Word 1 204 SPC Word 2 206 system parameter overhead word 1 204 system parameter overhead word 2 206 to view from mobile station handoff 192 to view from mobile station origina tion 196 to view from mobile station page 189 to view from mobile station registra tion 188 to view from mobile station release 194 to view from order to change TX pow er of mobile 195 types of 611 Message 1 LTR encoder 403 Message 2 LTR encoder 403 Message screen view of 452 Message DST Signaling Encoder screen NAMP NTAC mode 371 METER 591 meter analog 65 changing display 65 changing settings 65 Index de current 575 signal strength 556 Megmt Maint Signaling Encoder screen NMT mode 434 Mic Pre Emp RF Generator screen 498 MIC ACC connector description 578 for keying external transmitter 98 354 484 566 dB 64 pre emphasis 750 387 440 microphone 351 497 keying 508 519 521 pre emphasis 498 push to talk 273 use of 579 MIN MS id 136 156 164 mobile radio decoding LTR data 315 mobile station connecting to test set 397 contol channel 398 recei
510. tivated reconfigured and then re activated to reflect the change and causes an immediate change to the current state of the Call Processing Subsystem the state is set to Active Connect When lit the Connect annunciator indicates that the mobile station is connected to the Test Set on a voice channel NOTE When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connected state Connect annunciator is lit the Test Set constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state Active annunciator is lit The mobile station s transmitted carrier power is monitored on all Call Processing Subsystem screens except the ANALOG MEAS screen If the Test Set is in the connected state Connect annunciator is lit and a change is made to the Cnt1 Channel field the connected state will be lost 130 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn fb Main Menu Display Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen This field is used to select the type of mobile station information to be displayed in the upper right hand portion ofthe CALL CONTROL screen Select Data to display information received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel or reverse voice channel If the data message s received from the mobile station can be correctly decoded the decode
511. tly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the active state 167 ain wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen NOTE Access Active Active NOTE Connect Display Word 168 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f In order to ensure that the Test Set makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the Call Processing Subsystem Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 143 for information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually When lit the Access annunciator indicates the Test Set is signaling the mobile station with command information on the forward voice channel This is a transitory state The Test Set s speaker is turned off when in the access state This is done to eliminate any possible audio feedback which may occur if the mobile station s microphone is open This field is used to turn on the forward control channel of the Test Set or to force a return to the active state from any other state register page access connect If the forward control channel of the T
512. ts are C4D7 and 3B28 respectively When a synchronization sequence is recognized the message is placed timeslot aligned into the receive buffer The receive buffer is organized as 16 x 128 bit timeslots Decoder repetitive retriggering is used to minimize the decoder down time between messages It is therefore important to extract the messages from the decoder buffer as soon as possible after their arrival This avoids the messages being overwritten by further signaling 319 ar wenu Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen MPT 1327 Decoder Detecting and Querying Messages IBASIC can be informed about the arrival of a message in the decoder buffer To do this configure the GPIB status registers to cause a service request SRQ on the negative transition event of bit 12 Decoder Result Available in the Hardware Status Register 1 For further information on the Hardware Status Register refer to the Programmer s Guide The message is read from the decoder buffer by the command MEASure DECoder MPT1327 BUFFer This query returns a quoted string comprising the contents of one or more timeslots The string is disassembled into mnemonic form If more than one message is received the individual messages are separated by semicolons If a timeslot contains data codewords it is disassembled into the DCW extension Examples of this are e Simple RQS from RU RQS 0 1 5 0 e Cleardown from RU sent in three consecutive time
513. uator setting If your transmitter begins sending encoded information the instant it transmits the initial encoded information may not be decoded during the autoranging process The same situation can arise when trying to display the first part of the demodulated signal on the Oscilloscope When decoding a signaling sequence using the decoder or when trying to capture the initial modulation waveform of a signal on the Oscilloscope set the upper field to Hold and set the lower field to an appropriate level for the signal being decoded start with 40 dB 485 iain Mo Chapter 17 RF Analyzer Screen Field Descriptions Input Port CAUTION RF Cnt Gate 486 This field selects the RF IN OUT or ANT IN port for making RF measurements The RF IN OUT port must be used for making TX Power measurements on this screen Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel If the RF power at the RF IN OUT port exceeds allowable limits a loud warning signal sounds and a message appears at the top of the screen If this occurs disconnect the RF power press MEAS RESET and allow the Test Set to cool off for approximately 2 minutes before making any other measurements on this port The ANT IN antenna input connector provides a highly sensitive input for very low level signals such as off the air measurements You cannot measure TX RF Power on this screen using the antenna port Howev
514. uelch System e Digital Paging e DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Signaling Encoder e EDACS Enhanced Digital Access Communication System e Function Generator e LTR Logic Trunked Radio Registered trademark of EF Johnson Company e MPT 1327 Trunked Radio e NMT Nordic Mobile Telephone e Tone Sequence When the Test Set is turned on AFGen1 defaults to 3 kHz FM at a 1 kHz rate This can interfere with many Encoder signaling formats also being used as an FM source Therefore we recommend you turn AFGenl off on the RX TEST DUPLEX TEST or RF GENERATOR screen before using the encoder 360 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encosernth Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder AMPS TACS NAMPS NTACS Encoder e AMPS Advanced Mobile Phone Service e NAMPS Narrowband Advanced Mobile Phone Service e TACS Total Access Communications Systems e JTACS Total Access Communications System for Japan e NTACS Narrowband Total Access Communications Systems NTACS is an exten sion of JTACS The AMPS TACS and NAMPS NTACS Encoder modes use the same Forward Control Channel FOCC settings and output format However the Forward Voice Channel FVC information is different Control and Voice Channel Identifiers The Control and Voice channel fields are available in separate menus The Channel field is used to select the Cnt1 FOCC or Voice FVC menu Fields avai
515. uency This measurement area is used to display transmitter frequency error or transmitter frequency The type of measurement displayed depends on the Tune Mode setting in the TX TEST DUPLEX TEST or RF ANALYZER screen See Also Displaying Measurements on page 60 115 iain Mo Chapter 5 AF Analyzer Screen Block Diagram TX Power Transmitter Power measures RF power at the RF IN OUT port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Only the RF IN OUT port can be used for measuring TX Power on this screen When the Input Port is set to Ant four dashes appear in place of digits for this measurement Use the Spectrum Analyzer to measure low level RF power lt 200 mW at the ANT IN port CAUTION Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it See Also Input Port on page 486 TX Power on page 490 TX Pwr Zero on page 491 1 Spectrum Analyzer is optional on some Test Set models 116 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS afascrn fb Main Menu Call Processing Subsystem a
516. ues for settings like External Load Resistance and RF Generator Frequency See item 4 in Figure 3 to see an example of a numeric entry field To change a value 1 2 3 Sehr Position the cursor at the field Key in the desired number using the DATA keys Press ENTER to select the choice OR Position the cursor at the field Push the Cursor Control knob to highlight the desired choice Turn the knob to increment or decrement the value Push the Cursor Control knob or the ENTER key to select the choice 45 ain Men Chapter 1 Get Started How do Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly How do I Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly If your Test Set powers up and displays the RX TEST screen but you suspect an instrument problem use the Instrument Quick Check to verify operation of the basic instrument functions If no failure is indicated by this test but you still suspect a problem refer to the Performance Tests information in the Assembly Level Repair Manual 46 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS getstart fb Main Menu Instrument Quick Check Chapter 1 Get Started How do Verify that the Test Set is Operating Properly 1 Set up the quick check Frere me ao op PRP ORES Connect a cable between the DUPLEX OUT and ANT IN ports Turn instrument power on if it is not already on Press PRESET Press DUPLEX to access the DUPLEX TEST screen Set the T
517. unction Generator s signal modulates the RF Generator or is output through the AUDIO OUT connector e The lower field sets the amplitude including Off Operating Considerations When the Waveform field is set to Sine and the signal is output to the AUDIO OUT connector the amplitude can be set in units of rms or peak voltage This is done in the Sine Units field that appears when Audio Out is selected In all other cases the amplitude is always set in peak voltage Audio output coupling selects ac or dc coupling of the Function Generator to the AUDIO OUT connector when the upper AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out This field alters the FM modulator to allow DCFM from internal and external modulation sources This field also selects ac or dc coupling between the RF Generator s frequency modulator and the rear panel MODULATION INPUT connector This field specifies whether the signal s output is in units of rms or peak This field is only present when the AFGen2 To field is set to Audio Out 401 ain Men Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Function Generator Encoder Waveform This field selects the desired waveform for AF Generator 2 The available waveforms are as follows Sine wave Square wave Triangle wave Ramp positive going and negative going DC Universal Noise Gaussian Noise 402 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu LTR Encoder Chapter 10 Sig
518. unction allows you to display the average value of anumber of measurements You enter the number of measurement samples used to calculate and display the measurement average This dampens the effects of rapidly changing measurements providing a more usable measurement display To Use Measurement Averaging 1 Position the cursor in front of the measurement s unit of measure 2 Press and release the SHIFT key then the INCR x10 key to access the AVG function The default number of average samples is displayed below the measurement e Enter the desired number of measurement samples to be used for calculating the av erage or e Press ON OFF to use the currently displayed number of samples 3 To turn averaging off position the cursor in front of the unit of measure and press and release the SHIFT key then the INCR x10 key to access the AVG function then press the ON OFF key When the averaging function is first enabled a numeric average is calculated and displayed each time a measurement is made This continues until the specified number of samples is reached From that point on the averaging function performs an exponential filtering operation that mimics an RC filter Because of the exponential response any large measurement changes result in a displayed value that ramps up or down to the actual measured value Pressing MEAS RESET clears the measurement history for all measurements and starts the averaging process over Example
519. une Mode field to Manual Set the Tune Freq field to 825 MHz Set the Input Port field to Ant Set the RF Gen Freq field to 825 MHz Set the Amplitude field to 10 dBm Set the Output Port field to Dupl Verify that AFGen1 Freq is set to 1 0000 kHz and that AFGen1 To is set to FM and 3 00 kHz Set the AF Anl In field to FM Demod Setthe Filter 1 field to 300Hz HPF Set the Filter 2 field to 3kHz LPF Verify that De Emphasis is Off Set the Detector field to Pk 2 Turn the VOLUME knob clockwise until you hear a tone 1 kHz default for AFGen1 Freq 2 Check the following readings I I SINAD should be gt 35 dB FM Deviation should be about 3 0 kHz 3 Access the OSCILLOSCOPE screen using the To Screen menu With the default Vert div setting of 2 kHz and a default Time div setting of 200 us you should see two complete sinewaves across the screen 4 Access the SPECTRUM ANALYZER using the To Screen menu You should see an 825 MHz FM carrier 1 Optional on some Test Set models an wenu 47 Chapter 1 Get Started Instrument Functional Diagram Instrument Functional Diagram AUDIO IN gt 114 3 MHz IF OUT ANT gt IN AF Gen Sine DC FM Sine DC Signaling Audio Out N 1 e a AF Generators 1 amp 2 2 20 d Figure 4 Instrument Functional Diagram 1 of 2 48 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS getstart fb Main Menu Chapter 1
520. up on a voice channel If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Select the Release field The Test Set will signal the mobile station with a release order The mobile station will respond to the release order and cease transmission The Test Set will terminate transmission on the forward voice channel and the Connect annunciator will turn off The Test Set will then reconfigure itself for transmission on the forward control channel begin to transmit system parameter overhead messages and the Active annunciator will light Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Change the Transmit Power Level of a Mobile Station 1 Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Meas The upper right hand por tion of the CALL CONTROL screen will display modulation quality measurements of the mobile station s RF carrier The Test Set s data functions such as the average AVG function can be used with any of the measurements Measurement units can also be changed as desired Select the O
521. upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen The Test Set will then reconfigure itself to the voice channel assignments set up in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set signals the mobile station on the assigned voice channel The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set on the reverse voice channel The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel Select the Display Word field A list of reverse channel words which can be displayed will be presented Position the cursor on the desired word and select it The decoded contents for each of the fields in the selected word will be displayed in the lower portion of the display NOTE If a word is chosen which was not part of the decoded reverse channel s message stream all the fields will be blank when it is displayed See CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions on page 171 fora description of each of the available reverse channel words Step 7 and Step 8 in the above procedure can be reversed that is the desired word can be selected first then a mobile station origination can performed If the origination is successful the contents of each display word contained in the reverse control channel s message stream will be updated when the decoding is complete The origination does not have to happen while you are viewing
522. ure you must first set the required serial port settings in the I O CONFIGURE screen and make any hardware connections The Serial Port connections are described in Chapter 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions To Configure for Serial Port Operation 1 Access the I O CONFIGURE screen Set the Serial In field to Inst Set the IBASIC Echo field to On Set the Inst Echo field to On n PF YS N Set the remaining serial communications fields according to your terminal computer s serial communication requirements These fields include e Serial Baud e Parity e Data Length e Stop Length e Rev Pace e Xmt Pace 6 The Test Set now responds to the equivalent characters sent to it by the terminal com puter Equivalent Front Panel Control Characters Table 7 on page 3 90 lists the terminal computer keystrokes that equate to front panel controls Each sequence must be preceded by the Escape key For example to remotely access the CONFIGURE screen press the Esc key then press the C key on your terminal computer Be sure to use upper case C for this example 89 iain wenu Chapter 3 Operating Overview Using Remote Control Table 7 Equivalent Front Panel Control Characters Function ao Function Eea CANCEL A X PERCENT MHZ_V EEX Z S_KHZ_MV YES_ON_OFF BACKSPACE NO_PPM_W ENTER RX a RELEASE 0 T
523. ure 17 Connecting a Mo bile Station to the Test Set on page 123 Turn on the mobile station If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL from the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed Position the cursor on the Display field and select Data Dial the desired phone number on the mobile station and press the SEND key on the mobile station s handset The mobile station signals the Test Set on the reverse control channel with an origination message which includes the dialed phone number the mobile station s MIN number and the mobile station s ESN If the mobile station transmitted properly on the reverse control channel the message RECC Return will flash momentarily in the upper right hand corner of the CALL CONTROL screen and then the mobile station phone number ESN decoded SCM and the called phone number will be displayed The Test Set will then reconfigure itself to the voice channel assignments set up in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen The Access annunciator will then light while the Test Set signals the mobile station on the assigned voice channel The Connect annunciator will light if the mobile station properly signals the Test Set on the reverse voice channel The mobile station is now connected to the Test Set on the assigned voice channel The left hand fields will be replaced with appropriate information Main Menu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subs
524. urement averaging range from 1 to 100 see below No Pk Avg and Off function identically O is provided to maintain backwards compatibility with earlier firmware and software e No Pk Avg means that peak hold and video averaging are off e Pk Hold means that peak hold is on e Avg n enables video averaging over n measurements where n 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 50 or 100 e Off means that peak hold and video averaging are off Operating Considerations After capturing the desired signal you can use the HOLD function press and release the SHIFT key then the PREV key to prevent additional signals from building up on the display This area performs two functions e The upper field selects Normal or High sensitivity for the RF input The High setting adds about 6 dB of sensitivity to the ANT IN port for looking at very low level signals However this setting can cause measurements to be uncalibrated indicated by a mes sage on the screen High sensitivity can also cause high level AM signals to be dis torted e The lower field selects the vertical resolution of the display You can choose from 1 dB 2 dB or 10 GB per graticule 527 ain Men Chapter 21 Spectrum Analyzer Screen Using the Spectrum Analyzer Using the Spectrum Analyzer Automatic Calibration During operation the Spectrum Analyzer pauses for approximately 2 seconds every 5 minutes to recalibrate itself This does not affect the accuracy of displ
525. used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing Subsystem screen This field is used to initiate a handoff from the current voice channel assignments to a new set of voice channel assignments The voice channel number to hand the mobile station off to the channel location NAMPS system type only the initial power level to use on the new voice channel the DSAT sequence NAMPS system type only to transpond on the mobile station and the SAT tone frequency to transpond on the new voice channel are specified using the Chan Ch Loc Pwr Lvl DSAT and SAT fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen 201 an wenu Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Order NOTE Page Page Register Register 202 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f This field is used to send an order type mobile station control message on the forward voice channel to the mobile station The orders available are e Change Power to Power Level 0 7 e Maintenance put the mobile station in maintenance mode e Alert alert the mobile station e MRI mobile reported interference report NAMPS system type only The Order field is a one of many selection field To send an order to the mobile station select the Order field A list of choices is displayed Select the desired order from the Choices menu Once the selection is made a Mobile Station Contr
526. ver test procedure 397 receiver testing 396 transmitter testing 396 mobile subscriber number 434 Mod In To RF Generator screen 499 Mode T O Configure screen 448 Signaling Decoder screen AMPS TACS 277 Signaling Decoder screen CDCSS 286 Signaling Decoder screen Digi Page 291 Signaling Decoder screen DTMF 295 Signaling Decoder screen EDACS 301 Signaling Decoder screen Func Gen 307 Signaling Decoder screen LTR 311 Signaling Decoder screen MPT 1327 317 iain wenu 645 Signaling Decoder screen NAMPS NTACS 277 Signaling Decoder screen NMT 322 Signaling Decoder screen Tone Seq 341 Signaling Encoder TACS mode 361 Signaling Encoder screen CDCSS 375 Signaling Encoder screen Digi Page 380 Signaling Encoder screen DTMF 385 Signaling Encoder screen EDACS 389 Signaling Encoder screen Func Gen 400 Signaling Encoder screen LTR 403 Signaling Encoder screen MPT 1327 411 Signaling Encoder screen NAMPS NTACS mode 361 Signaling Encoder screen NMT 427 Signaling Encoder screen Tone Seq 439 Model Print Configure screen 69 465 Tests External Devices screen 550 Tests Printer Setup screen 552 modifications hardware 596 modulation AM 96 350 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 496 497 507 carrier ACP reference measurement 96 external AM 499 external FM 499 external input 499 FM 96 350 363 376 381 385 390 401 404 429 439 496 497 50
527. vices 548 TESTS Printer Setup 551 TESTS IBASIC Controller 554 ROM Programs 556 iain wenu Contents 23 TX Test Screen Block Diagram 560 Field Descriptions 561 ain wenu 35 Contents 36 24 Connector Key and Knob Descriptions Connector Descriptions 572 Key Descriptions 590 Knob Descriptions 594 iain wenu Contents 25 Modifications Accessories Manuals Support Modifications 596 Accessories 599 Agilent Technologies Support for Your Instrument 609 ain wenu 37 Contents 38 Index 625 iain wenu Get Started ain wenu 39 Chapter 1 Get Started Before Connecting a Radio Before Connecting a Radio CAUTION Figure 1 40 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIgetstart fb The RF IN OUT port should be used for all transmitter tests when the radio is connected directly to the Test Set All UUT transmitter power measurements are made through this port Off the air measurements can be made using the ANT IN port Overpower Damage Refer to the Test Set s front panel for maximum input power level Exceeding this level can cause permanent instrument damage gt W EEE SCREEN CONTROL NNN EEE NSTRUMENTSTATE mm J MSSG HELP CONFIG HOLD PRINT ADRS SAVE AUSER I BBDATAFUNCTIONS 2 AM DATA EEE ki REF SET METER AVG 5 ED i eae m k2 LO LIMIT HILIMIT a om DL MMICURSOR CONTROL m B eN G J us ji A m
528. want the mobile to be sent to e The RX Frequency is the mobile s receive frequency for the selected working channel e The TX Frequency is the mobile s transmit frequency for the selected working channel Enter the Logical ID number Enter the Group ID number Enter the Site ID number Select the Send field under RX Test The Status field should now indicate Control The Test Set should now be sending the control channel s site identification information to the mobile and the mobile should indicate that it is receiving the control channel da ta Select the Handshake field This tells the mobile and RF Generator to go to the work ing channel frequencies The mobile should now indicate that it is busy and is tuned to a working channel this is a receiver handshake The Status field should now indicate Working S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSIencoscrn fh Main Menu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the EDACS Encoder Make Receiver Measurements 1 Press the RX key to access the RX TEST screen 2 Turn AF Generator 1 On Position the cursor in front of the Of f entry in the lower part of the AFGen1 To field and press the ON OFF key The entry should now read 3 00 The working channel is now being modulated at a 1 kHz rate AFGen1 Freq with 3 kHz deviation AFGen1 To in addition to the subaudible EDACS signaling from the encoder AFGen 3 Set the volume control o
529. where the Error Message occurred it may not occur again If it does reappear it would be helpful to Agilent Technologies to record exactly what the configuration of the instrument was when the error appeared and contact Agilent Technologies 619 Main Menu Chapter Text Only Error Messages Operation errors generally occur when you try to do something the Test Set was not designed to do Most messages tell you what to do to correct the problem turn something off reduce a field s value press a certain key and so forth Some common messages are listed here All self tests passed The Test Set did not detect any hardware or firmware failures during its initial self diag nostics This message should always be displayed immediately after instrument turn on Input value out of range A number was entered that was too large or small for the selected field for example try ing to set AFG1 Freq to 125 kHz Invalid keystroke You used a key that has no function relating to the selected field for example pressing the ON OFF key while the Filter 1 field is selected Option not installed You selected a function that requires optional hardware that is not present for example selecting TDMA TEST from the To Screen menu when you do not have an Agilent 83201A or Agilent 83201B Cellular Adapter connected to the Test Set 620 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errorrmsg fm ain wenu Table 22 Re
530. y low level signals such as off the air measurements You cannot measure TX RF Power on this screen using the ANT IN port However low level RF power at the ANT IN port can be measured using the Spectrum Analyzer Connecting a signal of gt 200 mW to the ANT IN port can cause instrument damage although internal protection circuits can typically withstand a short duration signal of 1 or 2 Watts If the overpower circuit is triggered signified by a warning message at the top of the screen remove the signal from the ANT IN port and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it 355 Chapter 9 Duplex Test Screen Field Descriptions Output Port CAUTION RF Gen Freq 356 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS dxtscrn This field selects the RF Generator s output port Operating Considerations Maximum signal levels at each port are printed on the front panel Applying reverse RF power to the DUPLEX OUT connector can damage the instrument A message is displayed when an overpower conditions occurs Whenever possible use the RF IN OUT connector when testing transceivers to prevent damage from accidental transmitter keying If a reverse power condition triggers the internal protection circuit remove the reverse power signal and press the MEAS RESET key or turn the Test Set off and on to reset it This field sets the RF Generator s frequency Tune Freq Tune Mode
531. y required for complete manual testing Under software control you can perform receiver and transmitter tests on several channels in succession very quickly You can choose any combination of tests from full transmitter and receiver testing to a single test The software is shipped on a memory card that inserts directly into your Test Set and it comes with complete documentation and a blank SRAM memory card for storing your test procedures and test data 395 ar wenu Chapter 10 Signaling Encoder AF Generator 2 Using the EDACS Encoder Testing EDACS Mobiles 396 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS encoscrr_th Main Menu When the mobile is turned on it automatically tunes to its pre programmed control channel frequency The Test Set generates the control channel s carrier and site identification data using the RF Generator s and the EDACS Encoder s settings The RF carrier level for the control channel and working channel is adjusted using the Amplitude field on the DUPLEX TEST screen Once the mobile is receiving the Control Channel the encoder can send a digital message to the mobile to go to a designated Working Channel for making receiver tests this is called a handshake Testing the Mobile s Receiver If the working channel s RF carrier s level is high enough the mobile s receiver unsquelches to allow the modulating signal speech or a test tone to be heard from your mobile s speaker
532. ystem Using the CALL CONTROL Screen to Test Call Processing Functions Send an Alert Order to a Mobile Station NOTE 1 Ensure that the Test Set is in the connected state See Page a Mobile Station on page 146 for information on how to bring a mobile station up on a voice channel 1 If the CALL CONTROL screen is not displayed select CALL CNTL under the To Screen menu The CALL CONTROL screen will be displayed 2 Select the Order field A Choices menu is displayed showing the various orders which can be sent to the mobile station Select the Mainten order from the list of choices The Test Set will then go into the Access state and signal the mobile station with a maintenance order Ifthe mobile station is responding properly it will go into its maintenance state as defined by the applicable cellular system standard The left hand fields in the Voice Channel Assignment section will display a while the Test Set is in the access state 3 Select the Order field A Choices menu is displayed showing the various orders which can be sent to the mobile station Position the cursor next to the Alert order and select it The Test Set will then signal the mobile station with an alert order If the mobile station is responding properly it will alert that is it will ring Press the SEND key on the mobile station to respond to the alert order The mobile station should exit the maintenance state The Test Set upon detecting that the mobile
533. ystem transmitters using various formats such as POCSAG and GSC Golay Sequential Code The Tune Freq field of the TX TEST screen is typically used to tune to the pager channel to be decoded STGMALING DECODER Status Data Rate Dota Tree IDEE Idle march Meas Assinale Display Pose Line Index E tor Meas Data Display Gate Tine E 5 AF Anl In Input Level V Tria Level 383 mV Polarity H ory Invert digi de1 wmf The Digital Paging Decoder Screen Audio frequency analyzer input selects the source of the signal to be analyzed This is typically set to FM Demod for off the air decoding of pager transmitters Arm measurement prepares the decoder to be triggered by an incoming signal 291 Chapter 8 Signaling Decoder Screen Digital Paging Decoder Data Display This field displays up to three different decoded parameters after a message has been analyzed Pager code the unique pager code number or address Function number representing one of the four types of signals that can be sent Pager data information sent as a numeric or alpha numeric message This parameter is not displayed when tone only formats are decoded Data Rate This display field lists the data rate of the received signal in bits per second bps Operating Considerations This measurement relies on the digital paging encoder screen s data rate setting Set the enc
534. z SPEC ANL SID AUTHEN aa Figure 20 AMPS CALL CONTROL Screen with Meas Selected 132 S agilent 8920 8920b USRGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callscrn f Main Menu Display E TX Frea Error ELA F Deviation kHz O Active O Resister TX Power EE ODSAT 08T hex iiss 0 0663 2556CB Connect Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen CALL CONTROL 0 336 0537 Systen Typre Yoice Channel Assignment To Screen NAMPS Entrl Chan EEE Anplitude dEn SPEC ANL SID 22 Figure 21 NAMPS CALL CONTROL Screen with NMeas Selected DSAT This field is displayed only when the system type is set to NAMPS DSAT is divided into two field The left hand field displays the DSAT control message identifier being broadcast by the Test Set The DSAT channel number identifier is displayed only when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel The right hand field highlighted field is used to select one of the seven valid DSAT sequences to be used on the voice channel See Chan on page 129 for more information about the voice channel The DSAT channel number is followed by the corresponding DSAT sequence as defined in IS 88 133 ain Mo Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem The CALL CONTROL Screen DSAT DST hex ESN dec ESN hex FM Deviation 134

User's Guide - iinet.net.au

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents